GOVERNMENT OF INDIA

DEPARTMENT OF ARCHAEOLOGY

CENTRAL ARCHAEOLOGICAL
LIBRARY

Call No. 451*^21^ *TcuL

D.G.A. 79
PANJAB UNIVERSITY ORIENTAL PUBLICATIONS, No. \2

PHONOLOGY OF PANJABI
AS SPOKEN ABOUT LUDHIANA
AND A

LUDHIANI PHONETIC READER

(With a Preface from Dr. T. G. BAILEY)

[Thesis approved by the University of London for the degree of

Doctor of Philosophy (1926)]

JaX
PUBLISHED BY

THE UNIVERSITY OF THE PANJAB

LAHORE
1934
 Printed by G. D. Tbukral,
at the Mercantile Preae, Laboro.

CENTRAL APrMNrnr.OG!G«
UBRAKY, r.t.W ..
Am. No.Ilftf?.
iu. 5* J • .$7 .
 PREFACE.
The present volume is virtually an embodiment in print of
ray thesis entitled “The Phonology of Panjabi as spoken about
Ludhiana” which was accepted by the University of London in
1926 for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. The work consists
of two parts: the first deals with Phonology proper and the
second is a Phonetic Reader of the Ludhiani dialect which won
me the Laura Soames Prize at the University College, London.
My interest for the subject goes as far back as 1913 when I
was studying for ray M.A. in Sanskrit. During these days the
Pan jab University awarded me the Mayo-Patiala Research
Studentship for a phonetic analysis of my mother-tongue.
In 1919 I was deputed the task of compiling a Dictionary of
the Panjabi language, in which capacity I had to ransack nearly
the whole of the Panjabi literature, as also to amass a large
amount of material from the lips of Panjabi speakers. While
the dictionary was in the making I sailed for England to prose¬
cute studies in Indian Philology. There in London T studied
Philology with Prof. R. L. Turner at the School of Oriental
Studies, and Phonetics, with Prof. Daniel Jones at the University
College. The present book is the result of my labour of two
years that I spent there. ,
Some of the special features of my thesis are:
1. The discovery of the Law of Accent-shift in the central
languages, Hindi, Panjabi, Gujarati and Rajasthani
(§§ 10—12,181—91). By its help have been explained
such forms as seemed irregular hitherto.
2. History of the Primitive Indian long vowels before
consonant groups (§§ 16—25).
3. It defines the limits of the period in which the Anusvara,
the parent of the so-called “Spontaneous Nasalisation”
was inserted (§ 113).
4. it explains the derivation of a ntunber of words that
seemed strange and doubtful before.
 1Y

5. It affords new strength to the regularity with which the

phonetic laws work in a language.
6. It contains a'number of minute phonetic observations.
The thesis was accepted for inclusion in the Pan jab University
Oriental Publications early in 1927. But the actual printing had
to be put off for want of phonetic type in India till 1931 when
special founts were cast by the Mercantile Press, Lahore. But
then sprung up another impediment: I was medically advised
not to strain my eyes. Consequently the work of proof-reading
was protracted as it had to be done by my friends—Messrs.
Raghunandan Shastri, M.A , M.O.L., and Har Dev Bahri, M.A.,
M.O-L. to whom I am much indebted.

In the end comes the most pleasant duty—that of thanking

my benevolent teacher, Principal A.C.Woolner without -whose
kind and generous guidance I would never have been what I am.
Ever since I came in contact with him, he has always been a
source of inspiration to me, and the present work is a visualisa¬
tion of the enthusiasm for Philology he invoked in me.
I cannot close this preface without thanking Prof. R.L.
Turner and Prof. D.Jones and his colleagues who gave me help
and advice in bringing my thesis to its present form.

Oriental College, Lahore.

BANARSI DAS JAIN.
13th December, 1933.
 CONTENTS.
Page.
PREFACE _ — iii
INTRODUCTION — _ — 1—7
Area where Panjabi is spoken—§ 1 — 1
Two main forms—ordinary Panj. and Dogri—$ 2 1
Panj. Literature— §§ 3-5 — — 2
General position of Panj.—§ 6 _ _ 4
f
i Ludhiani compared with Majhi—§ 7 _ 4
* r
DEFINITIONS—§ 8 _ — __ 7
-S
PHONOLOGICAL CHANGES -§ 9 — 7
U
/-A ACCENT, (stress and pitch)—§§ 10—12 _ 7
VOWEL CHANGES: _ 9-48
Vowel-changes in accented syllables—§§ 14—If) 9
Vowels in closed syllables—§§ 16—25 _ 11
Unexplained changes in accented vowels—§§ 26—40 . 14
Vowels in unaccented syllables—
Treatment of the final syllable—§§ 41—50 . 19
Vowels in non-final (unaccented) syllable
Pre-accentual—§§ 51—63 _
Post-accentual—§§ 64—67 _
Effects of h on vowels — §§ 68—78 _
Tonic effects of h on vowels )_.. gg
93
History of the discovery of tones in Panjabi)
Treatment of j* (S[) —§§ 94—99 —
Vowels in contact—§§ 100—103 —
Panjabi Diphthongs—§§ 104—106 —
Vowel-gradation—§§ 107—110_ —
Nasal Vowels in Panjabi—§§ 111—116 —
Denasalisation—§§ 117—119 — —
CONSONANTS-General—§§ 120-22 _
ASPIRATION—§§ 123—132 _ —
DISASPIRATION—§§ 133—36 — —
•»
** PI SINGLE CONSONANTS—§ 137 _ _ 57
Initial Stops—§ 137 __ __ __ _ 57
 VI

Intervocalic stops—§ 138 _ __ — 58

Initial Nasals—§ 139_ _ _ _ 60
Intervocalic nasals—§ 140 _ — 61
Initial y-, v- § 141 __ — _ 62
Intervocalic -y- -v—§ 142 _ _ _ 62
r, I-§ 143 _ _ 63
Initial s—§ 144 _ _ _ 65
Intervocalic -s—§ 145 _ - ,, _ 65
Initial h-—§ 146 _ _ _ _ 65
Intervocalic -h—§ 147 _ _ — 66
CONSONANTS IN CONTACT—§§ 148-151 _ 66—87
Stop+Stop (Homorganic) —§ 152 _ — 70
Stop+Stop (Heterorganic)—§ 153 _ _. 71
Stop-rNasal—$ 154 — — _ — 71
Nasal+Stop—§$ 155—56 — _ — 73
Nasal+Nasal—§ 157 — — ___ 76
Double Nasals—§ 158— _ _ — 76
Nasal+Semi-vowel—$ 159 _ 76
Nasal+Sibilants—§ 160 — _ 76
Groups with y—$ 161 _ _ — 77
Groups with r—$ 162— — _ 80
r+consonant—§ 163 _ _ _ 82
Groups with 1—§ 164— _ _ - 83
Groups with v—$ 165 _ _ __ 83
Groups with a sibilant (Sibilant-f-stop)—§ 166 — 84
Groups with a sibilant (Stop-f-sibilant)—§ 167 85
Groups with h—§ 16S — _ —«. 87
CERBBRALISATION—§ 169-71— _ _ 87
SVARABHAKTI-H 172—174 - __ 90
INSERTION OF PLOSIVES—§ 175 — ___ 90
INSERTION OF r—* 176 _ _ 91
DOUBLING OF PI intervocalic stops—§ 177 — . 92
METATHESIS—§ 178 — _ __ 92
CONTAMINATION—§ 179 — - — 92
ONOMATOPOESIS—§ 180 __ _ . 92
 vii
SHIFT OF STRESS-ACCENT—§§ 181—87 __ — 93
INDEX OF PANJABI (Ludhiani) words _ ___ 101
INDEX OF SANSKRIT words __ — _ 137
PART II.
LUDHIANI PHONETIC READER.
Preface from Dr. T. Q. Bailey — - ._ 153
INTRODUCTION —— _ 155
Ludhiani VOWELS - -r„ __ 156
Notes on the Ludhiani VOWELS — - _ _ 157
Ludhiani DIPHTHONGS ...... - __ 159
Ludhiani CONSONANTS - -- - _ 160
Plosives _ _ — •_ i- 162
Affricates _ _ —r _ 162
Nasals _ _ - i MM ««. 162
Lateral _ _ _ _ 163
Rolled and flapped ... _ 163
Fricatives _ _ _ — 163
ASSIMILATION — MM __ 164
STRESS _ —_ MM . 165
LENGTH _ MM — 166
TONES — MMM 167
NOTES ON LUDHIANI TONES — -. 169
INTONATION __ «m— — _ - 169
Additional notes on Ludhiani sounds _ — 171
Chief difficulties experienced by English speakers in
learning Ludhiani and vice versa — — 173
Length (supplementary) — — — 173
RHYTHM — _ — 176
TEXTS- — — (For a list of texts see p. 177)
VOCABULARY — — _ 215
 II sfcficrcmro sw: i
PHONOLOGY OF PANJABI
AS

SPOKEN ABOUT LUDHIANA.

Introduction*.
§1. The dialed which forms the subject of this thesis is
spoken at and about the town of Ludhiana with a few class
differences, and goes under the common name of Panjabi.
Literally speaking the term Panjabi denotes the language of the
Panjab, “the land of the five rivers.”2 This area, however, does
not cover the whole of Panjabi, nor is Panjabi the language of
the whole of this area. To the east it is spoken much beyond the
Sutlej, while in the west it is not spoken in great parts of the
Bari, Rachna and Chaj Doabs.* The political extension of the
province brought within its boundaries all the speakers of Panjabi
to the east, but included also speakers of yet other dialects.4
Hence it is not strictly logical to say that Panjabi is the language
of the Panjab.
§2. Sir George A. Grierson has restricted the term for
dialects spoken over a fairly well-defined area. He distinguishes
two main forms of the speech—the ordinary Panjabi and Dogri.
The ordinary Panjabi has two standard dialects. The one re¬
cognised by the people themselves is Majhi spoken in the districts
of Lahore and Amritsar which is considered to be the purest

(1) For general history of Tndo-Aryan speech in India, see

J. Bloch: La Formation de la Langue Marathi $§ 1—26.
(2) Hobson Jobson: s. v. “Punjaab”.
(3) L. S. I. IX’ p. 6as.
(4) Mr. II. A. Rose in his u Contributions to Panjabi Lexico¬
graphy”: Indian Antiquary 190S pp. 360 etc. treats Panjabi as
the language of the Panjab and includes in it Lalmdl, Pahari,
Bfigaru etc, -•
 2
form of the language. This judgment of the people is in keeping
with the fact that the Majh area has remained the seat of
government for several centuries. The other standard is that
developed by the Christian missionaries who first settled at
Ludhiana and became familiar with the dialect spoken there1.
This lias not given rise to any great native literature.*
§3. Literature3. The Adi-Granth is supposed to represent the
earliest document written in the Panjabi language. But as a matter
of fact it is a conglomeration of Indian dialects somewhat
distorted by its redactors. About Jayadeva’s Bengali hymns
appearing in the Granth, Dr. S. K. Chatterjee remarks that their

1. L. S. I. IX1 p. G09.
2. Pt. Sardha Ram, the writer of the famous books “Sikkha
di? Raj di Vithea” and “Panjabi Bat-Cit” belonged to Phillour,
seven or eight miles north of Ludhiana, but lie did not write in
the pure form of his native tongue.
3. Nothing in English has yet been written about Panjabi
literature except the information contained in the following
books.
(?) E. Trnnpp: “The Adi Granth, or the Holy Scriptures of
the Sikhs, translated from the Original GurmukhI with Introductory
Essays/’ London, 1877.
(n) II. T. Thornton. “Vernacular Literature and Folklore of
the Panjab.” J. R. A. S. (Vol. XVII)) 1885 pp. 373 ff.
(Hi) M. A. Maeauliffo: ‘‘The Sikh Religion, its Gurus, Sacred
Writing and Authors.” 6 vols. Oxford 1909.
(it?) R. C. Temple: “ The Legends of the Panjab.” Bombay
and London Vol. I (1884), Vol. II (1885) and Vol. Ill (1900). *
(?') C. Swynnerton: “Romantic Tales from the Panjab,
collected and edited from various sources.” London, 1903.
(rt) G. A. Grierson: Bibliography given in L. S. I. IX1 pp.
619—24.
(fit) Quarterly lists of the books printed in the Panjab,
issued by the Panjab Government as supplements to the Panjab
Government Gazette.
(riit) J. F. Bluinhardt: “Catalogues of the Hindi, Panjabi,
Sindhi and Pashtu Printed Books in the Library of the British
Museum.” London 1893.
(is) J. F. Blumhardt: “ Catalogue of the Library of the
India Office”, Vol. II, part III, Hindi, Panjabi, Pashtu and
Sindhi Books, London 1902,
 3

garb has been so much changed that they have hardly left any
trace of their Bengali origin. The chief among the dialects
represented in the Granth is the Braj Bhasa. Only a small portion
of the work can claim to be called Panjabi as based on the spoken
language. A good example of this is Japji, the opening verses
of the Granth.

The Mohaminadans were the first cultivators of Panjabi

literature as based on the popular speech chiefly of the Gujrat
and Gujranwala districts. The Hindus looked for their poetical
inspiration to Braj or, sometimes, to the language of Tulsi
Ramayana, and lienee a mixed dialect of Braj and Panjabi was the
result. Quite a large literature exists in this mixed language, a
good deal of which is still unpublished. It is used up to the
present day by several Hindu and Sikh preachers at Amritsar
and elsewhere. A similar mixture of Braj and Bengali, called
Brajaholi, was used by the Vai^ava poets of Bengal.1

H- The Mohaminadans who had been recently converted had

nothing to fall back upon except their own vernacular; hence
arose a considerable literature in the spoken dialect dealing with
various topics of the Muslim religion. Mention may be made of a
Jang-nama, describing the battle between the Imam Hasan and

{a) H. v. Glasenapp: Die Literaturen Indiens von Ihrcn

Anfangen bis zur Gcgenwart: Leipzig 1921>.
In vernacular, however, a good beginning has been made
by Bawa Budh Singh who brought out his “Hans Cfig” (AVazir
i-Hind Press Amritsar 1914) and “ Koil ku” (Mufid-i-Am Press,
Lahore 1916) in Panjabi (Gurmukhi). Besides these, PIrft
Ditta’s edition of “ H7r Waris shah” (Lahore 1918) contains a
useful introduction (Urdu) cn the literature about Hir. Maulfi
Bakhsh Kushta < f Amritsar, also, has given a brief survey of
Panjabi literature as an appendix in the edition of his llir
(Urdu).
(1) D. C. Sen: “History of Bengali Language and Literature”
Calcutta 1911, p. 387.
Yazid, written by MuqbiP about 200 years ago. Older than
Muqbil is Baba Farid*. His couplets are in a form of Lahudi,
but those found in the Adi Granth under his name are almost free
from Lahndisins.
Apart from the religious use, the vernacular was also used
for national and tribal ballads—Pfiran, Rasalu, Hir, SassI,
Haqiqat etc.
§5. Here it will be interesting to point out that like Hindustani
literary Panjabi, also, has two varieties, which may be called
Persian-Panjabi and Gurmukln-Panjabi. They differ from each
other exactly as Urdu does from Hindi, viz., in script, vocabulary,
metres, similes, sources for subjects, and a few points of construc¬
tion and grammar*.

§6. The general position of Panjabi among the Aryan

languages of India is between western Hindi and Lalindi. The
important features which distinguish it from either, or are
shared by it in common with oue of the two have been
summed up by Sir George Grierson in L. S. I. IX' pp.
615-17.
$7. To distinguish the dialect examined here from other
dialects of Panjabi, I shall call it Ludhiani. The following
points may be noted in which it differs from Majhi, the
popular standard dialect :—
(t) So far as my speech may be taken to represent
Ludhiani, it does not distinguish between dental and cerebral

(1) Lithographed in Persian characters, Lahore 1877.

Numerous editions have appeared since. Another poem by the
same called u Hir"’ was edited by me and published by the
Pan jab University, Lahore 1921.
(2) Gulzar or Israr-i-Faridi. Lithographed, Lahore or
Multan f
(3) Lately the Panjab University Las felt the need of in¬
stituting two different sets of examinations lor these varieties
of Panjabi.
 5

n and 1. With the modifications described ' under Phonetics,

all its n and 1 are alveolar. According to Sir George Grierson
MajhI, too,, does not distinguish between 1 and J1 but a few
miles away from Lahore the distinction is very prominent.*
(it) The reduction of the intervocalic h to tones is not so
common in Ludhiani as it is in MajhI, thus Lahaur, Luhari,
KahanI, rahi pronounced with h in Ludhiani are pronounced
with tones in MajhI as [lcAor, lueari, kcapi. rai].
(in) Ludhiani does not possess initial v- as Malwaf and
MajhI do.
(iv) Ludhiani lias a greater tendency to double intervocalic
consonants than MajhI has. L. S. I. IX* p. 651. Compare the
doubling tendency of vernacular Hindustani of Saharanpur,
Meerut and Muzaffarnagar districts. L. S. I IX1 p. 213.
(v) MajhI often pronounces a vowel in a low tone after
an initial r; e. g. Ram, rBfti, RanO, become Rham [rearm],
rhetH [rcOt*i]» RhanO [rcapo] in MajhI.*
(vi) Ludhiani does not use the double tone so frequently as
the dialect of Wazirabad. Ludh. <jthidcj, bhabbl, but Wazirabad!
cjhiddh [tcitf*], bhabbhi [pcdb’i]4 5.
(vii) There is a tendency to interchange r and r to some
extent in MajhI. It is very conspicuous in Multan!3. Ludh. purl,
kacarni but WP, Lah. purl, kacaup.

(1) Sir George's argument that Dulhan Darpan, written in

the purest form of the Majli, does not contain a single
cerebral \ frcui cover to cover” (L. S. I. IX' p. 609) may only
be a matter tf printing. Maya Singh's Dictionary (Lahore
1895), also does not distinguish between 1 and J, while the
Ludhiana Dictionary (1854) on which it is based, distin¬
guishes them very carefully.
(2) Dr. Hailey : “Panjabi Manual”, and “Panjabi Phonetic
Reader”. * . ■
(3) Personal observation tor Lahore; Bailey’s Panjabi
Manual for Wazirabad.
(4) Panjabi Phonetic Reader p. xv.
(5) L. S. I. VIH* p. 324.
 6

(vitt) The PI groups tr dr are heard in Majhi while in

Lndhiani they have been assimilated. Lud't. putt, sut, tinn,
chidda, nld; Majhi puttar, sutar, trai, chidra, nlndar.
(ix) Pronominal suffixes occasionally heard at Lahore,
become more prominent as one goes towards Lahndl, but are
altogether absent in Lndhiani.
(x) Ludhiani is more regular in its formation of the past
tense or past participles than Majhi is. Newton’s Panjabi
Grammar p. 460 gives a list of some fity irregular forms, all of
which I have heard at Lahore, but only about a dozen at Ludhiana,
many of which have the regular form also, chfitta from channa
‘ to sift’ heard at Lahore should be added to Newton’s list.
(.ti) The Future III sing, is often karlga etc. in Majhi as
against karu or karuga etc., in Ludhiani.
(am) -ga is often added to the substantive verb in the present
and past tenses in Ludhiani but never in Majhi.
(.ritt) The verb substantive in the past tense is conjugated
for person in Majhi but not in Ludhiani.
(a:ti)) The word for * house’ ghar is pronounced with a short
dose vowel at Ludhiana thus [kcAr], but with a longer and opener
vowel at Lahore. In Potliowari it is distinctly [a:] which I observed
at Taxila. The Lahore pronunciation is somewhere between the
two. I have not, however, observed this difference of pronunciation
in other words ending in *ar.
(xv) The word for ‘one’s own’ is apna in Ludhiani but apga
in Majhi, and av da in Malwai.
(xvi) L.SX IX1 p. 616 says that the postposition ^f the agent
case is nai or nai in Panjabi. So far as I have heard, it is ns or
n§ everywhere as in Ludihiani. In the Doabi of the Hoshiarpur
district, however, n&i is frequently heard.
(am) The vocabulary is practically the same in both the
dialects, but quite a large number of words differs inform and
 7
pronunciation; e.g. Ludh. tinn (3)', gearS (ll)’caubl (24) paccl
(25) bun (to weave), bhanaja (sister's son), gal (abu.se), mala
(wreath), latta or litta (taken) but MajhT trai, yabrft, cahvi
panjhl, nn, bhan§8, gahl, mahla, lita etc.
§8. Definitions. For the definition of Primitive Indian (PI),
Middle Indian (MI) and Modern Indian (Mod. T) see Turner
§5. In the course of the present study it was often necessary
to distinguish between Eastern Panjabi (EP) and Western
Panjabi (WP). By EP is meant the language spoken in the
South-eastern districts of the Panjab, viz., Ludhiana, Malerkotla,
part of Ferozepore, the Powadh area, Jalandhar and part of
Hoshiarpur. PowadhT when specially mentioned, denotes the
language spoken about the town of Patifila.
WP denotes the language spoken in the districts of Amritsar,
Ltihore, Gujranwala and Gujrat. and parts of Sialkote and
Ghirdaspur.
Phonology.
$9. The phonological changes undergone by PI in its develop¬
ment into Panjabi may be divided into two classes—Quantitative
and Qualitative. The former depend on what is commonly
called stress-accent. They affect syllables as a whole but unless
the syllable contains a long consonant or a consonant group,
apppar in vowels only. The other kind of changes depend on the
position, the neighbour ami the articulation of a sound, and
generally affect consonants but very rarely vowels also. Here it
will be more convenient to treat separately the changes undergouo
by vowels and consonants.
Vowel-cbanges.
$10. Accent. As just mentioned, vowel-changes mainly depend
on stress accent. Now the nature, history and even the very
existence of this accent in PI or its subsequent stages are not
known with any certainty. Although the Sanskrit Grammarans
make no mention of a non-mnsical accent, and although it is
 8
highly improbable.that it should have escaped the notice of the
eminent Hindu phoneticians, if it had been at all prominent, yet
the fact that so many vowels were shortened or dropped in the
course of their history .compelled scholars to propose different
theories for their explanation. Dr. Pischel ascribed to the
musical accent of PI, functions similar to those of stress-accent
in explaining certain Pkt. forms’, while Sir George Grierson* and
Prof. Jacobi1 * 3 assumed the existence of a stress-accent in Vedic
and Sanskrit apart from the musical one. Originally perhaps
the stress-accent fell on the same syllable as the musical acceut
and hence the grammarians * silence about it4. In course of time
the musical accent ceased to ex:st, and then the stress-accent
which then fell on thp same syllable that had lost the pitch,
readjusted itself till it was thrown on the first syllable, or on the
syllable (except the final) containing a long vowel; and if there
were moi*e than one syllable containing long vowels, on thp last
(not the final) from among those.
$11. The different views regarding stress-accent in Sanskrit
and Prakrits held by Pischel, Jacob*, Grierson and Bloch5 have
been d'scussed at length by Turner6. He shows that the examples
which the German professors have explained in the light of stress-
accent can be explained in a different way, and may not at all
be due to stress. His enquiry has, however, brought to light
another very interesting fact, namely that the IAVs can be classed
into two gronps of which one (consisting of H. G. Panj. and

(1) Grammatik der Prakrit Sprachen §§ 141-47.

- (2) Z.D.M.G. Yob 49, p. 395; J. R. A. S. for Janv. 1895.
(3) Z.D.M.G. VoT. 47 p., 576.
(4) Cf. Prof. D. Jones’s remarks: “The subject of stress
is very closely connected with that of intonation. It is certain that
much of the effect commonly ascribed to stress is really a matter
of intonation.” Pronunciation of Russian 1923 $ 763.
For functions of musical and stress accent see Giles: Com¬
parative Philology: London 1901 $$ 88-94.
"■ (51 «»2 ff.
.* (6>- J.R.A.S., 1916, pp. 203,

j
 9

possibly Bong, and Singh.) descends from a Pkt. or Pkts. in which

a penultimate stress’ had developed, and the other group repre¬
sented by Marathi comes from a Pkt. in which the stress had
appeared on the same syllable as the Vedir accent.

§12. Without postulating further on this point, it is certain

that there was in Skt. and Pkts. something with functions
similar to those of stress-accent, and that this had much to
do with the phonology of the IAVs. We may call this
something the syllabic prominence of a word which accord¬
ing to phoneticians comprises three distinct forces—length,
stress and pitch. In some languages one of these forces may
be more conspicuous than the others, e.g. in English stress
is more marked. In others length may be more conspicuous
as in several Indian languages. Dr. Bloch’s remarks about
Marathi that it is convenient to regard the regular vowel-
changes of quantity and even of quality in that language as
depending on a purely quantitative rhythm, tit in quite well
with the above notion of syllabic prominence.

Vowel-changes.
§13. Having thus shown the necessity for assuming a stress-
accent in Skt. and Pkts. and the place it occupied in the word,
it is reasonable that the changes of accented vowels should be
treated separately from those of the unaccented.
Vowels in accented Syllables.
§14. The vowel-changes are comparatively more modern
than the consonant ones. As we proceed from PI to Ml
we find that vowels have preserved both quality and quantity
except in some cases. The regular changes are j* > a, i, u, ri-;
(J > ili); ai > 6; au >5, the long vowels becoming short before
consonant-groups except in the X. W. Prakrits.* Even in Apabh-

(1) To be modified according to the statement about the re¬

adjustment of the stress-accent mentioned in the last paragraph.
(2) T. Michelson: JAOS, Vol. 31 p. 232.
 10

raipia the condition of vowels has remained practically the

same as that in Pkts, except in the final position where
they have been shortened. But the case is very different when
we come to the modern vernaculars. In these the unaccented
vowels have suffered terribly. The only force to preserve
syllables and consequently vowels was accent. It is, therefore,
that vowels in accented syllables in whatever position they
may he, have come down unchanged. Here it may be pointed
out that an accented syllable is usually closed or intoned in
Panjabi, the reason being that the PI intervocalic stops have
disappeared or become h, and most of the Panj. intervocalic
consonants are the result of PI consonant-groups.
§15. Examples:—1
a > a : agg (agni-); attfi (ast£u); sapp (sarpa-); cand, WP
cann (candri-); karna (kiroti); gadha (gardabhS)
a > a : anda (an<J&-)> adda (ardrft ), kanna (karuja ), dakh
(draksa), kana (kani-), namana (nirmaua-), WP nanan
(ninanda).
i > i : ikkh (ik$u-), innhan (indhana-), pinn (plnda')>
sikkh (Siksa).
I > I : likh (Uk$a), jl (jlv4-)f plrha (pitha-), pit* (plda),
blhl (vlthika), WP hlh (Is£).
u > u : mu^tb (musti-), russaua (rusyati), pur (puta-),
putt (putri), kukkh (kuksi ).
u > u : una (un£-), jua (dyilt£), mut (mtitra), sul (suci-),
gurha (gudhi).
e > s : khet (ksStra-), bhed (bhedra-), Slua (gluka).
5 > 5 : 5d (odra ), cor (cori), kotttaa (kOffha-).
ai > 5 : ekka (aikya), cet (oaitra-)*
au > 5 : pQtta (p&utra-), gora (gaur£), dohta (dauhitra-).
No example has survived in Panjabi containing the PI
vowel J.

- (1) The accent mark on PI words represents the musical

accent and not the stress.

A
.3
 11

Vowels in closed Syllables.1 2

§16. Vowels in closed syllables arc usually accented, and con¬
sequently they have preserved their quantity and quality except
when they lose their accent. Thus long vowels appear as long, and
short ones as short. In this respect Panjabi together with SindhI,
Lalindi and other N. W. languages is more archaic than its
other sisters of the central and outer groups, viz., Hindi,
Gujarati, Rajasthani, Marathi, Bengali etc. In Pkts. of the
latter, long vowels before consonant-groups were shortened
which in course of time were again lengthened in Hindi
Gujarati etc., but this time at the cost of shortening the
following consonant, so that all distinction of original vowel-
length in front of consonant-gronps was lost in these dialects.
§17. The absolute length of the Panjabi vowels descended
from PI long vowels before consonant-groups obeys the general
laws of vowel-length in Panjabi, i. c. they are fully long
in syllables closed by a single consonant, a little shorter in
open syllables, and still shorter in syllables closed by a
long consonant or a group behaving as such.* Although the
absolute length in the last case is nearly the same or often
less than that of the corresponding Panj. vowel occurring in
an accented syllabic closed by a single consonant and descended
from a PI short vowel in an open syllable, yet the two differ
in quality, the former being somewhat closer than the latter;
and in Panjabi as in several other languages, long vowels
are a little closer than their corresponding short ones.

(1) In Skt. closed syllables were of two kinds—closed by a

single consonant and closed by one or more consonants of a
group the rest of which formed part of the following syllable.
Closed syllables of the first kind occurred in pausa only,
and those of the second kind in the interior of a word
or sentence. For closed syllables of Panjabi see Length in
Phonetics.
(2) This is perhaps a universal rule in languages where
long consonants exist. For Russian see D. Jones: Pronunciation
of Russian §§ 746-50.
 12

$18. In the North-Western Prakrits the tendency for

shortening long vowels before consonant-groups does not seem
to have arisen. At least there is no documentary evidence
to show that they ever shortened the long vowels in closed
syllables to such an extent as to confuse them with
the original short ones. AAoka’s edicts at Mansehra and
Sbahabazgarhl do not help us in this matter as they are
engraved in Kharn?thl script which does not mark vowel-length.
The Girnar recension, however, preserves long-vowels before
consonant-groups,1 2 although, in Gujarati ApabhraipSa they
appear as short, being again lengthened with compensatory
shortening of the following consonant.

$19. The preservation of vowel-length before consonant-

groups is a regular phenomenon in Panjabi, there being a
few exceptions only. A final double consonant following a long,
vowel is shortened.
Examples
a : satt (saptA), hatth (bAsta), kamm (kArma) dand
(dAnta-), sadd ($Abda-) etc.
a : kanna (kAnda ), passa (pargvA ), kath (ka$tha-).
i : sinjma (sincAti), citta (citrA), mitt (mitrA.)
1 : likh(llk?a).
u : sutta (suptA ), putt (putrA ), duddh (dugdhA-).
u : sut (sutra ), cunna (curna-).
g : nsttl (ngtrf), j§t$ha (jySstha), khefc (ks$tra-).
5 : kottha (ko?tha ), eckkha (coksa-)
$20. PI ai au before consonant-groups are represented
by i, u (ore, o presumably short) in Pkts., but in Panjabi
they appear as long g, o, so in H. Guj.* etc. after lengthening
of the Pkt. short e, o.

(1) Michelson: JAOS Vo). 31, pp. 231-34.

(2) Turner: $ 37.
 13

ai : akka (aikya), cet (caitra-)

au : potta (piutra-).
$21. Exceptions arc of two kinds, (i) those in which an
originally long vowel is shortened and (ii) those in which
an originally short vowel is lengthened. The first kind seems
to have been borrowed in the Pkt. stage, ami the second
kind in the modern stage from some neighbouring dialect
having opposite tendencies, possibly B8g*ru or vernacular
Hindustani.
(i) It is interesting to note that most of the exceptions
of first kind have r as the first member of the consonant-group
that comes after the long vowel.
^22. a > a : alia (*ardla-), baddal (vardala-), mangnia
(margati) but mSg f. ‘parting line of hair' if derived from
marga must be u loan from H. ef. Panj. magar ‘after’ (marga +
ra-?)3 magghar (margalira-), kattak WP katfca, katt§ (karttika-)
m&ihga (mahargha), baddhi ‘bribe’ is irom •vardhika-,
pa^ba ‘ muscle ’ if connected with a vjrddhi form ol pj*?^hi;
apna (atmanafc) must be a loan from H. cf. WP appii. Phaggan
(from philguna-, and not from pUalgunA-), amb (amra-, the
form amra-, also, is found in the kolas), bajjana (vadyate)
may have come from an analogical form * vadyatfi, ct. nadati:
nadyate, a*ta, Mul. atta (Pkt. *atta-) may be a loan from H. if it
is derived from a PI word beginning with short a followed
by a group r + consonant, cf. Pers. 8.rd.
$23. i > i : tikkha (tlkspa-) is rather difficult to explain.
No PI word containing i + r + consonant has been found to
exist in Panjabi. The reason is that most oL such words
were past passive participles and they were replaced by
analogical formations.
$24 u > u:unu (lima), kudd'na (kurdati), kucc (knrei-)
dubb (ddrva), muddb (murdhi), tunnmfi (turna-), WP kummS
(knrmi), WP Pujj"pa (pdryatc), WP puiraa (purni), pnnne8
 14

(pur^ima), WP ubbha (ftrdhvi), sujjli occurring in Var5

Bhal Gurdas VI, 20, 2, a composition in a mixture of Hindi and
Panjabi (sGrva-). A considerable number of Skt. words with-ur-
including most of those cited above, also, appear with ur-
in dictionaries. Other words are sunna (sunyd-, also lunya-)
rukkha (ruk$£ also raksa-), mull (mfllya).
Seeing the shortening of the PI long vowels before r -f
consonant-groups to be so regular in most words, one is
tempted to regard as loans the few words where the vowel
does not shorten. Snob are passa, cunna, tfaddha, gajjar and
mSjna or mfinjua.
§25. (ii) The second kind of exceptions (words with a)
may have come from vj*ddhi form or be recent loans.
a > a: iitthan, atthamna, athna (istaua-), gaggar
(gargari), s5g, sftnga (Sahku-), Instil but also la^fch (*latthi
cf. yastf-), bat ‘road,’ but batti ‘ wick,’ ba^fcl ‘ stone’(varti*
or virtma), bag (valga), hatthl (hast!-), khaj (kliarju-).
i > i: rlttha (arista-), nld, WP nlndar (nidra), majl^h
fmaoji^tha), jlbh Potli. jibbh (jiltvft), kitta, (krta- by analogy
with sutta etc.), gltthl (agm§tha cf. Angara-)
u>u: nnca, WP ucca (ucca-), pfleh, WP pucch (pGccha-), 9th,
WP utth (listra-), kuhl (kulyft, cf. kulya- ‘belonging to a bank,
kulinl * river’); juth, jhuth (jnfta-) both these words, seem to be
loans from H, the idea of juth is rather religious, and for
jhfl^h the regular word in WP is kur.
Unexplained changes in accented vowels.
§26. The following are the cases where vowels in accented
syllables have undergone a change. Many of them are oh I
and go back to MI., or are shared by the cognate languages also.
a > i : No satisfactory explanation can be given for
this change. The Pkt. words in which this change has taken
place, appear in their regular form in Panjabi when they survive
in it; $g. pakvfi- > Pkt. pikka- but Panj pakka, H. id., Guj.
 15

pakfi; Angara- > Pkt. iipgala but Panj. fcgear. pakka- and
aipgara also occur in Pkts. (Piscli. 101,102.).
injh (&iru-), pijj, WP pajj (it* connected with paryaya-),
piccha (paica-) H. pic-ha- cf. Guj. pachl; the Panj. form is, per¬
haps due to contamination with pitth < ppstha-; pinjara(paujara )
H. id., Raj. pfjra, Guj. pSjra, even Pers. panjar; mijjh (majjS
cf. AMg. miipja Piscli. §74), Sin. mina. In these words the change
a > i may be due to the following palatal just as a > u is due
to the presence of u in the following syllable.1 Nevertheless
normally a followed by a palatal remains unchanged, and there
are cases, as below, in which a not followed by a palatal becomes i.
cij*a (cataka-) H. id. opposed to Nep. earo; piglfi (pangu-) H.
pSgla; bikk beside bakk (valka-), binga (vakra-, Pkt. vaipka-)
H. bika, bSka. Panj. bfik * a bent oval ornament for ankle must
be a loan from H. mir«c, WP marc (raarica-: *maricya- to
account for Panj. c-, cf. vanija-: vanijya-), hiran (harina),
imll (amlika), rindi (f*ran<Ja-). Inginma (ganavati) the original
word may be gj-nati as suggested by Skt. ganayati, Guj. gapvd.
PoadhI jib beside II. jab, ib beside IT. ab. chikka beside chakka
(satka-); Poth. ninan (nananda).
In Lalmdi in the unaccented syllable, the change a > i is
due to the influence of the final i;* e.g. kukkir f., chOhir f. hekil f.
(hP.knl m. boar), randip f., vcihir ‘etc. All these must have
originally ended in I being feminines.
WP khiddu beside EP khuddo (kanduka-t) cf. Apabh.
kindua; Bhavisatta. 3, 5.
Rajasthani appears to substitute i for a in a number of
tatsamas or semi-tatsama*.*
§27. a did not change to i under any circumstances. Panj.
chi beside chp cannot come from Skt. sal cf. Pkt. clia. The form
chi or chg is probably the result of contraction of a+I in Pkt.
ehahiip > Apabh. chalil.
(t) cf. Grierson’s remarks that a > i may sometimes
be due to a preceding palatal eh. ZDMG Yol. 49 p. 403.
(2) L. S. I. VIIIs p. 250,
(3) L. S. I. IX *p. 33.
 16

$28. a > u: This change is in most cases due to the

influence of u in the following syllable. In Piets, also, a > u
was generally due to the. presence of a labial found m a neigh¬
bouring syllable. (Pischel 4104). Gujarati has remained free
from this change and also from the change of a to i.
ungal (anguli-) Guj. figaj; cunj (cafira-) H cSc but Guj.
c8c ; ungarna (aftkura-), sungarna (sankutati), mucch beside
mass (Imafru-cf. Pkt. maipsu-T) kunj also kanj ‘snake’s slough’
(kafleuka-); unjal (anjall- on the analogy of anguli-> ungal, or
from udanjali- * hollowing the palms and then raising them’ cf.
Mar. oipjal, vaqijaj), khuddo (kanduka-t), pur beside par ‘upon’
(upari, •uppari > Paj. uppar).
This change is specially frequent in Bengali, and Oria.1 In
Lahndl and Kashmiri dissyllabic words often take a in the
second syllable due to the influence of the final Apabh. u.
Thus Norn. Sing, kukkur, chchur, randun ‘widower’ but Nom. p .
kukkajr, chohar, randan.1
$29. a >5: Due to a following h under definite conditions,
gee $ 75. ",
a > s: bel (vatli-), chsj orsej (Sayya) go back to Pkt.
veils- and sgjja (Piscli. $107). sflla ‘spear’ (fialya-), chfjja:
H. chajja is a recent example; for chs ‘ six ’ see $ 27.
$30.' a > ai: («) Due to a following h under definite condi-
tions. See $$ 70-71. ..
(ii) In a number of tatsama or recent loan words, this
change is found in an accented syllable due to a following
nasal. Some of these examples are shared by H- and
Mar. Sainkar (Sankara-); baingan, H. id. (vaftgana*); pamti, H.
p&itis (Pkt. panatisa), saint! H. s&itis (Pkt. sattatisa-); paiha^.
H. p&isath (Pkt. paijasatthi); H. pkitalis, s&italis, but Panj.
pantali, santall (Pkt. panacattalisa, sattacattalisa-). The nasal
in saintl, santali is perhaps due to analogy of painti, pantali.
WP painc but EP pane, H. id. ‘arbitrator’; VP guinea but

1. Grierson: ZDMG Vol. 49 p. 403.

2. L. S. I. VIII1 p. 253.
 17
E P. sanca ‘mould/ WP. painchi but EP panchi ‘bird/ WP
kaiijthfi but EP kan^ha. ‘ necklace*; Potli. g&idhlfi but EP
g&dhla ‘muddy1; WP bSissarl but EP bansarl ‘flute*'; WP
kaincani but EP kanc"ni ‘ dancing girP; 1L gSidu (gapdaka-),
Mar. m&id (manda-, Bloch § 58).
In the Panj. word aincl from Eng. inch, i lias become ai.
$31. Tt may be interesting to point out that final a in the
names of the Hindi letterssr, 13 etc., is often pronounced as
diphthong aior [ae] in Panjabi, thus kai, khai or [kae, khae] etc.
Another tendency is to pronounce it long, thus ka, kha, etc., this
of course is necessary because Panjabi words do not end in short
vowels except final 0.

$32. a > au: (i) Duo ton following h under certain condi¬
tions. See $ 72.
(ii) Due to a following nasal as in a > ai like which
this, also, is more frequent in WP and is confined to tutsamas or
loans, caumpfi (ennipa-), EP baunsl, bans! beside bainsl
(vnipte), EP kant, WP kaunt (kanta-); EP saklamp; WP
saklaump (sankalpa-).
$33. i > u : This again is due to umlaut, f. g., the*
influence of an u in the following syllable, and is very rare,
bund beside bind (bindu-), nuccarna beside WP niccarna
(*niccnrna, intransitive of nacOrna < niScfitati). sunghma)
(ginghati) comes perhaps from * Sj^nkhati cf. Waekern $]46.
$34. i > e: Due to a following h under certain conditions.
See $76.
i > P: According to Pkt. grammarians, i, u often become
e, o before consonant-groups (Pischel $ 119). Such words
are more properly to be derived from Vpddi-forms (Blocli
$ 80). kpssu (kiipguka- : kaiipSnka-), nembu (nimbflka-:
naimbuka-), sem (Simba: Saimbya-), s?th * expressed sugarcane/
(Sifcta-: *Sai$fca-) cf. H. sith, Mar. $Jt.
 18

$35. I > 6: The words iii which this change has been
noticed by Pkt. grammarians can be explained otherwise (Piscli.
$$115,122). In Panjabi two examples have survived which are,
also, shared by other IAVs.

As to khslna, kh?<Jna (kTl<jati), it is probable that there

were two separate roots VkrI<J and Vkbel in PI which were
confused with each other in Pkts. (cf. Pischel $122).

bahe|*a (vibhftaka). Pischel $115 quotes hahstaka as found in

Vaijayanti 59, and vahedaka in Bohtlingk. Evidently the form in
which the word was borrowed by Vedic from the aboriginal
speech seems to he different from the form which gave rise to
the modern words. AMg. vibhelas points to vibhpdakah (Pifich.
$ 121, Bloch $80).

$36. U > a: Only one example 1ms been found in which an

accented u has changed to a, WP apparna beside upparna
(utpatati). In maulna ‘to blossom* the change goes back to Pkt.
(muknla-> maiila-Pisch. $123) where it is regular, ef. Pkt.
matt- < mrdn.

$37. u > i: siuna, seOna (svarpa-: suv£rna-:#sivaina-).

$38. tt > 5: Like i > e, this change, too, noticed by Pkt.

grammarians can he explained by vrddhi forms (Pischel $ 125,
Bloch 80). ponaa (puptfra : paup<Jra-), frnkkbar (puskara-
pau$kara-), pol (pulya- #paulya-). mottha (musia: *mausta-),
k5jh(ku$tha-: *kau$tha-, cf. Pa. kotha), mOkla (J. Skt. mutkala-:
• mautkala-), thfihlu, Mnl. tbobl (gthft’6-: sthauiya-). pottha
(pustaka- : *paustaka-) really comes from Pehl. pust ‘skin’
connected with PI prstha- (Grundriss Iranisch Vol. I pt. 2 p.
274) for the word is not very old in Skt.

$39. 6 > f: as in rin beside ren (rppu-).

$40. 5 > 0; as in jfin ‘birth past or future* (yfini-).
 19

VOWELS IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

Treatment of the final syllable.

$41. The final syllable of a PI word lias remained in an

unstable condition throughout its development down to the
mordern times in consequence of which it has been undergoing
a gradual and constant decay. In the earliest stage a PI word
in its inflected form could end in a vowel or a consonant.
By the time of Pali and Ajoka, all final consonants had dis¬
appeared leaving no trace except -n after a short vowel and -m
which became anus vara. What was in PI dovah, devan, dPvat,
dBvam, tasmin, kurvan, bliargt, etc., became in Pali dsva, dsva,
dsva, devaip, tassiip, kuvvaip, bharp etc., respectively. The Pkt.
forms parisa (parisat), manaip (manah) etc., are not the cases
of lengthening a vowel after the elision of a final consonant, or
of changing the final consonant into anusvara, but are due to
the further addition of case terminations so that they may look
like inflected forms of the most common types.
$42. Although the final vowels held their position much
longer than the consonants, yet several cases of preference for a
short vowel are noticeable in Skt. iti its transition from Vsdic,
p.g. RV yatrS, tatiA, atrfiL, kutrS, are handed down in Skt. as
yatra, tatra, atra, kutra only. More examples can be quoted
from Pali (Geiger $32), and Prakrits (Pischel $113).
The final anusvara often becomes the nasalisation of the
preceding vowel. Hundreds of such cases can be quoted from
AMg. and other Pkts.
$43. As we jjass from Pkls. to Apabh. we fiud that the final
vowels have once inure been shortened. Here the words end in
vowels only, usually short, pure or nasal.
$44. In most of the modern languages the final short vowel
of the Apabh. stage after a consonant lias also disappeared, thus
Apabh- gharu, phalu etc., become Panj. H. ghar, phal, Guj.
Mar. ghar, phaj, etc. The final vowel after another yowel
 20

coalesced with the latter to form a single long vowel, thus

Apabli. ghodaii, malifi become Panj. H. ghora, mail, Gnj. Kaj.
gli5r5 or ghcdtf, mall. The languages wliicli retain the final
short vowel after consonants are Siiullif and Biharl. Panjabi
belongs to the other category although an extremely short-
vocalic element [0] is frequently audible at the end of a word.
On the whole, its effect is not so distinct as in Sindlu.
$45. The decay of the final syllable is a striking
phenomenon of the languages of the Indo-Iranian branch.
“ Numerous examples of reduction and loss in the Middle and
New Indo-Iranian dialects of the final syllabic existing in the
Old Indo-Iranian languages may bo gathered from almost every
page of the book Louis Gray’s Indo-Iranian Phonology.
($961).
$46. A potent factor in the decay of syllables as seen in the
more recent stages of the Indo Aryan vernaculars (osp. II. Panj.
Guj.) has been the absence of stress-accent on those syllables.
The final syllable has always remained unaccented, and hence
the gradual decay in its transition from one generation to the
other.
$47. For the greater weakness and decay of the final sounds
of a word than the initial ones, another reason may be given;
tin* economy of effort. Every speaker becomes more or
less conscious of the beginning of separate words when using
them with different suffixes ami prefixes to express the allied
meanings. Now mutual intelligibility being the main
object of language, the effort of the speaker to speak and
that of the hearer to hear the final sounds of a word are
relaxed as soon as the intended meaning lias been disclosed
by the initial syllables. Consequently the final sounds lose their
importance and thereby become more liable to decay.
$48. As mentioned above, Pkt. words could end in a vowel,
short or long, or in anusvara preceded by a short vowel only.
I11 Apabli. the long vowels were shortened and the anusvara was
 21

changed into the nasality of the* preceding vowel. In Punjabi

iliey all have disappeared after a consonant, but have contracted
after a vowel.
§49. Examples of the loss of final vowels.
Skt. Pkt. Apabii. Panj.
Pkt. -a karu kara kara kar
pafica parpea paipca panj
sapla satta satta satt
Pkt. -a mfirdlift mnddlia nmddha muddh
(Bhuvisatta. 167, 4)
fitma appa [Panj Pkt _ fip
*appa]
lajja. lajja lajja lajj
jangiia jaipgha jaqigha jahgh
(Bli. 77, 2)
Pkt. -i upari uvnri ct — uppar
AMg. nppiip
Pkt. -I agnih aggl aggi agg
kuksth cf. [kucclil kucchi] kukkh
bhagini bhainl vab ini bhain
(15b. 309,4)
J >kt. -u iksuh •ikkbu, — ikkh
cf. uechu
Pkt. -u vidyul vijju vijju bijj
Sva$r6h sassfi sassu sass
Pkt. -a kr5d6 kods kol
par$ve passe passS pas
(Panj. Pkt
•pass?)
Pkt. -5 put rah put to pullu putt
balah bale balu bal
Pkt. -aip plialam phalaip phalS phal
Pkt, -irp aksi [accbiip] [accbi] (Bh.) akkh
Pkt. -uip aim aipsuip — injh, WP.
anjh.
 iz
§50. From the pronouns of the first and second persons
plural, asms, #tusmfi, we should expect Pai}j. *as[s], #tus[s]
through *ass6, *tusse; but actually we get as!, tusi, or as8, tusS.
The i in the fist pair seems to represent the instrumental case
termination because after them the agent sign lie is not used.
The -S in as&, tusS seems to be the regular oblique plural
termination added to as[s], tus[s], cm the analogy
of nouns. These forms could not have come from asman,
"tusimjn, for they, too, should have given as[s], tus[s]
through * assa, *tussa. The conjecture that § in asS, tusA,
is an oblique plural termination is strengthened by the fact
that the agent sign ne can be optionally used after them.
Before other postpositions like nfi, da, to etc. asa, tusS (and
not as!, tus!) are used. When accented on the first syllable they
are pronounced separately from the postpositions, thus Asa n*5,
As5 da, tusfi nfi. But when accented on the second syllable
they are pronounced as one word with the postpositions. In this
the nasalisation of -£ is taken away, the initial' a- of asl omitted,
and the -s- of tusS changed into -li- which then is shifted to t.
The postposition da becomes da. The change of s > h and
the omission of a- are optional in Majhi.

Vowels in non-final (unaccented) syllables.

§51. Preaccentual.
(a) When the syllable was initial and consisted of a vowel
alone, it was reduced to a neutral vowel, which in some
cases regularly and in others optionally disappeared. But u iu
dialects other than Poadhi tends to maintain its u quality
however short it may become.

a: guttha, (an gust ha-); nhera, WP hanera also ( * andha-

kara-); llftha WP hari^ha (Arista-); kbara, akhara (aksavata-);
bacc, WP vacc (Apatya), the a- must have lost very early, bacca
is frqin Pers. bacca as shown by b- in WP.; dhaun (ardha-bmana-);
naj, anaj (annAdya-); gahS, agahs (Agra -b ?); hun (adhunA).
 23

The dropping of a- in asfi lias already been spoken of. mans

amavasya) may be a loan, or -m- lias been preserved through the
>✓

loss of a- before the change -m->- (v). dhaunca (ardha paiVama-)

is a loan because of-nc->ne.
§52. a: Harh (Asadlia-). The DOgri pronunciation of
this word is peenlier, something like aiiar [ffa:r]. WP airbag
(akhyana-). More cases can be cited from Persian loanwords,
e.g., ram or aram (aram) ;baj, abaj (avaz); san, asdn, (asftn)
ete.
§53. i: For i also one lias to look to Persian loans, laj, alaj
(‘ilaj); nam, anam (in‘am) §tc.
[: aman, vnl. man (Pel’s, iinan); asai, vnl. sai (Pers. *Tsa+T).
§54. u: utahS or tahS (ut+?); utarna, PoadbT tarna, atarna
(nttarayati); u^hauua, Poa. thautta. athauua (ntthapayati). In
ba^nfi, WP va§na (ndvartana-) the loss of u must have taken
place before tbe shift of accent, cf. H. tibtan. Similar may
be tbe case with bakkhar (upnsknrn-), baibna (upnviSati) arid
baitthfi (upavista-).

§55. P: P was first reduced to e or i, and then became neutral

vowel (or was lost) rind or arind (eranda-), gearS (Skadafia cf.
H igyarali, Guj. agyar), katti (Pkatriip$at). Similarly the words
for 41, 51, 61, 71, 81,91,101 are pronounced without and sometimes
with the neutral vowel. Other compounds cf fka, also, lose
tbe B-, e.g., kat-tha- (okasthi), kalla (Pkt. ekkalla-).
§56. (5) When an unaccented vowel comes after a con¬
sonant, the same thing happens, viz, it is reduced to a heutral
vowel which may disappear but still leaves the impression of
a vowel owing to the explosion of the consonant. The re¬
mark about u applies here also. The change u > a takes place
if the next syllable contains 0 or u but not othetwise.
Examples illustrating this rule will be found under u:
§57. a: takhan (taksana-), phalah (palais).
 24
a: jama! (jftmatrka-) where -m- is of secondary origin\
WP bhaglft (bkaginfyn). In Pers. loanwords e.g. bajar
(bazar,).
§58. i: WP and Poth. preserve tiio i unchanged.
basah, WP visah (viSvasa-); naputtfi, WP niputta (ni§-
pntra-); nasang, WP. nisang (ni^anka-).
I: narfla (nirQgn-), lalarl (nfln+kara->, cf. Pers. nilkar;
nilgarwhich gives Panj. lllgar.
§59. u: purana or parana (puranA), dukan, Poa. dnkan
(Pers. dnkan).
u: tola! (tula -f- 1)
§60. (i) Unaccented i, I, e become e before [h]-a, [b]-o. but
a closer i before u.
pearfi (priyakara-), seal (SItakala-), kearfi (kedara-), beak
vivalia-), dehara (divasa- cf. Mar. dfs), tchaea (*trsayita-), hut
jiun (jlvana ), neoda but niQda (nimantra-), gheo WP ghiu
(ghrtfi-), pso WP. piu (pitS).
§61. (ii) ft, followed by a syllable containing u, u or o
become a.
damtlhl (Panj. da+mfili+i); dasuttl (Panj. dO+sfifc
+ i); kaputt (kupntra-), kasutta (*knsutra-y caknr (Paj.
cu + kor standing perhaps for kon < kona-); cakhunja (Paj.
cn + khunja); kabol (Paj. kn + b5l).
§62. (iii) fl, o followed by a syllable containing I, g
become u.
kutfhaba (Panj. ku -f dhab+-a); dutahl (Paj. dn -f- taih
+-i); dutara (Panj. do + tar -f a); cuphere (Paj. cn + pbgr -f
e); kunlt (Panj. ku + nit); kurlt (Paj. kn + rit); dussra
(Paj. do + ssr + a); kun&fli (Panj. kn + n&u), nuklla (Pei’s.
nOklla), kuhara etc.
§63. The above changes in an unaccented vowel before an
accented syllable are quite regular and frequent in nominal
 25

and verbal derivation when the shift of accent brings about

this condition.
ch&Ha: chu^&l, nikka: WP nakSra, pila * yellow'; pal&ttan
‘ yellowness’ k&ura: kur&ttan; bikkhar: bakhtir, nigghar:
naghar, jlm: jama, slm: sama, bij: baja, t61: tulS, kh$bl:
khalha etc.
§64. Post-accentual.—A short vowel (a, i, u) after an accented
syllable is (i) reduced to a neutral vowel, (ii) but is altogether
omitted if the accented syllable of the resulting word is closed
by a short or single consonant.
(i) kdhgan (kahkana-), c&nnan (candana-), k&jjal (kajjala-),
kipp^ra (karpata-), cibbhaj*- (cirbhata-), dAkkhan (daksipa-)
sdtthal (s&kthi), mSinak (inapikya-), tittar (tittirA-), ukkarna
(utkirati), b&iran (vairini), m&llan (malini), b£naj (vapijya-);
WI* p&bban (padinim), mirac, WP m&rac (marica-* maricya-)
uggarna (udgurati), kuraxn (kutumba-), kukkar (kukkut^,>,
lakkar (lakuta- : *lakkuta-), surag (surunga), ph£ggan
(ph&lguna-), guggal (gulgalk,) ungal (anguli-), k£ngani
(kangunl), takk“la (tarku-).

§65. (ii) tircha (tira$c&-), putlii (puttala-), khiirpa (ksurapra-)

d6hta (dauliitra-), h&hldi (liaridra), dhirti (dlAritri); bSjli
(vidyut), p&sli but also p&ss"li (pfi,r$u-).
§66. Of dissyllabic words whose scheme is c ~ where the
first syllable is open and the second closed by a single con¬
sonant, there is an alternative pronunciation % * i. e. with the
first syllable closed and the second open. This latter pro¬
nunciation is mere frequent in words where a non-stop
separates the vowels than where a stop comes between them.
banct or bant* ‘ structure, ’ camak or camk« ‘ brilliance1,
dhai«t or dhart0‘earth*, bhahk or bhalka ‘to-morrow’, mas^k
or mask0 ‘water skin’, taihfll or $aihla ‘service etc.; with
stops : bhag^t or bhagt* ‘devotee,’ nag^d or nagd« ‘cash’.
 26
§67. Long voxels as a rule do not come after accented
syllables except in final position, e. g., kila, gidha carh&I
etc.—But if a long vowel is left unaccented after an accent¬
ed syllable through a shift of accent, it is treated as above
after being shortened; e. g., parikfa > parikkha > parakh ;
nirlk$a > nirikkha > nirakh ; liaritaki-> E. P. harai*, WP
harff.
Effects of ft on vowels.
§68. It is a curious fact that the presence of an ft in the
immediate vicinity of a vowel brings about important changes
in its pronunciation. These changes may be studied under
two heads (i) changes in timbre and (ii) changes in pitch.
The first kind of changes, spread over a wide area—Panjabi,
Sindhi, Gujarati, Hindi, PaiSaca, and Persian, are accompanied
in Panjabi simultaneously by tone-effects also, except in E P
when ft is intervocalic.
§69. In Mod. Persian what is denoted by fath (i.e. a
in the Native Script) is actually pronounced e before an ft,
thus the word in native spelling mahr is pronounced rmhr
‘kindness’; ka[ft], kefft] ‘that’; ca[ft], ce[ft] ‘what' etc.
In these cases, however, the a i. e. the fath goes to Pehl.
i,1 * 3 In Gujarati the whole group ah becomes 6 \ The changes
undergone by a vowel before ft in Hindustani have been
described by Dr. Bailey. * The Panjabi changes are very
similar to those of Hindustani with a few differences. The
ft, if final or followed by a consonant, shades off itito the
high tone, while in an intervocalic position it may (in WP)
or may not do so (in EP). For Sindhi see L. S. I. VIII1
p. 22.
(1) Grundriss der Iranischen Philologie: T. pt. 2, p. 21, § 3, 4.
Of. mn Konow: J.R.A.S. 1911 p. 5.
... <2) Grierson: Phofiology, Z.D.M.G, Vol. 49, p. 409. Turner:
“ The e and o vowels in Gujarati”, §11 (vi) b.
(3) Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies: II. p. 545.
 27
$70, (?) An accented a followed by an h which is either*
final or followed by a consonant is pronounced at at a
higher tone, the h itself becoming silent. In the Gurmukhi script,
an i is added to the Jt.
kaih, spelt in Gummklii kahi (katliaya, Pkt. kahshi),
baih, „ „ bahi, (vaha, Pkt. vabahi t)
kailina „ „ kahina, (kathana-)
jaihmat „ „ jahimat (Pers. zalimat).
$71. (iV) If the h is followed by a short a, the a before
h changes to aiy but the tone-effect does not take place,
kaihan, Gnr. kahin (kathana-) but also kailin [kAen], kaihar,
Gnr. kahir (Pers. qabr) alsn kaihr [kAer.]
$72. (iii) An accented a may also be pronounced as au before
an h under ti e same conditions as in (t) and (it) above. In the
Gurmukl\ script, u is added to the ft.
pauh, Gur. script pahu, (prabliS) also paih.
kauh, „ „ kahu, (katliaya, Pkt. kaliasu, kahahu)
also kaih.
rauh, „ „ rahu, (risah, Pkt. rasO) beside raih.
nafih, „ „ nahfi, (nakh&h, Pkt. naliO), beside neih.
pauhar, „ „ pahur (prabara-) also paihar, paihr, pauhr
bauhrtt, „ „ bahut (bahutva-).
Note that in Persian loanwords a before h does not ehange
into au.

$73. In the tadbhava words the changes a > ai and a > an

before an ft are probably due to epenthesis, for there was an i or
n after h in almost all cases. Moreover these changes must have
taken place before the elision of the final i, u, and when the h
had turned into a tone, the two vowels naturally resulted

(1) Beames I p. 131, Grierson; Phonology, Z.1XM<G.

Vol. 49 p. 402.
 28

into . a diphthong; thus, Pkt. kahghi > kaih [kAe]; Pkt.

raso > Apabh. rasu > old Panj. *rahu > rauh [rAo].
§74, The two alternative pronunciations of one and the
same word with ai and au are perhaps due to confusion of
different forms, thus
raso > rauh, rasSna or rasaih > raih
• • nakhs > nauh, nakhSna or nakhaih>n&ih.
At first these pronunciations were used for different cases
of the same word; later one form was used for all the cases.
This phenomenon may have been dialectal, U\, one dialect chose
ai for all cases and the other au. Subsequently borrowing took
place, and hence both the pronunciations are found in one and
the same dialect.
... §75. (iv) An accented a before h which is followed by a or 1
is optionally pronounced as e or ai; thus:—
saha, seha or saiha ($a$4[ka]-)
paha, peha or paiha (patha-)
.. . gaha, geha or gaiha (graha-) .
4 kahi, kehl or kaihl cf. H. kasi, kassl
nahi, neh! or naih! cf. H. nahi. #
,The ai pronunciation before I is peculiar to DoabI of tiie
Hoshiarpur district.
...This change, also, was perhaps originally due to the presence
of an i in the next syllable, e g. in kehii (kathita-), reha (rahita-);
peha (pathi-); and later was extended analogically.
§76, (v) Accented i, u are pronounced ?, o before h as in
(i) and (ii).
beh (visa*), WP bheh (bisa-), [K] teh (tf§a), [K] keh-
(kasya cf. H. kis), similarly jeh-, sh. toh (tusa-), khch
(ksudha), bhofh] (busi-), mohrl (mukhara-), mohla (miisala-).-
Por similar phenomena iu Persian, see Grundriss der Iranischen
Philologie: L pt 2, p. 25 § 5; p. 30 § 5.
 29
§77. (vi) In a few cases accented a, i,u are lengthened before
a final h. bah, WP. vab (va$fi), tlh (trsa), nflli (snus£).
§78. (vii) In some words accented r, <3 are pronounced I, u
before h. mth (megha ) llh (lpkhii), plhg or plgh, <prsfikhn)
H. sir hi- (SrPijhi ) pQjhna or phhjna (pronchati cf. Pkt. pnqichai
but H. pOchna); suh ‘news’ (*$odhi cf. bodhi) suhnl (Sodhanl),
suha (Sobha-), kuhnl or kOhnl (kaphoni-). The changes > I
and n > u and inversely I > ? and u > are fairly common in
DoabI of the Jalandhar and Hoshiarpur districts.
§79. Tonic effects of h on vowels.
The important changes which an //, whether standing alone
or forming part of the voiced (and not of the voiceless) aspira¬
tes, brings about in a neighbouring vowel had long been a puzzle
to the students and speakers of Panjabi till Dr. Grahame Bailey
discovered their true nature viz., that they consisted in altering the
pitch of the vowel, technically called tones1 2. People, no doubt, had
been conscious of the peculiar way in which the so-called voiced
aspirates of the Gurmukhl script were pronounced by them.
Tradition has it that Maharaja Ranjlt Singh used this peculiar
pronunciation as a test to detect the Hindoxtan (i.e. U. P.,1
people entering the Panjab without a permit. For foreigners,
Indians or others, it is very difficult to acquire this pronuncia¬
tion. Hence the Panjabis often amuse themselves by challenging
foreigners to imitate this pronunciation which the latter fail to
do even after many attempts.
§80. The early European scholars could not discover where¬
in the peculiarity of this pronunciation lay. The Ludhiana Mis¬
sionaries who brought out a grammar and a dictionary of Panjabi
in 1850—54% speak of the Panjabi sounds represented by the

(1) Panjabi manual: 1912 pp. xvi-xvii; Panjabi Phonetic

Reader: 1914 p. xv; Linguistic Studies from the Himalayas: 1915
pp. ix-xii and passim.
(2) Panjabi Grammar by J. Newton, Ludhiana lb'51, two sub¬
sequent editions. Panjabi Dictionary by Janvier, Ludhiana 1854.
 30

GurmukhI letters ^ ‘glia,’ 3 ‘jha,’ ^ * dba * etc. as merely

aspirated forms of ^ 1 ga ‘ ja 3 ‘ da etc.
In 1859 John Beames noticed that the Panjabi pronunciation
of mn majh ‘a buffalo cow’ did not exactly conform to its
spelling1. He thought, “it might be represented by ?neyh, a very
palatal y aspirated; perhaps in German by m‘>ch, or rather
with a medial sound corresponding to the tenuis ch. ” As the
observation was made at Gnjrat and Jehlara where the tones
exist in their usual varieties, the j was not aspirated but was
preceded by the high tone. Later on Tisdall (1887) remarked
“that h is very lightly sounded and is often entirely inaudible
(e.g. kiha, riha are xmonounced kia ria). At other times it
selves to lengthen the sonnd of the preceding vowel (e.g.
bihla or wihla pronounced bfila or vsla)”.* Evidently it is a
case of high tone which ha3 balded the author. Twenty years
later. P. J. Fagan wrote, “But aspirate sonants are pronounced
like surds, e.g., ghar ‘house’ sounds very like khar, Bhattf like
PhattI, Dharlwal like ThanwaPV If the remark applies to the
language of llissar which is a tone language, the initial sound
is an unaspirated sonant stop followed by a low tone. But if
tlie remark applies to Panjabi which fact is not clear in the
context, the pronunciation represented is an unaspirated voice¬
less stop followed by a low tone. From among Indian writers,
Bawa Budh Singh notes that the Nagarl letters v ‘bha’, ** ‘dha*
etc. were not suitable to represent the Panjabi sounds “produced
in the throat”.4
$81. Independently of the Rev. T. G. Bailey, I found in
November 1912 that when Ludhiani was transcribed in Nagarl
(1) Comparative Grammar I p. 71.
(2) Simplified Panjabi Grammar in Trubner’s Collection of

S
Simplified Grammars, 1889, p. 7.
Gazetteer of the Hissar District. 1908 p. 68.
Hans Cog: (Gurmukh!) 1914 p. 13 “Panjabi sangh viccS
j6 awaj nikkaldi hai, usnQ dassap lal ** ad dl £akal kafl nahi
si.”
 31
or Gurmukhi scripts, each of the symbols called the voiced
aspirated stops, represented three different sounds of the
Ludliia.nl dialect as for instance in ghar, baghelir and bfigh
which in Phonetic script represent k-Ar, bage-cup" and bdlg
respectively. Discussing them with Principal Woolner, I came
to the conclusion that No. 2 was the sonant variety of No. 1.
It was, also, noticed that if voiceless unaspirated stops were
pronounced at a very low tone as when making the lowest notes
in alCLp (solfaing) the acoustic impression was somewhat
similar to pronunciation No. 1, but beyond this I ould not go.
§82. The tones cover a much larger area than has been mentioned
by the Rev. T. Cl. Bailey. In fact they stretch right upto the Jamna
in the east, and occupy the districts of Ambfila, parts of Karnal,
Rohtak, Hissar and Bikaner, the whole of Ferozepore, Shaikhu-
pura, Lahore, Lyallpur, Gujramvala, Gnjrat, Jelilam, Rawal¬
pindi, and the Dogrl area, parts of Abbotabad, Hazara and
Simla together with the whole of the intervening area.3 Dr.
Bailey has noted the existence of (ones in some of the Pahajri
dialects and in S'nfi (JRA8 1021, pp. 469-70) although Col.
Lorimer doubts their existence in the latter (JRAS 1024 p.
206).
§83. Dialects differ as regards the effects of an initial or
intervocalic h on vowels, as regards the devoicing of the initial
stop left in place of a voiced aspirate alter its h. has been
changed into a tone, and also as regards the kind of the tone
produced by the h of a voiced aspirate. Examples of these
various effects are found in Dr. Bailey’s Linguistic Studies from
the Himalayas, 1915 pp. ix-xii and passim. Possibly there are
minute differences in the total rise and fall of the pitch as well.
(1) This statement rests partly on the personal observa¬
tions which 1 made on the spot in my trips undertaken on behalf
of the Panjab University to collect material for a Panjabi
Dictionary, and partly on observation of the pronunciation of
persons coming from those districts.
 32
$84. In Lndhianl these effects of k are as follows:—
(I) Initial single h of whatever origin is unvoiced (i.e. is
of the same quality as h iu kh, c!i etc), and, therefore, has no
effect on its neighbouring vowel; thus hatth [hAt:h], Wazirabadi
[fioA.t:h], (hasta-); hakk [hAk:], AVazir. [fieAk:] (Pers. haqq),
haran [hara.-n], AVaz. [fLaram] (Pers. hairan); hotal [h5$al]
Waz. [fiotal] (Eng. hotel).
$85. (2) Intervocalic single h of whatever origin is partly
voiced and partly unvoiced. It remains h when followed by an
accented syllable but may become a tone it' preceded by an
accented syllable, luh&r [luha:r], AV P [Hair] (lohakara) ;
kah&nl [kahani] W P [k:ani] (Pres, kahani); Ludhiana people
pronounce the English word behind as [brha nd] while Wazira-
bad people pronounce it as [bialnd]. 16ha [loha or loa]
(loh&), l&ha [laha or Ida] (lablia-)
$86. (3) An h final or immediately followed by another con¬
sonant is always changed into a tone; khoh [khd:] (ksudha),
sohna [sdna] (Sobhana-); rail [ra] (Pers. rah),rahdarl [radori]
(Pers. rahdarl).
$87 (4) An Ji forming part of the MI voiced aspirates to¬
gether with the groups nh, mh, or of Mod. Indian loanwords
loses itself in raising the pitch of the accented syllable if it
precedes the 7/, or lowering its pitch if it follows the h; e.g.
bagh [ba:g] (vyaghri-), s&njh [sAnj] (sandhyS); madbinl
[mad^a: ni] (manthana-).
$88. (5) But the voiced aspirated stops lose their voice also
besides the Jiwhen they come at the beginning of a word; thus
ghar [k,Ar] (ghara-), dhar [tca:r] (dh&ra) etc.
$89. A stop in the interior of a word resulting from a voiced
aspirate that has changed its h into a tone is not devoiced as it is
in the initial position. But there are a fe.v exceptions to it;—
(i) If the element preceding the voiced stop is of the nature"
of a prefix, the resuiting stop is devoiced, e.g. adhdram [a'LAram]..'
 33

(adharma-), kudh£r«m [ku'teArain] (kodharma)- Similarly in

kudhan [ku'tea:n], abhagga [a'pcag : a], nirbhag [nir'p«a:g],
nabhag [n9'pca:g], kudhaba [kJ't^Aba], na^hal [na't«a:l]. Evi¬
dently these words are of late origin and not regular tadbhavai
for as such they should have appeared as #&ham or *hamm,
#kuham etc. In pardhan [par'd,a:n], parbhat [par'bca:t], the
stop is not devoiced because here par does not sound as a prefix,
the words dhan and bhat not being in use in the allied sense in
Panjabi.
§90. (it) In the following words the stop has been devoiced,
perhaps because the accent was equally divided, and hence each
part appeared as a separate word: kirtghan [k[rtakcAn],biccghar
or bicghar [biciekrCpr, bick*a:r], bhasbhasa [p*AspcAsod
dhurdhuri ,[teiirtcuri].
§91. In words with syllabic scheme if any of the
first two syllables lias a low-tone vowel, it shifts to or affects the
other also. Thus,
dhak&na [tcakana, tak„ana, or tcdkc&na],
bhukSna [peiikana, puk^ana or pcukcana]
ghat&na [katana, hateana or koateana]
parbii [pcarai parcai, or pfarcai]
kadhftf [kcadai, kadoi, or keadai]
bharjfti [p*arJai, parjc<tior p„arjcai].

§92. In verbs which have a high-tone vowel followed by a

voiceless stop, the high-tone becomes level in its transitive or
causal form: —
pafihcna [pAScnaj: pncana [pucana]
baihkna [bAekna]: bakana [bakana].
§93. As to the origin of Panjabi tones, nothing more can be
added to what has already been written by Dr. F. W, Thomas1 2
and Prof. Jules Bloch*.

(1) Bulletin of the School oFOriental Studies, II, p. 829,

(2) Melanges Vendryes: pp.‘57-67.
 34

Treatment of p
§94. Tlie exact pronunciation of p is not known.' At the;
present day it is pronounced as ri by North Indians and as ru by
Marathas and Southerners. The ancient Indian phoneticians des -
eribe it variously. Pacini calls it murdhanya, probably because
he saw its cerebralising effects in the speech of his day. The
Atlmrvaveia PratiSakhya (I. 20) regards it as jihvdmilliya which,
according to Whitney, refers, perhaps, to the uvular articulation,
just as there are two varieties of r- sound —alveolar and uvular.
Possibly this di fference of pronunciation is responsible for the
different development of the sound in the subsequent history of
Indo-Aryan.
§95. An examination of the various treatments of p in
A£okan inscriptions has led M. Bloch to the conclusion that
p>a was the regular development in the South-west, while p>i
in the North and East. p>u is almost always due to the neigh¬
bourhood of a labial sound.1 All these three treatments are
found even in the RV. p>i seems to be predeminent in Panjabi.
§90. (1) p>a (for Vedic see Wackern. §9, for Pkts. Pisch.
§49). nacc’na H. nacna (nr'tyati) goes back to Pkt. naecai, perhaps
a contamination of Pkt. *nicca'f and nadaT. nac must be a ban
from II. biddbl, WP v&4<jbl ‘bribe’ (vpddhi) may have come
from “vardhika. dadtfha usually derived from dptfha should be
connected with dardhya- of. AMg. dahlia-, mattha ‘slow’ (mp$ta)
cf. PaTyalacchl JTg ‘inert Index. The word also occurs in
D^Inainamala. mattha ‘fritter, cracker', (mpsta-) cf. AMg.
maltha- ‘rubbed', matha, ‘curd’ may come from mpsta- or
mathri-, mathni- ‘shaken’, the -tth- is shortened perhaps through
influence of Hindi, sangal, sungal (Spnkhala), -hkh->-nk-
g ?es hack to Pkt.
§97. (2) p>i (for Vedic see Wackern. §16, for Pkts. Pisch.
§50), gijjhtna (gpdhyati), giddh (gr'dhra-), tin (tr'na-), till

(1) La langue Marathfe §31.

 35
(tj-sa), sing (Spnga-), dissana (dp$yats), khittl (kr'ttika) gheo,
ghiu (gbpt4-)i hi& (hr'daya-), ghin (ghrna), bicchu (vr'Scika-),
sit^ana W.P. safVnii, suM'na. cl’. Mar, Sit (sps^a-), ghisna
beside ghasna cf. ghisar (ghrsyate), tia, tljja (tpttya) kitta-
(krti ) where the -tt- must have been introduced on the analogy of
sutta, dattfi, tatta etc. pitth ‘back’ to differentiate it from the
regular pu^ha ‘inverted’ (ppsth4), mitna (mps^a-); in mittl
(mr'ttika) p>u is the expected change but has not been found
in any language nor even in Pkt. cf. it. mattl, Mar. matl.
Panj. mattl ‘big earthen vessel’.
§98. (3) |*>u (for Vedic see Wackern. §19, for Pkts. Pisch
§51); for a correspondence of Indo-Iranian p to Mid. or New
Persian u after labials see Grundriss der Iranische Pliilologie, I.
pt. 2 p. 39. §6, 6). pucchana (ppcchiti), bhujjana (bhrjjyatg), puttha
(prstk4 ); buddha (bpdba-), doubling of -dh-is due to analogy
of so many past participles in -ddha, -ddka- iii Pkt.; pehlo
(ppthula-> "puhnla > *pulia1a- or #palmla-) is rather doubtful
m5et (mpti-) cf. hOei < bhufca-.; siin"na (Spp6ti), sungh«na
(•spnkhati, V. O. J. VIII p. 35), sungal ($pnkhala-), guccha
(#grpsa-: guccha-)* rutt. (ptu-) ts.
§99. (4) p->ri- (no example in Vedic. In Pkts. initial p- fre¬
quently appears as ri- Pisch. §56, but sometimes especially in AMg.
as a-, i-, u- also, Pisch. §57). ricch (r'k$a-), rijjh«na (pdbyate).
VOWELS IN CONTACT.
§100. PI did not tolerate two vowels standing together in a
word, although it allowed as many as four or five consonants
to come together without an intervening vowel1. Prakrits went the
(1) In Vedic a few words with hiatus, e.g. titaii, priiiga,
suuti are found besides the cases where a consonant group of
the Saiphita Text with -y or -v as its last member should be
separated into i, or u 4 vowel, but nothing like this can be
found in Sansk rit. In external Sandhi between words of a sen¬
tence, too, PI. was not so strict as Sanskrit (Macdonell; Vedic
Grammar §67). The latter does not know any hiatus except
after pragphya vowels, or where vowels come together after
operation of sandhi rules.
 36
other way. They allowed groups of vowels and not of conson¬
ants (except double and anusvara-combinations. NW. Pkts.
retained consonant + r groups, Eastern Pkts. s$, 5c etc. Pisch.
§$268, 269). For vowel-groups, the enquiry is, therefore, limited
to Pkt. and Apabh. forms where the hiatus had come into existence
in consequence of the loss of intervocalic consonants. These
groups are usually treated in one of the two ways, i.e. they either
become diphthongs or contract into a simple tong vowel. 1
§101 Vowel-groups appearing as diphthongs in Panjabi.
-d a->ea : camear (carmakara ), kamhear, kumhear (kuinbha-
kara-) bh&<Jear (bhandagara), sunear (suvarnakara), naroea
(nlrogaka-), kSdearl (kantakara-), cheall (Pkt. chayalisa-) cheasl
(Pkt. cbayasi) For-a a-or more properly -aya- see contraction
of vowel-groups.
Pkt. or Apabh. -a»-> ai : bhain (bhaginl), khair (khadird),
pair (#padird) cf. badhird-, rudhird etc. Macdonell Ved. Gram. §
171.). thera (sthavira-), is an exception going to Pkt. tliera-.
Pkt. or Apa. -ai-> EP ai, WP ai : cjain, WP (Jain (<JakinI),
ghail, WP, ghail (*ghatilld), nain WP nai? (napitd-f-ini; Panj.
nal-f-n).
Pkt. or Apahh. ati- > au : cauttha (caturthd-), cauds (cdtur-
da5a), naul (nakuld-), dhaula (Pkt. dhavala-), kaul (kdrnala-)
bhauni (bhramapa-).
Pkt. or Apabh. -ati-> EP au, WP au : baur (vagura), baula
(vatnla-?-),saula (Syamala ), saun WP, saun (dravana-)
Pkt. or Apa.-ao-> EP au, WP au: paun, WP paun, (padGna)
Pkt. or Apa. -ia-> ea: maneara (mapikara-), pear (priyakara-).
Pkt. iti->e5, WP ifi : ghe5, WP ghiu (ghptd-), peG, WP piu
(pity-), neSda nifida, (nimantraka-).
(1) Hoernle (G(j. Gram. §§ 68-98) and Grierson (Phono¬
logy § 37) describe a third treatment, viz.; the insertion of y, w
or h to avoid hiatus. Now in most cases the y and w were al¬
ready there in Pkts. in the form of y-5ruti (Hemacandra I. 80)
and w, h is uncommon, the examples given being not quite sat¬
isfactory. Where the existence cl y, w, in Pkt. is not clear, there
the modern y, w are natural glides coming after close vowels.
 37
Pkt. Ia-> ea: seal (Sltakala-).
Pkt. ga-> ea: keara (kedara-).
Pkt. -?a-> ai: kaira (kgkara-), chainl (cliSdana-) cf also pa->
8 below.
Pkt. -ua- > EP ma but WP ua : kamara, WP kuara
(kumari-) jamar WP juar (yav&kara-)
Pkt. 5&-> ua : gualla (gopal& )
§102. The apparent insertion of h in juharia (dyutakara )
and the agent nouns karanhar Guj. karnar (karana +
kara) can be explained by treating these words as compounds
with dhara- instead of kara- cf. Hoernle : Gd-Gram. §70, Bloch
§ 258.
§103. Contraction of vowel-groups into a long vowel usually
takes place at the end of a word, but internally also it is not un¬
common. The exact conditions, however, are not known. Pkt. -a a-
or more properly-aya->-5-, representing.—
Skt.-aka- : nhera (’andhakara), Lassra (• kaipsakara-),
batera (variaka -H ra-), kanheya (skandhi + kata or ta^a),
kaderna (kan^aka+karapa-), kaneddu (karnakandu or+kandu-),
Mul. kanera * mat weaver* (kfmda Hkara)- nihsrna (nakha-h
karapa). Other words pbulrrii, lu^era etc. are of recent origin.
Skt. -aga-: chglla (cfcagalA.)
Skt. -ata-: bachsra (vatsatara), [hajthell (hastatala-), paina
(patati, though Pkt. padai). WP adjectives of the comparative
degree lamera (lainba+tara-), uegra (ucoatara-), bhaPra (bha-
dratara) etc.
Skt.-ada-: bsr (badara, but Pkt. bora ), kglla (kadall Pkt. kella
Pisch. §116.) The original form in which they were borrowed
from the aboriginal languages is doubtful.
Skt. -aya- : K. nsna (nayati).
Pkt. -3, a- or more properly - > a : seems to be foreign
to Panjabi, camar beside camear (cannakfira ), kamhar be¬
side kamhear (kumbhakara-). In luhar (iBhakara ), the dis¬
appearance of -e- is due to the influence of l5h&; seal (&takala )
and pear (priyakara-) are convenient forms of the too clumsy
#sieeal #pieear.
Pkt. ai at the end of a word >-5. je (y&di). Present Indicative
III Sing, paradigms e.g. bhare (bharati), calls (*calyati).
kai (k£ti). jai (y&ti), however, are exceptions. Numerals
90—99 n&bbft (navati-) etc.
Pkt. -ae at the end of a word >-§ : agge (wagrake), kols
(*krodake), neps (*nikatakg). .
Pkt. -ao'l >a finally only. ghOra (ghOfakfi), kjila (kalakft) etc.
Apa. -auJ jua (dyutako, paua (•padukakfi)
Apa. -au > EP Tau, WP -a finally. For medial position see
§101. bau, WP-va (vata-), ghau, WP gha (ghata-), tau
WP ta (tapa-).
Apabh.-au > EP-afi, WP-S finally. Medially > EP-au ,
WP-au- for which see § 101 : au, WP § (ama-), nau,
WP n& (nama), thau, WP thS (sthaina), pad, WP p'ff'
(pama). There is, however, one important exception
in EP viz. Present Indicative I Sing, paradigms, thus
kar& (*karami), calls- (*caljami). This is undoubt¬
edly the Western influence as we get in Hindi karau,
calau etc. (Kellog § 101).
Apabh. -ia> I finally: makkhl (m&k§ika), kauddi (kapardika)
Apabh. ia > ! finally, dahi (dadhikam), pan! (paniyam). In
pan! the nasalisation of i is due to the preceding n, while dah!
probably comes from the pL dadhlni. See § 112. cf. ghi
(ghpt&m) which may be a loan.
. -ia- before a closed syllable > i. This is the only case where
two vowels result into a short one.
bitth cf. Mar. vit (vitasti-), may also be referred to vistpti-.
Mul. diddh *11’ hut EP duph, deph (Pkt. divaddha-); baled
(balivdrda) recorded by Maya Singh, bhijjma (abhi-ajyate)..
-ia- in an open syllable > -5 : ngpa (mkafa-), deph (Pkt.
 39
divadtfha), matFr (•matritara-.)1 2, kaner (*ka,rnikara-: karni-
kara-), DoabI ghg (ghj-tA-) pf? (pita).
la- > iipila (pltala-) s! (slta), sll in silsabhau ‘calm and
quiet* (Sltala-) cf. H. sil
Apabh.-fu >-l finally: bl (blj£), jl (jlv£ ), nal (napitA-),
geri (gairika-), malll (malika ).
Apabb. -Iu <! finally: si (slmA).
Apabli. -uii <u: bicchu (vr'ScikB: *vr$cuka-i*f. AMg. vicchuya-)
gerfl (gairika-: *gairuka- cf. AMg. g^ruya-), kungu (kuhkuma ),
sattu (saktuka ). E.P. khuddo but W.P. khiddu (kanduka-). The
-0 in EP khuddcS f. may be due to a general tendency of forming
fern, from mas. nouns in u by changing u > 5 the origin of
which is obscure cf. Kalu mas. KalO fern., Taru m. Tars f. etc.
Medially: dfina (Pkt. dugunv) durh Pkt. (’duvaddha-)
-ua- > u medially: sur (sukarA-).
-fla- > u finally: bahu (vadhuka), jQ (yuka)
-5a- > 5 medially: rona (rodana-)
5fi >0: rfi, In (r6ma, l5ma), beside r“, W, kfcla, ktila
(kr*mala-), sObar (s6ma-).
Panjabi Diphthongs.
§104. Indo-Iranian had four diphthongs— ai, an, ai. an.' By
the time the PratiSHkhyas were composed, a1', au had become
simple’ long vowels e, 5*. The tendency seems to have been
to open the second elements so that ai, au became ae, ao. This
was actually the case in Avesta where daeva and koranaoti
correspond to Indian d?va and kpn*>ti respectively. Later the
first element a became fainter ami fainter till simple P, 5 was the
result. Along with this the qualitative change, also, may have
begun simultaneously i.e. the a tended towards e, o and finally
combined with the second elements e, o. Th^ same processes

(1) EP matea, WP matrPa go back to *matrpya-, cf. WP

bHaneflt < bhaginftya.
(2) Macdonell: Vedic Grammar §§ 15—16.
 40
must have began to operate on ai, au, but their elements being
longer, required a longer time for simplification. Why the first
elements of the diphthongs decayed and not the second was due
to the fact that “the relation of their elements is defined as
equal, or the a is made of less quantity than i and u”. 1 When
ai, au had become simple vowels 5, 5; ai, au were still passing
through the middle stage, hence they sounded diphthongs to the
phoneticians, but a little later in Pali and ASokan, they, too, be¬
came simple fi, 5. The Panj. diphthongs in inherited words, there¬
fore, do not represent the PI diphthongs.
$105. The loss of intervocalic stops in Pkts. left many
vowel's in hiatus. Tiie modern diphthongs are always the result
of these vowel-groups, several of which have again dialectically
developed into simple long vowels much in the same ’way as the
PI diphthongs did. (Grierson: Phonology $27,30). Thus—

(Braj. ghoyau — diphthong

ghcfakah>Apabh. ghO<jaii<Guj. Rajas. gh0j*3 — simple vowel
*H. Panj. ghc5j*a — „
Some dialects have developed [ae] and [ol sounds from
Pkt. vowel-groups, perhaps through a stage of diphthongs; thus
rava-> Apabh. *raula > Lah. rain [ro:la] L, S. I. VIII1 p. 27.
Similarly Lah. caj-a [coij-a] but Panj. cauj-a; Lah. tr« [tr»] but
WP. trai.»
The tendency of Rajasthani to simplify the diphthongs ai
au has been noted by sir George Grierson, L. S. I. IX* pp. 20, 54.
Powadlif has a great tendency for simplification of the final
diphthongs : thus, gas : gS ‘they went’, gal: gl ‘she went*, lau :
lii ‘he will take*, jati I ju *he will go* etc. I have heard several

(1) Whitney : Sanskrit Grammar $28& on the authority of

Pratiiakhvas.
\2) For Gujarati see Turner : “The E & 0 vowels in Guj¬
arati” published in Sir Ashutosh Mukherjee Jubilee Volumes
(Orientalia) pp. 337-47,
 41

more examples from people of Powadh. Compare also Ambala,

Rajas, kara as against Panj. karea; dhara against dharea, ete.
Maya Singh’s Dictionary gives several doublets ; e.g. pakaupa;
pakCpa, paun<Ja I p<3n<Ja, paukkha : pokkha ete.
§106. Another point worth mentioning about the diphthong
ai. au resulting from Pkt. vowel-groups with a as their first
member is that they are rising diphthongs in EP and falliug in
WP. At least they are so transcribed in dictionaries,
damanl EP. daun WP. daup
(JakinI EP. (Jain WP. daip
•gliatilla EP. ghail WP. ghail
ndma EP. nan WP. nSu
napiti -f-ini EP. nain WP. nain
Similarly, EP. jarau : \VP. jard; EP. ralau : WP raid ete.
From the last two paragraphs we see that it is the glide element
of a diphthong that disappears in its development into a simple
long vowel.
Vowel-gradation.1
§107. The vowel-gradation so prominent in IE has been
on the decline in Aryan even though it had also gained
a certain analogical extension. The first step to this decline
was the confusion of IE S,6 with & in Aryan. Later the deve¬
lopment of r > a, i, u and that of ai, au > 8 5 in Pkts. further
limited its scope. In Mod. Indian, however, it is confined chiefly
to express the relation between simple and causative or intransi¬
tive and transitive verbs. In languages other than the N W
group (Sin. Panj. Lali. etc.) it has suffered, especially the a: a
series (1) by lengthening of vowels consonaut-groups and
(2) by the extension of the -fipaya- causative suffix. Panjabi

(1) For a brief history and its operation in Cujarati see

Turner § 14. Another paper by the same, “The loss of vnwel-
alternation in Indo-Aryan” published in the Proceedings of the
Second Oriental Conference, Calcutta, 1922. (2) French Calcutta
1922.
 42
has however, been safe to a great extent from these losses.
Whereas we have in Guj. tapvfi ‘to be hot’ (tapyati): tfivvu ‘to
heat* (tapayati), phatvu ‘to be split’ (sphatyate): phadvu ‘to.
split’ (sphatayati), we find in Panjabi tapna: tauna, phatna:
pha^na. Whereas in Tfind! we have girna ‘to fall’: girana
‘to fell’, phirna ‘to be turned’, phirana ‘to turn,' in Panjabi we
find girna:, g^rna, phirna: pherna.
$108. The series descended from PI are a: a, i: e, u: 6.
a: a—mania: marna, tama: tarna, sarna: sarna etc.
i: s-milna: melnii, kirna: kerna, girna: gerna etc.
u: fi—tutt0nii: torna, phutt,rna: phorna, tulna: tolna. etc.

$109. When the verbs are preceded by prepositions, the

grades still work on the roots. Here however the root-vowels
becoming unaccented, i and u change to a which partly conceals
the gradation.
a: a—uttarna (nttarali): utarnfi (uttarayati). ussarna:
usarna. nittarna : natama, niggliarna : nagharna, ubbharna :
ubharaa, ullarna : ularna.

i: g-bikkharna (*viskirati): bakhrrna (visksrayati), ukkama:

ukema, nikkharna (cf. kliitati): nakherna, ukkharna: ukherna,
but Guj. H. ukhar : ukhar point to a verb *khatati. nibbarna:
naberna, cimbarna: camerna, WP. camfirna, libbarna: laberna,
ghusarna: ghuserna, uddharna: udherna.

n : 5—nuccarna WP. niccarna: nacSrna, biccharna

(viccliutali): bachorna, sangucc^na: sangacc-Tifi, sungarna:
s&gorna. Many of the examples cited above are late analogical
formations.

$110. Two more grades have developed in Panjabi but

are of a very restricted application, viz. (i) short vowel followed
by a single consonant: short vowel followed by a long or
conjunct consonant, (2) short vowel: long vowel.
 43

(1) a+single consonant: a+longor two consonants,

ladna: ladd°na, katna: katt“na, gba§na : ghatfroa, dabna :
dabb*na, ga<Jna or garna: ga<Mflna, m&Jna: man^a.
i-fsingle consonant : i+long or two consonants,
khicna: khiccnrta.
u-f-single consonant: u-flong or two consonants.
' gu<Jna: gu4dnna.
(2) Short vowel: Long vowel.
a : a—confused with a : a descended from P. I.
i: i—micna: micna, bhirna: AYP bhlrna, E.P. bhprna, pisna:
#plsn>pflina.
u : u— phukna: phukna, sutna : sutna.

Nasal vowels in Panjabi.'

§111. PI did not allow nasalisation of vowels except in a few
cases at the end of a word or in pausa.* Classical Sanskrit was
still stricter in this respect. Only a non-Pragrhya a, i, u short
or long could be optionally nasalised when occurring in a pause.*
In Pali and Afokan it is not certain how far vowels were
nasalised, but in Prakrits there ore numerous instances where a
vowel followed by an anu.wOra4 must bo pronounced without the
anusv&m and in consequence probably nasalised.9 This marks
the beginning of a tendency which resulted in an abundance of
nasal vowels in Apabhraipfa and Mod. Indian. Now we know
(1) For Marathi cf. Bloch §§66-70, for Gujrati: Turner §16.
Also see Grierson: “Spontaneous nasalisation in IA languages”
JRAS 1922, pp. 381-88.
(2) Macdonell: Vedic Grammar §§66, i; 70, 16 etc.
(3) Pacini VIII, 4, 57.
(4) Nothing definite is known as to what was the exact
pronunciation of the auuftvllra in ancient limes (Whitney: Skt.
Gram. §71). At the present day if is pronounced finally and
before non-stops, at least in Northern India as q(^). Its con¬
sonantal nature may be inferred from its making a heavy syllable
with a short vowel before it.
(5) Pischel §§ 178-183,
 44

that the Pkt. anusv&ra was in most cases an optional substitute

for a PI nasal consonant. Thus it is clear that most of the
modern nasal vowels are due to the loss of a PI nasal consonant
at some time or other. In this respect the history of the nasal
vowels in Mod. Indian may be compared with that of the French.
Panjabi is, however, comparatively freer from nasal vowels than
the other languages because it did uot simplify nasal + consonant-
groups after short vowels.
$112. From the point of view of origin, Panjabi nasal vowels
may be treated under four heads:—
1. Those due to the disappearance of a PI nasal consonant:—
(a) An intervocalic -m- was split up into -V- > *v-, and
subsequently the -v- was changed into u, thus we get nau (nama),
th&u (sth&ma) etc. For the disappearance of u as in callS
(•calyami) etc., in dhfiS (dhum& ) etc. See contraction of vowel-
groups $103.
For cases where -m- did not leave any trace of nasality see
Denasalisation $$117-19.
(5) Loss of intervocalic -n-, p- in inflexional terminations,
thus Gen. pi. -anam>Pkt. -anam, -an&, ana> S perhaps
through* aii as in H. we have-8 possibly<-au, of. Braj. -afi,
Rajas.-fl. For further cases see treatment of-n-, -n- p.
Also compare W.P. akkhi<aksipi, pi. nom., P. battS H. bat8,
Braj. bat&i.
Skt. Instr. Sing. sna>Apabh.— §
Skt. Nom. Acc. pl.-ani>Mar. neat, pl.-e.
(c) When in a word containing a group nasal+consonant,
the accent is shifted into another syllable, the nasal is reduced
to the nasality of the preceding voweL This occurs frequently
in the course of grammatical processes, pahl&g (paryanka-),
sdr&g (surnnga), gund°na gud&una etc.
In this way is treated a group nasal+consonant occurring
in an unaccented syllable, thus, pSjih, H. pacjs (pancaSat)'.
 45

Also when the group is final of n syllable preceded by a long

vowel c."M p!gh (prPnkhJ). pfljhna (profiehati).
§113. 2. Those due to the insertion of a nasal or anusvara
at some time or other in a word where there was no nasal
in the original PI, and this nasal or anusvara falling under
conditions stated above in I (r). There is good evidence
in the modern vernaculars to show that at some intermedi¬
ate stage there were two pronunciations of a large number of
words—one with the nasal and the other without it. This was
probably a dialectal variation, ami was duo to a tendency which
may have come into existence from the analogy of word groups
like bandha-: baddha, sincati: sikta-:secana etc. There are many
more pairs with and without a nasal, e.g, ukhati: unkliati,
ghuta-; ghunta-, maksu: manksu, makhati: mahkhati, stabaka-:
stambaka etc. Those again may be the result of analogy, if them¬
selves original may have been the cause of similar analogical
formations. The Pkt. forms with nasal, alone e.g., vaipka.
(vakri.) where PT had no nasal, show that the Pkt. forms
were taken from a nasalising dialect.

This tendency for inserting a nasal, or rather changing

a PI consonant group into a nasal +ccmsnnant does not seem
to be so strong in the parent Prakrit of Panjabi as it was
in that of its eastern neighbour Hindi. From the fact that
the new nasal appears as the nasality of the compensatory
long vowel in Hindi and as a nasal consonant before voiceless
stops in the Ambala dialect which follows Panjabi in preserv¬
ing vowel-length before consonant-groups * and voicing the
breathed stops after nasals, it may be inferred that the new

(1) This statement is based on my own observation of the

pronunciation of persons from Ambala. The specimens given
in the L. S. IIX1 pp. 241-51 reveal the Hindi tendency for vowel-
length e. g. the words ag. sas, sfijh, math?, mSje on p. 250, but
we also find khillft (cf. H. khll) p. 249, cakkl, hattha, picch? on
p. 245 and laggl on p. 250/
 46

nasal got into the words, at least into those of Ambala, at a

time when the latter had lost the tendency of voicing breathed
stops after nasal', and before Hindi had lengthened its short
vowels in front of consonant-groups.
The following are a few words out of a large number for
comparison.
PI. or Skt. Panjabi Ambala. Hindi.
*ksi akkh ankh 5kh
ucca- WP. ucca uuefi Qca
(EP. unca)
*i$ta (istaka) itt int H
k£c&- WP. kacc kanc kfic
EP. (kanc)
Satyi- sacc sane sSc
sarpfi- sapp samp sSp
chitt (stain) chint (stain) chit
hakk ‘drive* hank h8k etc. etc.
* §114. There are a few words in Panj. showing this kind
of nasal which under conditions I (c) lost itself in nasalising the
previous vowel. The nasal in these words is very early as
it is found in other languages also except Marathi. But more
probably they are loans from Hindi in the face of the above
examples and on account of lengthening short vowels before
consonant-groups as in mingi, aid, mudgi >Panj. mQngl, H. mag,
M. mug : Panj. mftgia “of colour of mungi. paks&->Pkt pakkha-
> Panj. phangh <Pkt. # paipkha-or by contamination with Ski.
punkha-: Panj. phftgh'Tl ‘thin, lean, lit light as a feather*; cf.
H. pSkh, pSkbjT. nidra> Panj. n!d, H. id but M. nid,
margayatc > Panj. mang’na: mSgauna; IT. mSg’na but M.
magije.
vakr&- > Pki. vaipka-> Panj. binga, H. bSka.
Punj. bSk ‘ornament for ankles* must be a loan from H.
§115. (3) Nasal vowels due to the vicinity of a nasal conson¬
ant, especially after n or m e.7., nau (niva,), n^i (nadl), nauh
(nakbi), mSh (mSsa-), m5 (matd), raoh (mukha-) mih
 47

(megha-). In maih it may bo doe to an insertion of nasal, <4.

H. bh&is, W P majjh, manjh < 'mahiipsa. Pali maliiipsa.
This kind of nasality is often omitted in spelling, e.g. pani
[pronounced p£nl] jana [jSn3], pina [plnft] etc.
§116. (4) Spontaneous nasal vowels for which causes men¬
tioned in 1-3 cannot be assigned; e.g.t gdh (gutha-), jau (y&va ),
ja (yflka\ saiih (Sapatha-) etc. dahl possibly derived from pJ.
dadhlni.
In the numerals 11-18 gearS, bar#, etc., the -S is added per¬
haps on the analogy of the oblique plural forms like gharS, battS
etc., the ancient numerals having given simply gear, bar etc., as
in Gujarati. Or it is the lengthening of the final -ah ef. M. gyarah
barah etc. and then nasalising it.
The termination of the Pres. Indie, II sing, and pi. gets
nasalised, Pkt. karasi > Panj. kar§, Pkt, karaha > Panj. karft.
De nasalisation.
§117. It often happens that a nasal vowel arising from the
loss of a nasal consonant loses its nasality altogether when com¬
ing in an unaccented syllable. This is very conspicuous in Pre¬
sent Participles, e.g. Pkt. kardrpta > Panj. Pkt. •kariipda > old
Panj. kirada > k&rda. Path, k&rna through kar&ipda- > karttnna-
Lah. karenda kar^nna come from kar^ipta without shift of accent,
and consequently with nasals. When there was no occasion for loss
of accent, the nasal consonant has remained as in #yant->Panj.
Pkt. jaipda->janda. Similarly *khadant->Panj. Pkt. khayaqida-
>khanda, *svapant->Panj, Pkt. *savaipda-> saunda etc. Tn a
few cases where the vowel gets a special tom*, the nasal consonant
appears as the nasality of the previous vowel e.g., bhauda
(*bhramant-) kaibda (*kathayant-) etc., but in WP they are
bhaunda, kaihnda etc. The central languages, however, have dena-
salised it; e.g., H. khata, sOta. This points to a condition that at
the shift of accent they were trissyllabic with a consonant y or
v between, thus *khayaipta or #khavaipta-, *sfivaipta (from
 48

svipati, which developed into khavS,ta>fehavata>khaVta>kbatri

etc. This v is also found in E.H, khavat, sovat. In Paoj. also
a few traces of this y or v are left as in W.P, kbalina, but in
Panj. participles it must have become a vowel glide at an early
stage so that the whole developed into a diphthong which being a
single syllable preserved the accent and nasality, thus
*kbadant->Panj. Pkt. #khuyaipda->*khaaipda>‘kbanda.
In H. javnfi: jana; javta, EFT. javat: jata, the insertion
of-v- must be analogical, ef. Nep. jldO: audo.
For tlic loss of a preaceontual nasal cf. pacbinja, H. pacpan
(pancapanca^at), pac&ssi (pahcaSIti-), pacanmS (pancanavati);
picci is from H. pacts, cf. W.P. panjhl (25) Panj. paj&h but II.
pacas (50). jabhara (jimbha)
$118. The above consideration supports the theory of the
Panj. Genitive postposition d:i,. Poth. na derived from *sant- as sug¬
gested by Beanies (Gram. TI p. 291) against Grierson’s view K.Z.
XXXVIII p. 488. #sant-> sanda, handa, found in and SindhI
(Beames II 290). sanda must have come to be regarded as part
of the preceding word, and s->h-which i n course of time dis¬
appeared. Later it resuited into-Sda>Panj. da or &nda>&nna>
Poib. na according as it lost the accent or not.
-§119. Another case where nasality frequently disappears
is the development of intervocalic -m->-\r->u,-u-. Nasality remains
on a final syllable but disappears from non-final syllables.
(1) Nasality remains—

nau (n£uia), pan (pam£), thau (stbfima), bhn. (bhumi) s!

(slma), rG (r6ina). 10 (ISma), karft (karami, calls (Valyami) etc.
(2) Nasality disappears—
aula (amala), kaul, (k&mala-). caur (camara-), bhaur
(bhramara-), dauru (damaru); W.P. juai, kuara. In neoda, nifida
(nimantra-), dhaun, (dhamini), daun (damani), bauna
(vamani-) the nasality is due to the influence of n.
 49

Consonants.
§120. Tlie general development of P I consonants lias been
dealt with by I)r. Bloch §§ 14 ff. The same lias been sum¬
marised by Prof. Turner with special reference to Gujarati (§§ 84-
38). On the whole LudhianT has undergone the changes assigned
by the latter to N., W., or NW (not SW) groups of languages
but with the following additional remarks:—
(1) Ludhianl has assimilated all the consonant-groups.
Unlike Sindhi, Lalmdi, WP.it has treated the groups stop + r
also in the same way.
(2) The in'tinl voiced aspirated stops of the PI or MI
stage have been disaspi rated and devoiced with lowering of the
pitch of the following vowel.
(3) An initial1 nasal-f- h of the M I stage arising from P I
sibilant -f nasal has been disaspirated and the pitch of the fol¬
lowing vowel lowered.
(4) Ml voiced aspirates or nasal -f h groups in the in¬
terior of a word lose their h and raise or lower the pitch of
the adjacent accented vowel according as it occurs in the pre¬
ceding or following syllable.
(5) voiced stops after the nasals n, n, rn are assimilated
to the latter.
(6) v-, -w- become b, bb as in the east.
(7) There is no distinction between dental and cerebral Q
and J.
(8) Intervocalic -s- -s- have become h and have consequent¬
ly fallen together with the PI -h- and the MI -h- arising from
PI aspirated stops. This h lias again dwindled into a tone
just as the aspiration of the MI intervocalic voiced aspirates
described in (4) above.
(9) The PI initial h has become unvoiced unlike WP
and Lalmdi.
The development of a consonant largely depends on its place
and neighbour in the word. Initial single consonants behave
 50

exactly like intervocalic double ones (of PI or MI stage) with

this difference only that an initial voiced aspirate stop loses
beside the h its voice also, while an initial vocalic double voiced
aspirate stop does not lose the voice. (See 2-4) above.
§121. As a rule MI double consonants appear as double in
Panjabi but with the following exceptions: -
(1) A MI double consonant when falling in an unaccented
syllable is shortened, e.g. Pkt. cammaro > camJLr, manikkaip
> mltnak, passijjai > pasijje.

(2) When it is final after along vowel; eg. Pkt. ka^haip,

Panj. Pkt. ’katthaip > ka^h; Panj. Pkt. *llkkha > likh.
(3) A group nasal -1- consonant under these conditions
loses its nasal throwing the nasality on the preceding vowel;
eg. Pkt. ‘‘paipcasaip : pannasam > p&j£h; pallamko > p&hl&g;
peipkha > p!gh.
(4) In a number of words, a double consonant is shortened
after an accented short vowoi e.g. bil (bilva-), pacnfi (pucyato-),
kasna (karsati) etc.
(5) It is sometimes shortened in the interior of a word, e.g.
bijll (vidyut), putla (puttala-), cibhri (cirbha^a-)
(6) In rapid speech a good many double consonants are
shortened. The cases mentioned in (4) and (5) may have been
due to this cause, or to an influence of Hindi,
In slow speech— In rapid speech—
kallh dl kalh dl (of yesterday)
dass^da dasda (telling)
peo putt dl peo put dl (of father and son)
ajj'kl din ait aj kl din ait (what is the

day to-day).
•>
 51

"§122. Initial single consonants followed by a vowel have

come down unchanged with a few exceptions. They are far
better preserved than the interior ones. The reason for this
difference is partly the speaker’s consciousness of the beginning
of a word and the consequent care with which they are pronoun¬
ced, and partly their freedom from the influence of the off-glide
of the preceding sound.
Aspiration.
§123. There is a number of words which show aspiration in
Panjabi, while in PI and often in cognate languages there is no
sign of it. These may be c msidered under two heads—simple
aspiration and aspiration now appearing as tones. (For Marathi
see Blocli §§ S3— 86 and for Gujarati Turner § 40).
§124 (1) Under the first head comes the aspiration of the
initial k- ami p-. This seems in some cases to go back to IE forms
with a prothetie s as is attested by similar cases in other IE
languages. Some of these examples are shared by the cognate
languages also e.g. khappar (karpara-) ef. Guj. khapriyu ‘crust
of mucus in the ‘nose,’ Alar, khiipar. khitti (kp'ttika), phaha (p£$a-
cf. VspaS ‘to bind’) Onj. ph&so. piling ‘ball’ beside pinn (piflda);
pharha (para$ii-) Guj. pharSl. Khuhfa] khpa-), for insertion the
second h cf. jubaria (dyutakara-)- KhuddS, WP. khgnu
(kanduka- cf. Vskand7Vskmid ‘t0 jump’) khundhi (kuntfia-) cf.
Sindlii kundhu. khiH (kautya-: ku^a-) cf. WP kur ‘ falsehood \
khunja (*kunya- or *kopya-: kopa~) cf. H. k5na kuna or Skt.
kunja-. chain! ‘ sieve 9 and chan"na ‘ to sift ’ if connected witli
calana- ‘a strainer’, khelna, khed^a ‘ to play ’ is a puzzle. It
appears with aspiration in all the IAVs. Either it is due to a
contamination between kndati ami khetati, or it comes from
ksslati found in the Kamayana where khelati itself occurs.
§125. Sometimes an aspirate or a sibilant in a neighbouring
syllable brings about aspiration, e.g. in pharha and phaha it may
be due to the -$* of paragu aDd pa£a-. Similarly can be explained

7 t:
 52

khass*na (karsati), phalah beside palah (pala&L); khussana

(ku§nati: kusyate); phangh (pak$£-Pkt. pakkha-: *paipkha cf.
H. p£kh); khutthl (kustrl), phammhan (p6k$man). khahgh
(kasa, Pkt. khasa; *khassa-,*khaipsa- cf H. khfisl), phambh
(p&ksma-) if not from Pers. pasm. This kind of aspiration lias
been extended to loans from Persian, c.g. khursl, beside learned
and spreading kursl, (Pers. kursl), khlssa (klsa), khes (kesh
‘kind of linen garment’), khlnkhap, ‘ brocade ’ (klmkhwab) etc.
Sometimes an h jumps over from a back syllable, e.g. pachan^na
(pratyabhijanati Pkt. paccahiyanai). H. pichattar 75.
$126. (2) The ease of aspiration appearing as tones is that
where a voiced stop is aspirated usually on account of a
neighbouring sibilate or aspirate, bhe(h) (bisa-), bh5(h) (bus& )
which occur in H. and M. also have been supposed to be cases of
IE *bh losing its aspiration in Skt (Bloch $ 84). Other
examples are ghund (gunthana- also gundana-), dho(h) (droha-)
sarhi (Sati- *$a.thi-*sadhi-), kanglia (kahkata- kaipkhao) but
H. kangha which should have been vkaka, *kakha or even kSgha
if ‘kaipkhao had become ‘kaipghao in Pkt times, bhaph (baspa-)
sadhur (sindura-); Is. gharistl (gfhastha-) in due need by ghar.
jhuth (ju§la-) for j. > jli- see l’ischel § 209. bhaukna ‘to bark,’
buhknfi ‘to cry’ if connected-with bukkati; bhukk"na ‘to sprinkle a
powder’ cf. H. bukni ‘a powder’, bukna ‘to pound’may also come
from bukkati as this verb also means ‘to give pain’, and the Panj.
word bhukk^na, is restricted to sprinkling of medicinal powders
which usually give pain when sprinkled on a wound, mijjh, minjh
(majj£, majjas, medas) is unexplainable.
kaddhana (kr§ta- >kattha- > *kadclha<), behra (ves^a- Pkt.
vedha-) jayh or darli (daipstra cf. Pa. datha, Skt. dadha), lorha
(losta-), s?dh (srgslhl) are perhaps cases of implication of
double consonants in Pkt. cf. Pa. kotha (ku$tha-: ’kaustha-) and
hence they regnlariy become rh in modern languages, ar- in H.
arfcis 38, artalls Panj. artall 48, may have similarly come from
Pkt.attha- > adha-. cf. Guj. adhar 18. AA1.
 53

§127. In a few cases, an hieft alone in a back syllable has

come to the front and aspirated a consonant of that syllable e.g.
bhukkh (bubhuksa: Pkt, buhukkha), magghar (inargasira->
"maggaliira-), gadha (gardablii- Pst. gaddalm-) nibhna (nirvahati
> Pkt niwahav). pajhattar (75).
§128. A very important category is the aspiration of 8kt.
-ly-, -11- or of -1-. The exact c mditions under which it takes place
are not known bat there are numerous examples in Panjabi,
several of them being shared by other languages also. It seems
to be more prominent in 8. L. and WP than in EP and more so
in EP than in H, (For Mar. see Bloch § 148).
-ly- : kallh, H. kal, kalh (kalya-), kuhl (kulya), s&hlag (Sal-
yaka-, Pkt. ’sallaipka-), pahlag (palyanka-), mahl ‘belt of a wheel*
but mala ‘ garland ’ WP malila (malya-, mala) tulha, tullhara
(tula : tulya-; tula ‘abeam in the roof*, tuliidhara ‘an oar’);
dullivna * to flow out, spill * but dull na ‘ to become homesick *
(dolayati: *dulyatc), selhkharl ($ailya+1); 8. mulh but Panj.
mull (mulya).
-11-: cullha, ll. culha (culla-: *culya-), gallh, II. gal (galla-,
cf. galya kmultitude of throats'), WP pallhi ‘ green leaves uf
gram* (pallava-).
-1- : gal, WP gabl (gali-). Bloch suggests garhil : gallia,
but that will not do for Panj. Bali, and Sindiii; bahld also bauld
(baliv&rda-), halhdl (haridra, Pkt. halidda Pisch. §257) WP. mahla
(mala), bal, WP. valil (vala-), duhlna ‘ to pour out * but d^lna
‘ to feel homesick * (dolayati), WP p£hlamn& beside palamna
(pralambate), Lali. salli (Sala), Bali, silh but EP sil • sillha
(Sitala- cf. UL. slla). Pers. saUiibl ‘ dampness * becomes salhabbl.
§129. There are a few exceptions also, e.g. sail (Salya-', pfil
ptilya-), palana (paryana-: *palyana-), tel (*tailya-) callma
(calati: Pkt. callai: Valyati), malPna (mallati Bnalyati), hilT'na
(liilati : "iiilyali),
§130. Au initial r in WP is often followed by a vowel in low
tone, e.g. Rham (Rama-), Rhapo (Rano perhaps connected with
rapi Skt.crajul), rhoti (H. rStf etc. One cannot say whether the
 54

vowel has directly fallen in x>itcli or it lias become so through an

aspirated rh, for there is no evidence of such aspiration to be
found in any other language.
$ 131 EP par=bliar [pcar] adv. ‘but’ similarly an initial k-
iu Poth. lowers the pitch of the following vowel, e g. ghaftha
pronounced [kcAt:ha] Pauj. kaftha, ‘ together ghalla, [pro¬
nounced kcAl’.a], Panj. kalla ‘alone’; L. S. I. VIII1 p. 490,492.
§ 132 Another case which should come under head (1) or
(2) according to dialects is the aspiration of the initial vowel.
This is already noticeable in ASokan where we find hevaip
(sv&m), hida (* idha: iht), hedise (Idfsa edj-Sa) and in pali
huram *iu jeuer welt' beside Oraip (ivaram) Wackernagel § 211
Skt. atta-: hatta- perhaps is another old example.
At present this tendency is more prominent in W P, Lali. and
Sindhi than elsewhere.1 EP her, IV P hdr [fi,o;r] (tpara-) cf. H.
anr, Rajas, dr; EP limnmh, WP hussar [fvusiap] (usma) cf. H.
ubh. hass (aipsa-); E P. ikk W P. hikk Lfhik:] S. haku Lab. hikk
[&ik:-] (Ska-, Pkt. ekka-),EP. injh, W P banjh [fi.Anjf] (ami),
B i>. rjttha, W P harlttha (arista); W P hib L&1 I] (1st); H. h«t
(6stlia-) badd» H. hay if at all connected with isthi. cf. P
hoccha 0. Ocliu. P. hah II. ah cf. P. haukka. II. ham, ‘we’ W P
h&ncra, lional P. H. hS Skt. am.
Disaspiration.

^ 133. The opposite tendency, also, is noticeable in Pan¬

jabi-. It chiefly occurs:—
(1) In voiced aspirates for which see “Tonic effects of h
on vowels” §§ 79-93.
(2) In terminations both nominal and verbal where Pkt.
or Apabli. shows an h, eg.

(H T. Michelson thought it to he an eastern tendency

(J. A. 0. S. Vol. 30 p. 39) and held “Shaliab. and mans, hida to
be a Magadhism. Similarly Mans, liidaiji if not a pure blunder
ib. p. 92 n.
 55

(a) Gen. Sing. Pkt. ghOdayrassa> Apabh. gho<Ja[J] ahu (Pis-

chel §366) >‘ghodf'hu > ghOre the modern oblique singular in H.
Panj. The final P is due to -a^a-. In languages which reduce
*aya- > a, we have the oblique form ghora as in Gu.j. Rajas etc.,
Sir George Grierson assumes Apabh. gh6da&ssa>gh6da&hi>
ghodaal>ghore (Z. D. M. G. Vol. 49 p. 427).
(b) Instr. PJ. Pkt. akkhihiip > akkhihl > Panj. akkli!
as in akkht dekkheii ‘seen with the oyes., In a similar
way hattlii ‘ with the hands,’ pair! 4 on foot ’ are used as
adverbs of instrumentality. According to Dr. Bailey this
construction is generally used for those parts of the body
which exist in pairs, bonce it is plural in origin. The
final ! in hatthi, pair! is either on the analogy of akkht, or is due
to the shortening of P in liatthehi which contracted into 1 with
the following L I, however, remember having beard hatth§,
kannS also from Iloshiarpur people.
(c) Present Indicative II Sing. Pkt. karasi > Apabh.
karasi or karahi (Pischol §455) > Panj. karS. In Panj. the
nasalisation of final-5 is, perhaps, to distinguish it from III
Sing. kare. In Hind? both end in -P.
(d) Present Indicative II pi. Pkt. karaha > Apabh. id. or
karahu (Pisch. § 456) >Panj. karo. Nasalisation as above in (c)
is to distinguish from Imper. karfi.
(e) Imperative IT pi. Pkt. Apabh. karaha, karahu (Pisch.
§471) > Panj. karo.
(f) In all the paradigms of the Present Indicative of the
substantive verb hona ‘to be’, the initial h is always dropped
in pronunciation though written in script. Thus hai ‘is’ pro¬
nounced ai, h^i ‘art’ -&i, han ‘are’ -an, h£ ‘am'-S.
§134. (3) When two consecutive syllables of a word con
lained h or voiced aspiration, one of them lost it. This may
be called a case of haplologx also. Thus lohda (loh& -f bhamja,
lauhabhamja) dahin<jl (dadhibhfipda-), lohfiya (loh£ + hafta),
maih (m£hi$i), maihga (mahargha-), and the words expressing
 5(>
relation by marriage in which £va£ura- appears as -auhra e g.
patiauhra (pitriya + SviSnra ), dadiauhra, maliauhra etc.
$135. (4) To drop the final unvoiced -h (visarga) is a tendency
going back to Pali, thus dcvah > Pa. deva, agnih > Pa. aggl
etc. In Panj. wherever an -h developed as final in an accented
syllable it was reduced to tone as in kapSh [kor'a:] (katalia-',
kh5h [kko] (ksudha), bggk [bga'] (vivalig) etc.
In balla. WP. valll1 a term of endearment for children ' if
derived from vallabha-, the final h is lost without tone- effect
because it comes after an unaccented vowel.
In the numerals 11—19, 21—29, 31—49, 51—58, the final li
< leaves no tonic effect because the syllable containing h bas
become unaccented thus ge£r£, bSrS; k&t-tl, akbgnja etc. but it
re-appears in their ordinal and other derivative forms although
the accent remains as before, e.g., ggghrmS, b£hnn£, ge&hra,
bShra, ge£hr!, b&krl, kghttimS, k&httia, kahtt! etc1. In WP
24, 25,40 and in Mu!. 50 show tones thus c&hvi, p&njhi, c£hll,
pinjha [pAujfia], When the numeral is a monosyllable, or the
accent falls on the syllable containing the h, the tone is found in
the cardinal forms also as in bib 20, tlh 30, p&j&h 50, Persian
words ending in h after an unaccented vowel when used in
Panjabi lose the h and lengthen the vowel, thus b&nda (ban-
da[h]), g&ndfi (ganda[h]), badsa or baccha (padshah), sahi
(Ar. sahlh) etc. The h after a short a is not pronounced in Mod.
Persian itself*. The h after a long vowel in an accented syllable,
however, brings about tone effects, thus—gunah [grind] (gunah),
ug&b (iiga' (gawah),malah [md'ld] (maUah), rah, cah (tea).
(5) Prof. Bloch remarks that the final position is very
favourable for disaspiration, and adduces a large number of
examples from Marathi*. Now in Panjabi the cases where final
(IT Before the ordinal termination- mS or-vg the tone may
be left out after 21 and upwards.' At Lahore"! remember having
heard gehSrmS [g&a.rm&], bb&rmfi ['b^a.rma].
(2) Duncan Forbes: Persian Grammar 1861 p. 7.
(3) § 88, For Guj. See Turner ^40 (5),
 57

voiced aspirates of Pkt. stage ioso their aspiration arc* quite

regular, hut those of unvoiced aspirates losing their h arc not so
common, itt (*sta) goes hack to Pkt. sit-t-, satt-, sutt'na ‘to throw1
if connected with (srstA): cf. Mar. s\\. mitna (mystu-). piftana
*to beat breast in mourning' (pista-) cf. H. pltna; ghuM«na
fgbp^a-?): mat, matf ‘ monument’ besides regular map a, mayhl
are ts\ lik(h), lak(h)lr U. (lekha?); kuht (ekasdsti-), baht
(dvfisastl-) ete. In sungal (fy-hkhala-) the loss is very early, cf.
AMg. saipkala- Pisch. 213, H, sSkal. '
PI single consonants.
$137. Initial stops have eomo down unchanged except the voic
cd aspirates which have lost their voice and aspiration, and lower-
ed the pitch of the next vowel.
k-: kann (k£rna ), karna (k&rati), kaihna (kathayati), kala
(kala-)» kath (kastha ), kip a. (kita-), kllla (kila-), kukkar
(kukkute-), kossa (ko?ma-), kottha (ko$tha-) kukkk (kuksl).
kh-: khatt (khatva), khanna (khapda-), khiina (khadati),
khal (khati-\ kliarl ‘basket’ (khan).
g-: gal (gala ), gajjana (garjati), ganni (ganda-), gabbha
(g&rbha-), garha (gidha-), gummS (gulmv), gajjh.fi (guhya-),
guh (gutha-), giddh (gr'dhra-), gfit (gotrd-), goh (gfldtte), gau,
gg, (g6-:*gava).
gh-: ghara (ghata-). ghand (ghanta-), ghau (ghata-), ghun
(ghuna 1, gheS (gbyte-), ghora (ghOla-).
c : cand, cann (candte), camm (c&rma), cakk (cakr6^,
cittana (citrayati), cir (cite ), cullha (culla-), cor (c^r6.-).
ch-: chann (ch&ndas), c iatfc /. (•chatti-), chaff (chaya)', chikk
(chikka), obijjma (chidyate), chidda (chidte).
j-:jana (jtena-), jamm (jinma), janma (jaiteti), jl (jlvd-), jibh
(jihv&), juttba (justa-l, )p\h (jy6stha-)-
jh-: No word began with jh in Pi except jhatlti from which
come perhaps EP. jhatt, WP jhabb, jhav.
No word began with a cerebral stop iu PT. Most of the words
recorded in vSkt. Dictionaries as such are of late origin, and are
 58

found in works of 5th or 6th centuries A.D. and upwards. The

older ones are Ytank (from tanka- ‘seal’) ‘to shut’. Katy. gr. IV,
X. tankanaksara-'borax' Katy. Sr. TIT paddh., tittibha- name of a
demon Mn., yajnam, Vtval = Vtal Dhp. XX 5; dakini Tan LV,
•2, 51; V d* I'a? VII, 2. 10; \/dhauk Pan. VII 4, 59.
t: tang, taka (tanga-, tanka-), taln.i (tvalati), tatlhra
(t ttibha-).
th : Taaukar, Thakar cf. H. thakur (thakkura-).
d-: dauru (damaru ), dain (dakini).
dh-: dhfina (dhaukate).
t-:tand (t&ntu-), tatta (taptd-), takkana (tarkayati), tau
(tapa-), til (tila), turna (turati), tin (tp'na-)-
th-: No sure example is found except thukk which may be
connected with Skt thutkaraif that is not purely onomatopoeic.
Skt. dictionaries give about a dozen words beginning with th,
most of them being proper names or imitative sounds.
d-: d&nd td&nta-), dassana (darSayati), din (dina-), duddh
(dugdhi ), dur (dur4 ), diss«na (dp$y£te), d5hta (dauhitra-).
dh-: dharna (dbarati), dbfir (dh£ra),dhu5 (dhum£).
p-: panj (pihea), pani (panlya-), pinn (pinda-),plr (plda),
putt (putr&), pucch"na (ppcchdti), pflli (pausa-).
ph-: phal (pbila), plian (phan£-)> pbala (ph&la-), phull
(phulla-), pbaggan (pMlguna-).
b-: bakkara (barkara-), barmh^na ("bandhati), bSh
(bahu-), b! (bija)-, bujjh*na (budhyate).
bb-: bhatta (bhakti), bharna (bhdrati), bhau (bhag&-)
bhh (bhtimi-). bhujj’na (bhpjjati).
$138. Intervocalic stops. Among these -k-, -g-, -c-, -t-,
and -d- were lost altogether leaving a slight -f- glide in their
place the effect of which is seen in the subsequent change -a^a->(5.
•t, -d- became -p-. -p- became -v- in Ml which later was lost, or
changed to u and together with the preceding vowel resulted in
a diphthong or a simple long vowel, -b- is rare like the initial
 59

b-, and shared the fate of -p-. The aspirates -kh, gh-, -th-,
-dh-, -ph-, -bh- were reduced to h in MI which subsequently lost
itself affecting the tone ol the neighbouring vowel.
-^h- <Jh- became -qIIi- in MI and were later on (perhaps
even in Allj pronounced as -ph- the aspiration of winch dis¬
appeared in Panjabi alter bringing about the tone-effects like
the -h- of other aspirates, -cii-, -jh- never existed as intervocalic
singles. 1 At least for -oh* Skt. grammarians prescribe doubl¬
ing after a vowel which points to its origin from a consonant-
group.*
-k : cam[e]iir (carmakara-), kanh[e]ar (kumbhakara-), dain
(dakmi), seal (gltakala), Uaru (katuka-), sur (sukard), initti
(mp'Ltika), makkhi (m&ksika), nlisra (*andhakara ).
kli-: nauh (nakh£ ), muh (mukha-)» sr*hra (Sekhara-),
llh (lekha), suhauna (#sukhapayati).
g-: bliain (bhigini), nartiea (nirfiga-), chella (chagali-),
bliau (bhagfc), bh§,d[e]ar (bhapdiigara-), jula (yug& n-hala )?,
baur f. (vagura).
-gh-: m!h (megha-), sarahtma (Slaghate), laulirhU (lagliu-),
WF m5h (maghd ).
-c-: sui (sucl).
-j-: rai (i&ji-), rufih (rajamasa ). baniS (van'.ja-), bi (bija-),
WP ay an a (ajanat ),WP ay all (ajapala).
i, : kara (kataka), gliarfi (ghat-i ), karu (kitu-), gliora
(gliotaka ), karah (kataba ), kur*m (kutumba-), kipa (k?ta-)f
pur (puta-).
th-: pirha (pitlia ), marh (matha-), parlioa (pathati).
d-: plr (pida), nar (nadl), dhur (*dhudi: dliuli).
-dh : hark (fisadha-), gurha (gud'A ), garhfi (gadhn).
-t-: khal (khatd ), ghau (ghata-), jua (dyu?&), seal
(SItakala-), glieo (glirtd ), sau (§at& ), caudS (c&turtta£a).
-th-: kaihna (kathayati), sau’i (Sipatha-), gnh (gutha-),
paihlla (#prathdla ), paiha (patha-).
(1) Whitney: Sanskrit Grammar $42. (2) ib. $227.
 60

-d-:keara (ksdara-), nai (nadf), sava (sapada-), je (y4di),

paun (padona-).
-dh- hun (adhuni), klioh (ksudha), dah! (d&dhi), bsh
(vsdha-), b§h in bshmata ‘Fate’ (vicltxi-)-
p-: ant (aputra-), nai (napil£ ), bacc (£patya-> Pkt.
avacca- the a must have disappeared at an early dale), kalava
(kalapa-), sava (sapada-), \VP ayall (ajiipala).
-ph- : kuhnl, kohnl (kaphSnU), k.ihla (kaphala-f).
b- : pi? ; lie may drink ’ (pibati).
-bh-: laha (labha-)» bhukkh (bubhuk?a), gadlia (gardablid)
I'or subsequent appearance oL’ bh- and dh- from b-fh, d-t-h see
^127), paih (prabhS), sfihna (§c>bhate), W P karha (karabha-).
§139. Initial nasals. Only n-, m- are found initially in P I.
In Ludhiani initial n- is invariab'y alveolar. So it is in many
IAVs. 1 In native scripts an initial n- is written with the dental
symbol while in other positions with the dental or cerebral. Be¬
fore a dental stop it is dental and is denoted by the dental sym¬
bol. The initial and intervocalic n seems to have become al¬
veolar at a very early date though its acconstic effect was dental
to some ears and cerebral to others. This is perhaps the reason
why we find Vararuci cnjoiniug cerehraiisation of every n
while in Jaina Pkts. the initial n appears as dental. To say that
the PF initial n remains unchanged in .Mod. I is wrong so i'or
as the actual pronunciation goes. Initial m- lias remained un¬
changed everywhere.
n-: nau (n&va, n&ma), natth'-na (nasL$-), nimm (nimba-)
narfia (nlrnga-).

(1) “1, n. though more usually alveolar, are sometimes

made dentally.” Panjabi Phonetic Reader p XIII.
“n. Ordinarily it is an alveolar sound; before t. d, it is some¬
what forward, before t, d it is ccrebralised, but accoustically it
h not noticeable ” Bengali Phonetics. Bulletine of the School of
Oriental Studies II. p. 6.
 61

in-: manja (mancaka-), missa (mi£r&-), muh fmukha-), mfit

(mtitra-,) mutth (must!-), mittl (mf'ttika)
§140. Intervocalic Nasals. The difference between the treat¬
ment of -n- and -n- according as they occnrred in the body of
the word or in the inflexional suffixes is found in Panjabi
also as in Or nj rati \ In the latter position tliey disappear after
giving their nasality to the previous vowel, but in the former
position they become alveolar n although in Gnnnukhl script are
often represented by cerebral n which is the proper treatment in
malwaf and mfijhi dialects, -m- was always split up into -tf- which
later on became -u- or -u- and together with the previous vowel
resulted in a diphthong or sometimes in a simple long vowel.
The diphthong or simple vowel thus produced lost its nasality in
the interior of a word but kept it when final. The cases where
-m- appears in place of P I -m- are due to a secondary change
of -v- -u• or even of -u- into -m- which as far as can be seen took
place before a iong vowel (a, 6).
The oniy exceptions are maus (am£vasya) and am! used as
personal name (amp'ta-), In the first word -m may have been
preserved through an early loss of a-, and the second word may
be a loan from MI.
(i) -p 'l preserved when occurring in the body of a word
-n- J although become alveolar:—
-n : phan (phani), surma (S|*i?6ti)t gioua (gapayati: cf.
gpn&ti ‘to announce’), rafiuak (man iky a), ba n"j (vanijya).
-» : unfi (uni ), Inin (adhanft), phaggaa (ph&lguna-), panl
(panlya-)j tan*na (Ulnayati).
(2) In inflexional suffixes, p-, -n- were lost, giving nasality to
the preceding vowel
{-akanfim >-ea-i
Now used as Oblique
-ikanam >-i&i plural.
-ukanam >-uS)

(1) Turner: §66.

 62

> -ifi) Now used as Direct pi.

Norn. pi. nent.-ani>«{;^i > u&/ in the Jeminine gender.
Nom. pi. neut. -Ini >1. Used in WP for Direct pi. in the
fern.
In EP. dahi Nom. Ace. pi. perhaps represents this change.
-in-: kaul (kimala-), aula (amala-), caur fcamara-); bhaur
(bhramara-), dauru (dimaru-), nau (nama), pau (pam£), than
(stb&ma), 13 (loma), dhoS (dhumd-), califs (#calyami), kard
(karami) and all other Present Ind. 1 Sing, forms.
Alter the secondary change of u, -m- appears for PI -in in
jamal WP jual (jamatp-), kamara WP. kuara (kumara-), kim§,
WP. kiv& cf. Guj. kem, (Pkt. *kimena! cf. imepa), jimS WP. jivS
(Pkt. ^jimena) cf. Guj. jam, iai. In the ordiuat numerals as
panjmS WP, paDjvS (pancamd-) etc. Before the close vowel I
however, the secondary change does not take place, e.y. sal
(svami-),rnl (r6ma-), bhOI (bhtimi-).
By spontaneous nasalisation, or through the influence of
another nasal this change has extended to cases where there
was no m- origin ally, e.g., pamS WP. pava (pada-> pau -f -a),
jomar, WP. juar ("yavakara-), daman WP. duan (Pers. dlwan).
§141. Initial y-, v-become j-,b- respectively. In W.P, how¬
ever, v- remains v and in some words y- afso appears as v-.
y-: jafi (y4va-), jot (ydktra-), j3 (y6.di), jana (ySfci), Relative
pronoun j5. jshya, jlh- (ya-); jaihna but WP yaihna also (y&bhati),
the derivative'from this root also appear with y- in WP. In
El y- is retained perhaps in the educated speech only in words
with y- borrowed from Persian e.g. yar, jar (Pers. yar-), ya. jft
(Pers. ya).
v-: bakkh WP. vakkli (vaksa-), bijj (vidyut), binga (vakrfi-)
bat (vartta).
§142. Intervocalic -y-,-v-. Excepting MI. -aya->e;the y-
between any other vowels disappeared. But when preceded by a
close vowel I, fi, U, a strongly fricative glide y developed before
 63

the original y and both became -yy- The whole group appears as
-iyy. -eyy-. uyy- in pali which later on became -ijj-, -ejj-, ujj in
Mail. & AMg. and are found at present in S and M. Where, how¬
ever, the y glide did not develop, the -y- disappeared as in
^aurasei I and Mg. and found so at present in Hindi. EP. belongs
to the latter group, but there are in it a lew words shewing jj-
which are perhaps loans from a dialect of the other group (cf.
Bloch § 105.)
-v- also has two developments. It disappears before vowels
other than a, but otherwise becomes u and with the previous
vowel forms a diphthong.
-y-: (i) for-aya-> 5 see ' $ 103.
(//) pear (priyakara-), gana or gaunii (gayati), karlda ‘be¬
ing done* (Pkt. #karlarp!a from karladi on the analogy ol' dlaip-
ta-: dladi, : PIa^i etc )•
(fit) dujja beside dua (dvittya-, Pkt. duiya #duijj, cf. AMg.
addhaijja-< ardha tptlya-), tljja beside tla (tftiya-, AMg. tipya
tavya-), bhamja, WP. bha?r*S (bliaginPya-).
daj (daya-) or perhaps from Pers. dad ‘ a gilt.’
-v-:(?) chail (chavi4-*illa-, jl (jlvA) Pkt. jlvO), del (d?vf),
beah (vivahA), WP parihga (parive§ayati) EP. parr.sna is a
loan from H.
(//) Saun (Havana-), deor (d^vara-), jiun (jfvana-), dhaula
(Pkt. dhavala-), jhiur (dhlvara ).
(Hi) nun, WP lun (lavana ), saluna (salavana-) go back to
Pkt. loija with a subsequent closing of the fi vowel.
^143. r, 1. For the separation of two dialect-groups in
which the IE *r, *1 both appear either as r only or as 1 only, see
Bloch § 139. They were confused into r in tlie West including
Iranian, and into 1 in the East (Mg ) The tendency to borrow

(1) y appearing in Native spoiling of the EP words or ol

Hindi words is a glide introduced to avoid hiatus.
 64

words from one into the other is very prevalent and is found
even in the Vedic Texts. This borrowing became so extensive
in course of time that in Sanskrit we ofteu find 1 where Vedic
had r, and sometimes r where Vedic had 1. Tn several cases,
doublets appear with r and 1 with or without difference in mean¬
ing. Panjabi on the whole agrees with Sanskrit as most other
IAV’s do with a few exceptions. Intervocalic -1- becomes -J- in
WP.
(i) r, 1 agree with Skt:—
r: rat (rStri-), rann (ran<Ja), rassl (raSmi-), russana,
(rusyatP), karna (k&rati), bissarna (vismarati), sauhra
(gv4§ura-).

1: lajj (lajjn), lippma (lipyate), llkli (llk?a), lflhji (lchi ),

seal (Sitakala-), pila (pitala-), phal (phila-), bal (vSla-).
(//) Skt. r > Panj. 1. Most of these words are found with
1 in Pkts. halhdl (haridra: Pkt. halidda), lajj (rijju-), las ‘rope’
(ra$mi-)? either loan from H. or borrowed from Pers. las ‘refuse
of silk*. In numerals 39—48, the change r > 1 is as old as MI.

(m) In a few words -ry- after short a became-11-in Pkt.

It is found so in Panj. and other IAVs (Bloch § 140—141).
palatna (paryasta-: Pkt. pallattai), palthl (paryasta-), pahlSg
(paryanka-), palan (paryana-).
(/?-) Skt. -dr- > Panj. -11- as found in Pkt. alia (ardrg,-: Pkt.
alia-), bhala (bhadrft), khulla (k$udr£- AMg. chulla-, culla-, cf.
Mar. culta).
(v) Skt. 1 > Panj. r : aber, saber (avela. savela) cf. Panj.
bella (vgla).
(vi) In one or two words Skt. 1 appears os n in Panj.
c.g. nua WV lu$ (lavapi-), nangh“na beside langh°na
(lahghate but cf. nankliati ‘to move’). The confusion between 1
and n is much more frequent in foreign words used in Panj., but
with spread of education it is dying out.-
 65

§144. Initial s- all become s-.

sang- (SankS), sau ($at&-), siuh (gapatha-) etr*.
s5l§ (stitfaga), sa^h (sasti-), chP ‘six* comes from such
form as *xsvaxs and not from $6§, cf. Gyp. Sov, Sina sa, Kg. 6ih,
Pers. saS. Mar. saha comes from Pkt. cha for in Mar. ch- > s-.
s-: satt (sapti-)i sa<J<JhP. (sardha-), sutta (supt&-) etc.
§145. Intervocalic -g-, -s- all become -h- and fall with
PI -h and MT -h- derived from PI aspirates. For tone-effects
of -h- see §§85-88.
-g-: seha (gag&), saneha (sandpga-), pSjah (pancagat),
pharha (p&ragu-), sauhrii (gv&gura-), k5h (kr6ga-).
mSh (m&$a-), haj-li (a$a<Jha-), karlh (k&tf$a-), toh
(tu?a-) tjh (tpsa), p5h (pau$a-).
-s-: sah (gvasa-), kapali (karpasa-), muhla (musala-), the
-s- of saptati in 69, 7L-78 > h which in 76-78 is optionally omit¬
ted.
There are a few exceptions to the general rules:--
(?) das (d&ga), is a loan from H. cf Lah, dah: II. EP dahal
‘tens'.
(it) In the nnmerals 79-88 we find -ss- < -g-, perhaps be¬
cause the -g- of is a descendant of an original consonant-
group. cf. a$^au 8, cf. Av astaiti 80.
(ill) For the disappearance of h <-g- in numerals see
Disaspiration (4).
(iv) -s- remains in si ‘was. were’ if derived from aslt
perhaps through an early loss of a-, or it is a loan from H. cf.
Lah. aha, ha.
§146. Initial h- becomes unvoiced in EP, while it remains
voiced in WP but is followed by a vowel in low tone especially
in the dialect of Wazirabad.
h.\ hatth, WP [fifAt:h] (hdsta-), hfS (hp'daya-), hal (hala-),
harap (harltakl).
 66

$147. Intervocalic -h- remains partly voiced but is often

under conditions at present unascertained, reduced to tone and
in WP almost always.
-h-; l5ha (lohi-), lalia (lablia-), bSh (bahu-), geha (griha),
saihna (s£hate).
Consonants in contact.
$ 148, Two or more consonants coming together without
the intervention of a vowel were assimilated. The process of
assimilation had been completed by the time of ASoka except
in a few groups containing a sibilant or r in some dialects. The
germs of the tendencies which resulted into this assimilation
are found in the observations of the PratiSakhyas regarding the
minute changes suffered in quality and quantity by a conson¬
ant on account of its happening to be in the vicinity of others.
These observations, though conflicting among themselves on
many points, clear the ground for explaining almost all changes
actually noticeable in MI or subsequent dialects. A number
of these differences must be held as dialectal for the changes
to which they could have given rise are also dialectal in MI.
$ 149. The following statements based on those of the
PrStilakhyas or on general principles of Phonetics have a use¬
ful bearing in explaining the development of PI consonant-
groups in Panjabi and other languages
(1)' In a group stop + stop preceded by a vowel, the first
stop was unexploded i. e. it consisted of on-glide and occlusion
only and lacked release or explosion—the characteristic of a
stop which marks it as a distinct sound1. Unless exploded a
stop is seldom recognised by the hearer though the speaker may
be conscious of its individuality on account of the special effort
made in its pronunciation. It is hence, natural that such stops
should have gradually lost their individuality and should have

(l) AV PratiS I 43, 44.

tfJTjsrcrcrT* m 11 wrsfaftrsrRs n «ai|
 6?
been assimilated to those following1. . .
§ 150. In groups stop +■ other consonant, the stop was not
unexploded2 because the next sound being more open' a partial
release took place which was enough to mark and preserve the
individuality of the stop. The stop, therefore did not suffer
assimilation to the following sound. But there are some appa¬
rent exceptions to it, viz. -ty-> -ce.-,-dl-> -11-, -dv-> -bb. aud -ts-
>-cch-. They are easy to explain if we consider the way in which
each separate sound was formed.
(i) -ty-> -cc- t was formed by closing the air passage
with the spread tip of the tongue at the teeth or their root*.
In pronouncing y the contact is made with (he two edges of the
middle of the tongue upon the palate", the central part remain¬
ing open to allow the air to escape through the narrow slit form¬
ed “by raising the front of the tongue so as nearly to touch
the hard palate’*.* c also had the same place of articulation as y.
It is not clear whether c was an affricate or a .simple stop in
the times of the Pratifiakhyas. Prof. Macdonell thinks they
(i.e., palatals c, and j) were affricate; but then Prof. Whitney
questions why they were not described as such by the Hindu
phoneticians and why they did not make a heavy syllable with
a preceding short vowel. The answer to these objections is
the fact that the stop element in them was of single length and
not double as in groups stop+consonant. For a similar reason
kh, ghetc., were described as single sounds not making heavy

(1) It is interesting to note that in Skt. no word begins

with an unexploded stop. The difficulty on the part of the hearer
in recognising an unexploded stop can be easily demonstrated by
nonsense dictation i.e, by dictating meaningless words to a
number of persons. It will be found that most of them will
fail to hear the unexploded stops correctly.
(2) Inference from A V PratiS I. 44.
(3) In nasals the explosion of the preceding stop found its
way through the nose.
' (4) A V PratiS. I 24, Tailt. PratiS. II 38.
(5) Taitt. PratiS II 40.
(6) D. Jones: English Phonetics $ 356
 68

syllables with a short vowel before them. From the above con¬
siderations it can be seen that it is easy for the tongue to go from
the position of t to that of y without exploding the former.
The t thus becoming unexploded lost its distinctiveness and
moved on towards the position of y till the whole resulted in
-cc-. The resulting sound is double after a vowel because in
that case t is double on account of its forming the first member
of the group t+y. This also explains why the resulting sound
was unvoiced and not voiced. The t being longer prevailed
over the fricative y in devoicing it. Similarly arose -jj- from
-dy-, -cch- from -thy- and -jjh- from dhy-.

(«) -dl- > -11-. The formation of 1 resembled that of d in

having a contact of the (ip of the tongue at the teeth, but differed
from it in as-much-as in its case the air escaped at the sides of
the tongue.1 2 The d being followed by the conlact for 1 at the same
place was, therefore,.unexploded, and 1 being a liquid and more
sonorous sound prevailed upon d in assimilating it.

(Hi) -ts->-cch-. A similar consideration as for-ty-will

explain this change also but with this difference that we might
have expected -ty- to result in a palatal -cc- ie. -ttj, and -ts in
a dental -cc -1 e. -tts which later on became palatal. Sir George
Grierson's conclusions about the different pronunciations of
palatals in MI and Mod. I. seem to have some bearing on this
point.*

Why -ts- resulted in an aspirated -cch- and ty in an un¬

aspirated -cc- seems to rest upon the sibilant in -ty- being not
so strong as in ts- because in the former case the spirant was
only the devoiced form of y while in the latter it was original.

(1) See Whitney’s remark on Taitt. Pratil. II 42. and

A V PratiS I 24.
(2) “The pronunciations of Prakrit Palatals." JRAS
1913 pp. 291-98.
 69

The strength of an original sibilant may be inferred from the

fact that it appreciably aspirated a preceding stop1 2 3.
The effect of a sibilant in aspirating the changed group can
be judged from an anonymous quotation in the commentary ou
the Atharva Veda PrathSakhya 1. 10 rendered thus by Whitney—
‘‘They (first mutes) are known as 'seconds’ when combined with
the qualities of jihvamuliya, $, s, s and upadhmanlya ” Here
one may also compare the Panjabi pronunciation of Persian and
English fricatives—unvoiced fricatives become voiceless aspirated
stops in Panjabi while the voiced fricatives appear as unaspirat¬
ed voiced stops.
One of the members of a consonant-group after a vowel in
PI was always double.8 This is the reason why the resulting
group in MI also is double between vowels; thus -k§- in PI was
-kks-and hence became MI -kkh-, Similarly IM-$k-=skk->
MI -kkh-, PI -sm = -smm->MI *-mmh- though represented by
-mil- in writing. The metre shows that -?h- -mil- in MI should be
pronounced, -nnh-, -mmh- respectively. It is only then that a
preceding short vowel could make a heavy syllable. Otherwise
the group -nh-, mh would simply be an aspirated gi, m. Sub¬
sequent development of MI nh into nh in WP analogous to $£>
n(n) also proves it. No doubt a single k, g followed by h fi
make an aspirated kh, gh. ft is for this reason that an initial
PI k§— >MI kh and not kkh-.
(tv) To account for -dv-> -bb-, we may assume that v was
closer here than elsewhere. Hence it first became b and then
assimilated d. of. Aiukan dbadasa for dvadaSa.*
$151. In other cases the double consonant of the group
assimilated the single one, thus -nd- > -nn- as attested by the
kharo?thi documents from Central Asia belonging to the first or

(1) Whitney on AV PratiS. II 6, Traitt. PratiS XIV 12-13.

(2) AV PratiS I 58, III 28, 30-32; Taitt. PratiS 1-7, 9-2S.
Whitney’s Skt. Grammar §$ 228-29.
(3) Girnar III 1, IV. 12.
 70
second century A.D., and the present pronunciation of many
dialects of the N.W. including Panjabi and Nepali, -ry- > -jj-,
-hy- > -jjh- for r and h were never doubled in groups (AV
Pratil 111 31).
In a group nasal+nasal the first is assimilated to the second
because the first was in a way unexploded as nasals also are
reckoned among stops.
The double consonants thus produced from PI consonant-
groups have remained double in Panjabi except (1) when falling
in an unaccented syllable, or (2) when final and preceded by a
long vowel. A group consisting of nasal -f consonant under .these
conditions lost its nasal, giving the nasality to the preceding
vowel.
$152. Stop+stop.
1. Homorganic groups remain unchanged except the voiced
aspirates which lose their aspiration and alter the pitch of the
neighbouring vowel (see $87).
.kk-: kukkar (kukkutA-), chikk (chikka), cikna (cikkaga-)
but cf. cikkar ‘mud’.
‘ -gg-: ghggal (guggulu-).
-cc-: uccirna (uccarati); uccarna (uccatati) but the (rans.
form uesnia points to #uccitati; khicri (khicca) cf. Guj. khlci;
.iinca but WP ucca (ucca-).
-cch-: kacchu (kacchapa-), guccha (guccha-), kacch ‘nickers'
(kaccha: kiksa), picch (piccha), puockafia (prcchiti) bachauna
(vicchadayati), WP pucch but Ludh. pach (puccha).
-jj-: lajj (lajja). lajj (rijju-), kajjal (kajjala-), sajja ‘right'
‘opposite to left' (sajja- ‘ready’), bhujjona (bhpjjiti).
tt-: halt (ha^a-), bhatt (bhatta-) cf. H. bhat; patti (pat$a-)
ku$tana (kuttayati),gh&ttana (ghattayati MBh. VI 2894 B).
dd-: ^dna besides upna (u44ayati), hadd (“hadda-).
-tt-: uttaraa (uttarati), tittar (tittiri-) latt (latta), m&tta
(matt*-), pitta (pitta-), citt (citti-), khittl (kr'ttika), bit[t]
(vitti-).
 ?1
-dd-: kndal (kuddala-).
-ddh-: siddha (siddha-), buddh (buddhi-), WP baddha
(baddha-).
*PP‘: P*PPal (pippala-), pipla mul (pippali-).
^153. 2. In Heterorganic groups the first stop is assimilated
to the second, and where one of the stops is a voiced aspirate the
resultant loses the aspiration with the usual tone-effect.
•tk-: chikka, chakka (satka-).
-tk-: ukkarna (utkirati), sakarna (satk-irayati).
-tkh : ukkharna Cntkhi^ti)/ ukkhal ‘imrtar' Cutkhala-)
cf. khAIa- ‘thrashing floor'.
-(Jg-: khagga ‘a fish’ leaf of ghlkuar which resembles sword-
blade (khatfga-).

-dg-: nggarna (udguratit, uggana (udgata-), ngamna

(udgamyate).
dgh-: ugghajma (udghatate), ngghfa] 'fame, famous’
(udgha- m. excellence, model; udghosa-?).
-kt: bhatta (bhakU-), sattQ (siktu-), motti (raauktika)-
ratt ‘blood' (rakta-).
-pt-: satt (sapti-), tatta (tapt*-). sutta (suptA-).
-kth-: satthal (sdkthi).
-bd-: sadda ($Abda-).
-gdh-: duddh (dugdhA ), daddhana (dagdhA-).
-bdh ; laddha (labdha-), jaddha (yabdha-).
-tp-: upajna (utpadyate), WP uppaj-na (utpatati, utpa*atif).
•tph-: upphanana (*ufcphanati).
-dbh-: ubbharna (udbharati).
§154. Stop |-Nasal. (1) In a group guttural fn or m, the
nasal is assimilated.

(1) Toe existence of a verb ‘khitati: khetati, perhaps

formed from krtta- 'cut’m the sense of ‘separating’'is proved by
‘'qnarre’l''™8 Panj' naBl"fnS ‘to separate,’ bakhfrl
 72

•kn-: mukkana (Plcf. mukka- <*raukna-; mukt-). Pischel

assumed *mukna ‘to explain' Pkt. mukka-($5u6)bul Bloch objects
to it (§94). Turner supports the former (Guj. Phon. § 76);
sakna (Saknoti or Sakyate).
-gn-: agg (agni-) bhugga ‘worn out' (bhugna-), nanga
(nagn& >nagga- AMg., naggak *naipga-), Ambala bhaggana
(bhagna-), laggana (lagna-or lagyati).
-km-: r5k‘cash money’ (raukma- ‘golden’) the only word
containing -km that appears in Pkts, is rukma- and all its deriva¬
tives show -pp-. Rukkin! occurs once in Jivananda’s edition of
Nagfinanda (Pischel § 277)
-gm : jug ‘pair’ (yugma-).
(2) In the group jn the j was assimilated; the resulting nn-
beoame n [n]- in EP. and -nj in WP.
janeaQ, WP. janju (yajnopavlti )
nal- perhaps goes back to rajani, WP Guj. Mar. rapl favours
this hypothesis.
an (ajna) Pkt aija is an instance of simplification of double
consonant with compensatory lengthening of the preceding vowel.
For rani and an e.f. Turner JRAS. 1924 p. 574. Sain (sipjnS);
Pa. sanna (cf. Pkt. sannu). >*sann>*sann > sain on account of
the following nasal. See § 30.
(3) -tn->-tt- H. Saut. (sapdtni but P. saukkan?) RattI “short
form of the personal name Ratan may be equally referred to
ritna or raktika.
-tn->kk?
(t) arak (aratnl). saukkan (sapatni)?
-dn->-nn- This change goes back to PI. cf, bhinni , chinnA-
anna etc. WP. runna P.P.P. of rfina ‘to weep’ may either point
to *rudna > *runna- or be a late analogical form.
(4) -tm >-pp-: ap (atm&), apna, WP appa (atmanah)
-dm-> bb-: pabban (padminl), pabb “forepart of the
sole of the foot" (padma ) t
 73

§155. Nasal +■ Stop, [n its treatment of the groups nasal

-f stop, Panj ibl ranks with the Nortk-YVeitarn languages, Sindh!
and Laandi, a id with some Pahari dialects as opposed to the
otner lAVs In it the unvoiced stops after the nasal are voiced
while the voiced ones are assimilated to the nasal. The result¬
ing vo.cjd aspirates, whether stops or nasal, bring about the
usual tone changes after losing their aspiration. That this
change is very old, in one dialect at least, is proved by its
occurrence in the kharotfhX documents from Central Asia (Bloch
J. As. 1312,1 p. 332ff). In Eastern Panjabi, however, -ng(h)-
-nj(h)- remain unchanged and in several other cases assimila¬
tion is avoided perhaps due to the influence of Hindi. For
disappearance of the nasal or its reduction to nasality of the
previous vowel se3 Na3iiiSitio:i and djamlisatioa §§1 LM9.
-nk-: ang (ankA), ahgur (ankura), kuhgu (kuakuma-),
nasang (niSSanka), sang (&nk£), kangan (kahkana) pihlSg
(palyahka-).
-nkh-: sangh (SaftkhA?), plgh (prshkk&), suhghana C£rh-
khati V. 0. J. VIII p. 35), uhghanl (uhkhati), H. soghna and
ughna point that the change is very early.
-ng-: uhgal (angoli), bhang (bhahg.h), sing (Spnga), rang
ranga-), canga (canga), ping'la (pangu-). In EP these words
are distinctly pronounced with ng whhe in WP hh is commoner
They are, however, spelt both ways in dictionaries.
-hgh-: jangh QAiigha), langh<fna (lahghate).
-he-: panj (p£hca), manja (mahea-); sinjma (sihc&ti) kunjl
(kuneika), kanj or kunj (kancu-), kunj (krunca), cunj (cahcu-).
Lah. vanj na, v&iha S. vah'nu (vdheati).
-heb-: hojhna (uhchati), pQjhna (prohehati) Pkt. puipchai,
H. p5chna, puchna).

-hj-: munj (muhja), anjan (ahjama-). pinjara (pahjara-),

pinjana beside pinnana ‘ to card cotton! (pihjayati ‘to kill’),
bkannana may be a contamination of bhanjati and bhinna-.
 74

• -njh-: sanjh (sandhy&: Pkt.saipjha shnjha), banjh (vandhya:-

Pkt. vaipjha, vanjha.)
-n\-: kan<jla (kto^aka-), ghand (ghanta-), bandana (vantate),-
cuntjana (cuntati).
• -nth*:- kantjlha (kanfhk-), sundh (Simfhi-), khundha
(kuntha-) • * -■ ~ *
n<J-: ganna (gaij^a-), kanna (k&ntja-), khan^a- (khandk-)>
pinn (pin<Ja-)» dann (dantji), mnnn[a]na (muntfayati) rann
(rapda), kunali, P.W. kunni (kiuulv). hunn (hunqla ). In several
words mostly from EP., -pd- remains nnchanged, c.g., anda, but
MuL annfi ‘eye-ball’ (arnji-), rincU (erantfa-), gand3a(gan<Jupada-),
ganda, kliantf pin^a, <Jand[a], munda, randi, kun<Ji, hund. Here
the last eight are doublets and the others maybe loaus from Hindi,
ndr-: pdnna beside ponda (paunqlra)
nt-:tand‘ (t&ntuj, dand (d&nta-) p&id W.P* puad
(padanta-), s5d in sukkh sad ($£nti-), masSd (masanta-) may
be a semi-tatsamu.
In the Preseut •. Active Participles and the III pi. Present
indicative, -nt- becomes -nd- which further becomes -d- in the
one and -n- in the other case, See §§ 117 and 156.
-ntr-: sd WP anda (antra.-), janda WP jandra (yantrd-), mand
WPmandar (mantra), madari or m&dari(mantrakara- or perhaps
Pers. ‘madar *N saintM-i), nedda, WP niundra (ni- mantra-)
WP mandri (mantrika-).
-nth : pandh p&nthah), kandh (kantha L.), madhani (man-
thana-). WP pandlil (panthika-). In granthi- and granthati the
th was cerebralised in Pkt. stage and consequently we have
Pauj....gand[h,. gandhana. .gatthanii (grath, granth) with
cerebralisation of th. . J. . ;. ... ..
-nd-: chann (chkndah), saneha (sande&a-).. WP nanan
(nananda) EP nanad must be a loan from Hindi, or it came from
nananda another form of ndnanda recorded by ilomer William.
This- change appears in the compound Words having nianda-
as their first' member, c.g. manakkha (mandak§a-), mahhehmfi
‘destitution-of milk’'(manda +' dhainava-), manrah biot roughened
 sic a grinding stone,* mantfiru 'not knowing how to.swim,1
mankhat^u ‘not earning anything*; also in mannd /. ill luck
(mandima n?.?), kunnan beside kundan ‘pure gold* (ktmda-) ?
-ndr-: cann beside cand (candr&), WP. canhS jhanhfi-
(candrabhaga).
-ndh-: annha (andh& ), bannh (bandh&-), kannha (skandhfc-),
innhan (indhana-). binnliana (vindh£te), rinnhana (*rindhati),
runnhana (*rundhati).
-ndhr-: gfihran (gudi -f randhra-).

-mp-: kamban.a (kampate), camba (campaka-), tumbana ‘to

stretch out cotton before carding it* (trumpati). WP limbana
(limpati). ...
-mph-: gumbha (gumpha-).
-mb-: ammi (ambS), lammS, lamba. (lamba-), nimm (trim-
ba-), saram (g&mba-), s^m (Saimbya-), kupam (kutumba-),
kSymS (kautumba-)', jammd (jambu-), kammal, kambal (kam-
baU-), WP palamna (pralambate). The forms appearing with
-mb- are confined to EP. :
-mbh-: kamhear (kumbhakara-), thammh (stambha-),
khammha (skamblrii-), ulammhS beside ulambha (upalambha-?)
rammbanri (rambhate).
$156. In some cases the Panj. group nasal + voiced stop
produced from the PI group nasal f unvoiced stop has under¬
gone a further change into a double nasal. This' is specially
true of PI mplh], e.g. kammana, fcummana, cairn'll, WP. lim-
mana, gummha besides 'forms with -mb[hl. Assimilation of
b- in mb coming in the same syllable is also common in other
languages eg. H. am (#amb-, “Sb) s«n; cf. Southern Englisli
pronunciation of lamb, land, comb: pond, limb: wind etc.

-nt- > *-nd- > * nn- > -n in the Present Indicative HI pi.
Thus karanti > karan, bharanti > bharan etc. In WP Present
participles also, thus Pkt, karaipta- > WP karna ‘doing*.
 76
$157. Nasal-f-Nasal. The first nasal is assimilated to tlie
second.
*mn-: W.P. nimmojhana (nimn£ fapadhyana ). This treat¬
ment differs from what we find in Pkt. (Pischel $ 278).
nm-: jamm (jiuma).
$158 Double nasals, like other double consonants have been
preserved except that nn-, -nn- become alveolar,
nn-: ann (£nna ), anaj (ann&dya-).
-mm-: da mm (dramma-).
$159. Nasal+Seml-vowel treated under y-, r-, 1-, v-gronps.
$160 Nasal-fSibilants. In its treatment of nasal-f-sibilant, also,
Panjabi ranks with the North-Western languages, i.e., it reduces
the sibilant to a voiced aspirated stop of the s xme c’ass a* the nasal
then losing the aspiration after producing the tone-effects. Unfor¬
tunately there are very fe.v examples to show the exact process
how the stop developed. The PratiSakhyas refer to a pronunci¬
ation in which a surd-top was inserted between a nasal and a
sibilant1. This may have been the course followed by the
ancestors of Panjabi, thus:—
-fig- > -nc$- > -nch- > Panj. -njh-
ns- > nts > nch- > Panj. -njh-
Or, perhaps, the sibilant was voiced as in snV and
later on became an aspirated stop. But that would have been con¬
trary to the Panj'ibl tmtTrmt of foreign fricatives whereby
Pers. x, Eng. 0. Pers. Eng. f appear as kh, th and ph, respec¬
tively; while Pers g Eng. 5, Pers. Eng z, v appear as g, d, j, b

(1) ^rrrr***: vprfrjtl AV Prat’s. IT 9 “After n, n and n

are inserted k. t and t before s and s.” st^»TT':||
AV Prat’S U 10. ‘Before, n becomes fi.” Ttj-?: **ir: :||
Taitt. Prat:$ V 32. “After n is inserted a k before s and s ”
II lb. V. 33 “After t or n is inserted a t
Whitney’s edition and translation.
(2) cf. the general tendency of Panjabi Pkt. to voice an un¬
voiced stop after a nasal consonant.
 n
(unaspirated). Following this Pers. [S] sometimes appears ss ch
especially in illitarate speech, but the normal change is s. If the
sibilant had been voiced it should have appeared as j, and not as
Jh;
ipS: banjh, WP vanjh “pole for propelling a boat” (va:p$£-)
b5s‘bamboo* is a loan from Hindi, sanjhl, sSjh (saip^a) cf. siljLa
sSzhu ‘half of land produce’.
The numerals bib, tlh, come from Pkt. visa*, tlsai and uot
from Skt. viipSati. triipS&fc.
dassana is from daSyati, and dang ‘bite’ from 4dakna>
AMg . (Jakka- > * <Jamka. cf. U. k, (Jahk.
kpssu (kaiip^uka) is a loanword.
-ijiS-: pfona comes from Pkt. plsa^ rather than Skt piipsati.
cf. §'pi\ pez'uki.
•ips : kSssI, W P. kal’aa (kaipsi-: knipsya-) seems to be a
late borrowing with -s- > -h-. Sindhi hanju (haipsl). Panj>
hans is a loan, hass‘collar-bone,* bat Sindhi hauja, “the part
ab ive the hip-bone on which infants sit in being carried" (&ipsa)
mas (maipik) is a tatsama, cf.Sindhi misu,mS3U, mss,
Genitive maz&i.
M I -ips- injhu, WP. hijh, Sindhi hanja §:na Ssa (hSru-Pkt.
aipsu) khangh (kasa Pkt. klinsa Pisch. §206, * khassa- "khaipsa)
cf. II khSsi. khunjhana to be missed (kusniti, Pkt.kussai
khussau* khurpia ) cf. II. v. khfana m&ih, W P majjh, manjh
(miiifil) * mhiipVi ) cf. II. bh§,:s. 13. P. mhais is a contamination
%

of mSih and bb&!s.

cunghana H cOghna cf. chsnft, Pajas cflkh (Vcu§:- VcucOs
Pkt. cusaT cussat # cuijm7; or from cuksati > • cumkhati).
A short vowel before the group nasal+sibiiant is more
favourable for this peculiar change than a long vowel.
§ 161. Groups with y.
(1) y always occurs as the last member of a consonant-
group1 when a stop except a dental precedes the y is assimi-
(1) Monier-William’s Dictionary records only one word
STriJrlY yvigull in which y occurs as the first member of a com
* > u nt group.
 78

lated with the usual tone results if the stop is a voiced as¬
pirate.
-ky-: manak (manikya:) , chikka (Sikya-) cf. (iuj. Siku
sakna (Sakyati or SaknQti), sak ‘relation’ * (svakya-).
•khy-: pakhana (prakhyana-), W P. akhan, akhaun (akhySna-)
akhya-pana-).
-gy-: bhag (bhagya-), suhag (saubhagya-), laggana (lagy-
ati), barag ‘feeling homesick, said of children’ (vairagya-). 1
, -cy-: pacnfi (pacyate)’, rucna (rucyate), cuna (cyuti-),
bacnfi, cf. WP. vacauna (vacy&te.)
•jy-: JtyXi (JySstha ). raj (rajya-), banaj (vapijya-), bhaj
jana (bhajyate), bhujjana (bhpjyate).
-ty : phatna (*sphatyati: sphatate), gliattana (*ghatyate:-
ghattate: ghatate), tuttana (trutyati).
dy-:. PowadhI jadd^i (jadya ).
-py-: tapna (tapyate), lippana (lipyate), ruppa (rupya ),
mappa (mapya).
•bhy : labbbana (labhyate).
(2) In a group dental stop+y, the y palatalises the stop
before being assimilated.
-ty-: sacc (saty£-), naccana (nrtyati), bacc WP vacc
(ipatya-),
-dy-: ajj lady*-), khajja (khadya-), bijj (vidyut), jua
(dyuti) chijjana (chidyate), bajja • (vadya-), pasljjana
(prasvidyate) upajna (utpadyate).
-dhy-: gijjhana fgrdhyati), bujjhana (budhyati), sujjhana
(gudhyati), sijjhana (sfdhyati), rijjhana (rdhyati), majjha
(madhyk ). cf. -ndhy- njh: sanjh (sandhyS), banjh (vandhya).
(3) ny- becomes nn- but the examples are not certain.
punn (punya-, kan /. (*kanya-: kani ).

• • (1) For shortening the donble consonant after a short vowel

in the roots pac, rue, sak phat, tap and in a number of bthef
words,, see $121 (6).- . * “ . " “ '
 79:

(4) The treatment of n-fy is not quite definite.. In some

words the y is assimilated and in others it becomes j. TFe
former seems to be the proper development in E.P.
sunnii, \VP. strnja (Sunyi ); jann, WP janj (j&nya) cf. Mar.,
janavsa (jdnya+vasa ); kannea t«.t WP Kanj (kanyS.) dhan
WP- dhal, perhaps, for dhah ..^dhanj (dhany£-); mannan,
(m£nyate), neara (anyakara-?). [M] anj (anya-).
(5) In m-fy: the -y is assimilated-
uggamna- (udgamyate), ghummana • (HD ghummai:
*gkumyai).
(6) In l4y, the y is assimilated but in many cases the result¬
ing -11- seems to have been aspirated at some stage, probably
before ApabhraipSa, for we find its traces in several languages
at present. For Marathi see Bloch §148.
Kallh, H. kalh (kalya ), pahl&g (palyanka-) etc. For further
examples and exceptions see §§ 128-29.
(7) In v+y, the y was assimilated and the ' resulting w be¬
came bb in EP, but remained w in WP. Sindlii treats this group
differently in the initial position from the interior one.
bagh (vyaghr&-), sarbah, sirbah (Panj. sir+Skt. vyfidhi-).a-
(8) In sibilant+y, the y is assimilated and the resulting
ss fall together with ss.
-$y-:nassana (naSyati)', dissana (dr^yate), saulii (gyamala-).
-sy-: russana (rusyate), tussana (tusyati). • * • •
-sy-: sala (syfiU-), hassa (hasya-), hasna (hasyate) or per¬
haps a loan from Hindi but the latter goes back to Pkt. *haipsai-
filas (filasya ), kSssi (kaipsya ). * - • • - - •_
(9) In ry, hy, the r and li are assimilated because they are
neVer doubled in a group (see § 151).' Tl>e resulting yy becomes
jj but in the case of hy it is aspirated for h, also, like &, $, s,
when assimilated, aspirates the resulting double consonant.
ry-: kaj (kfiryh, ), WP pujjana (puryate) EPpugganii may
be an analogical formation after bhajj Ambala bKaggbhijj:
Ambala bliigg. ~ V1 " ‘ ~ V- 7 - •**- . -
 80

-hy-: gujjha (gubya-). bajjh3 (bahyat&h), bOjh (#uhya-

:Pkt. vojjha ), dajh (*dahya-). WPdajjh°na (dahyate).
§162. Groups with r. Ia EP all groups containing r assimi
late the r to its neighbouring consonant, and when it precedes
a dental stop it often has the cerebraUsing effect besides assimi¬
lation. In WP which has a greater aflin.ty to North-Western
dialects, the group consonant 4-r behaves differently from the
group r 4-consonant. This difference of treatment was much
more prominent in ASoka’s time as shown by a comparison of the
Shahabazgarhi, mansehra and Girnar versions with those of
Kalsi, Dhauli and Jaugada. Tile group consonant + r was
preserved while the group r 4- consonant shifted its r to the
initial consouant, doubling at the same time the consonant left
single, or transpose l its place with its own number so that the
result in either case was a group consonant 4-r; thus we get
dharma- > dhram(m)a-, sarva->, savra *. In WP. (also in Lah-
ndi and Sindlii), the groups consonant -fr, especiaily dental stops
4- r have remained unclianged, and the groups r 4- consonant in
words beginning with a dental stop have shifted the r to the dental
stop after doubling the other member. This latter tendency of
shifting r is noticeable to some extent in Prithiraj Rasau of Caud.1 2
Consonant 4- r: -
. kr: koh, 3. kdhu (kr6$a-) kol, S. koli (krogl?,) cakk (cakr&-)
cukka (cukra-). suk (sukrk) recorded by Maya Singh must be a
loan from Hindi or quoted from the Adi Granth.
gr: ga^thana (grathn&ti) geha (grkha), agga (igra-), jagna
(jagrati). graihn ‘eclipse’ is a ts. gas ‘mouthful’ is a loan from
Hindi, grah is a loan from WP; gras usually used in gau gras
‘portion of bread set apart for cows’ is a ts. grau or grs ‘village’
is a loan from WP the common word in EP being pind.

(1) Michelson; JAOS Vol. 30, 31.

Hultzsch: Anoka’s Inscriptions—Grammatical Sketch.
(2) dhram(m)a- for dharma in the passage quoted by
frames in his Grammar. I p. 15.
 R1

ghr: bagh (vyaghri-). •' • • • •••

jr: bajj ‘calamity’ (vijra-). -
dhr: mltfdha (me^hra-)* • •
tr: tahna, WP trahna (trasayati), tsrnfi WP trorna (trotayati)
got, WP gottar (gOtrfi), citta WP cittra (citraka-,) cittanri, WP
cittarna (citrayati), Cet, WP cettar (caitra), duhta WP dohtra
(dauhitra-), pottfi WP pctra (pkutra-,) putt WP puttar
(putrk-), patt, WP pattar (patri-), sut WP suttar (stitra-),
datti WP datrl (ditra-), tinn WP trai (trtni, Pkt tinpi),
(trayah-). Guj. tran may be (Contamination for the two;
r after a dental stop does not cause cerebralisation. In
tuttana it is due to the following tt cf. WP. truttana. Similar
may be the case with tattb WP. tratti, In citta ‘white’ (citri )
the form with a cerebral is perhaps chosen as a loan from some
other dialect to distinguish it from citta ‘leopard.’
-ntr-: Sd, WP fmdar (antri) etc. See § 112 (c).
dr: damm (dramma), dakh (draksa), chidda WP chidra
chidri-), dadd WP daddar (dadru-), nld WP nlndar (nidra).
In dahna, if from draghat-e, dr lias become d. For -ndr-, -ndhr-
see § 15.
dhr: giddh (gr'dhra-); baddhari beside baddhi (virdhra-)
and sidhra in‘sidhra pudhra’‘simple’ (sidhri-) are loans from
WP.
pr: pauh (prabhS), pshan (pravahana-), pinna (pra-
payati)'.
br: bahman (brihmana-), kubba (’kubra-: kubhri) cf.
Guj. kub<Jti.
bhr: bhai WP bhra (bhrita), bhaur (bhramara-), bh&u
(bhru- cf. Pkt. bhumaga, bhamaya Pischel § 124), bhatth
(bhri?tra-), bhiuna (bhramati).
• mr: makkhan (mraksana-). When mr occurs in an internal
syllable, a b develops between m and r, and the whole'group
 82

appears as -ipb in Plct. (Pisck. §*215), amb (amra-*, tamba WP

tramba, tramma (tamrd-). tamra (tamra+pa|a-?)
Sr: saun (Sravanv), missa (m:$:d-)» WP mass (SmdSru),
sass (SvaSrft ), cauras (caturaSra-)* For aSru->anjh, injh. see
under -ips §160.
§163. r+consonant:
•rk.: akk (ar^d), kakkar (karkara-), takkana (tarkayate),
takkaln WP trakkala (tarku ), makkar (markdta ), sakkar
(firkara). Tn WP trakkarl in opposition to EP takkarl, the r
after t is dne to shift if the word is connected with the root \/tark.
WP srakk (but EP sakk) points to *Sarka- rather thar. sdlka .
-rg-: bagg (vdrga -), magghar (marga&ra-), cauggana
(oaturgunv) glggar (gargarl).
rgh : m&ihgli (mahargha-), ghaggara (gharghara ), Lah.
aggh (argha-).
-rc-: kucc (kurcd-)
-rj: gajjana (garjati), gujjar (gurjard), khajur (kharjtir-)
gajjar (garjara-).
-rp : kann (kdrpa-), panna 'leaf’ (parpd ), unn (brna),
cunna (c&rna), punned (pfirnima), siuna seona (suvdrna*;
sauvarpa-).
-rt, -rth-, -rd-, -rdh-, see under Cerebralisation § 169
-rp-: sapp (sarpd ), kapah (karpasa ), khappar (karpara-),
tappap, Lah. trappaj* (L.S.I VIII1 p. 326) (tdlpa- connected with
Vtpp MW.: "tarpa ); tappana, Poth. trappapa(*tarpati: tppyati).
rb-: kabra (karbara-)-
•rbh : gabbha (gdrbha-), cibbhar (clrbhata), dabbh Mol.
drabbh (darbhd )
-rm : kamm (kdrma), camm (cdrma), kaman (karmapa),
nimmal (nirmala-), WP. kummS (khrmd-).
-ry-: Dealt with under y-groups.
-rl-: dulld ‘bridegroom’. H. dulha, Guj. dulu (durlabha ?)
-rv-: cabbana (carvati), caubl W? cabvi (cdturviipSati-),
khabba (kharva-?)
 83

-r£-: dassana (dar^ayati), passa (parSvi-), passall fpar^u-)

-rs-: ghassa (gharsa-), khassana (karsati), WP vas3apa
(varsati). baras. sarho, arsl etc see under svarabhakti.
§164. Groups with 1.
(1) In groups 14-stop or m, 1 is assimilated
-lk-: bakk (valk*-), sakk (g&lka-).
-lg-: guggal (glilgulu-), phaggan (philgaua-), baggfi
(valgii-). bag, WP viig (valga) perhaps a loan on account of
-lp-: tappar (t&lpv?), WP kappapa (kalpayati).
-lb-: subb (gulba-) MW records Sulva also but -Iv- > -11-.
-lm ; gummS (gdlma ).
(2) • In groups 1-f-y, y is assimilated with frequent aspiration.
See § 12S.
(3) In groups 1-t-v, dfl, and r+1, the 1 assimilates the other
member.
-Iv-: bil, bill in Maya Singh's Dictionary, (bilva-).
-dl-: bhgla (bhadri-: #bhadla-) alia (ardri : *ardla-), khulla
‘low, base’ (ksudr£ : ‘'ksudla-), Jn J. Pkt. chulla- culla- Pischel
§ 325)..
-rl-: dulla (durlabha-).
(4) -11-: pallii (pallava-), challl ‘maize-ear* (challi-). See
ul§o.-ly- § 128.
§ 165. Groups with v.
(1) When coming after a guttural, palatal or cerebral
stop, v is assimilated to the stop.
-kv-: kafhna (kvathati), pakka (pakva-)
-jv-: jalna (jvalati).
-tv-: khatt (khatva).
(2) Dental stop -f v had three developments in Ml, viz.
double dental, labial or palatal stops. (Pischel §§ 298-300). In
Panjabi all the three have their traces, but it is difficult to say
which was proper to it. For mara^hl, sen Bloch § 130.
 84

-ty- > -tt-: -ttan (-tvana.) as in kurattan'bitterness’, pal-

aUan Mellowness’, -t (-tva-) as in mitthat ‘sweetness’, sat
(satva-) may be a loan.
-tv- > -pp-: -[p]pan, -pana (-tvana-) as in kaurapan, lucca-
pana etc.
WP suhappan. -p (-tva-) Wp suhnapp ‘beauty’, '
‘ -ppa (-tva-) as in bu<Jhpppa ‘old age’.
-dv-> -dd-: do (dvau) and its derivatives dujja, duggana
etc. They can, also, be explained as coming from duvau * duv-
ete. cf. Pkt. du- in compounds. Lat. duo.
-dv- > -bb-: bfira (dv&da£a) aud other numerals 22, 32, 42
etc. beSr (dvi -l-varaka- ‘cloth’), bir (dvara-), cf. Guj. blja. Mul.
bea ‘second’.
-dhv->-ddh : dhattha (dhvasti-: *dhvasta). In Panjabi dh was
cerebralised on account of the second cerebral.
-dhv-> bbh-:. WP ubbha (urdhva-)
-dhv->-jjh-: jhanda (dhvaja+danda Mar- jheipd*
jhankar (dhvani-) if not purely onomatopoeic.
The group -dv-res lilting from ud- followed by a word begin¬
ning with v- became -vv- in Pkts(Pischel § 298), and consequently
bb in EP, and vv in WP.
ba^na, WP vatpa (udvartana-) cf. H. uba$na, Sindhi utanu.
(3) In groups v-fy, r+v, and I-fv, y, r and v are assimilated.
See § (9),161 (7), (9) $ 164 (3).
(4) Tn groups sibilant-f-v, v is assimilated.
-§v-: sauhra (SyaSura-), sass ($vk£rl!i-), siih (Svasa-), basah
(viSvasa-), assu (aSvina-), passfi (piirSvk-).
-sv-:massi (matr?vasrka).
-sv-: pasijjana (prasvidyate) sikl (svaka-:* svakya-) sak
(*svakya) a nr U\: cf. saka, H. saga, (svaka-). - --
(5) hv- becomes -bbh-Vjibb, potb. jibbh. (jihv^. "
§166. Groups with a sibilant. Sibilant+stop.
 (1) In groups sibilant-hstop, the sibilant appears as aspiration
of the stop, the latter being doubled for which see § 150 (3)
-$c-: tircha itiraScfc), bicchfi (vr'Scika-i, picchfi (pa$ca),
pacchS (palcima-).
-si-: bikkharna, bakhprna (vi$kirati>, sukka ‘dry* but sukkha ‘a
particular plant’ Suska-), poikhar (pauskara-).
t>\-: atth (astau-), n&tthana (nastd-), mutth (must!-),
mittha (inisfca-), riftha (arista-), pitthi (pi$ta-).
str-: utth, ?H[h] (u's^ra-), bhatth (bluest ra-), WP. ot-thfi
(aust-ra-).
-sth-: kottha (k6$tha-), kath fkasthu-), jeth (jysstha-),
seth ^r6stha-)j guttha iahgii§tha:-».
-sp-:bhaph- (vaspa-).
sk-: khammhS (skambha-), bakkhar (upaskara-), bakharri
(vakaskara-?).
-st-: than (stana-), thammha (stainbha-), thofa (stoka), hatth
(hasta-), mattha (mastaka-), patthar (prastara ), natth (nasta)
atthamna (asta -?)
-sth-: thall (sthali), thah (slhagha-), than! (sthina-).
sp-: phaha (spaia-).
-sph-: phuttana (spliutyate), phorna (sphotayati).
-(2) In a group consisting of the final sibilant of a preposition
and the initial stop of the following word, aspiration does not
take place.
nacorna (ni$cotate), nicla (nigcala-).
-s-fk-: nikkalna (niskalati : ni?kalana- ‘driving out’ Gobh.),
-nakamma (niskarma-), c&uk (catuska-).
-s + p-: naputta (nisputra-), cauppar(catu$pata ), Guj. copan
(catuspahcaSat).
-s+k-:nakk (nas+ka-)?
-s-ht-: nittama but H. nitharna (nistarati), caunti WP.
cautti (catustriipSat).
^167. Stop-r sibilant.
(1) ks become k(k)h. ..
khar (ksara-), khir (ksird-), khoh (ksudha), akkh (ak?i,
ikkli (ikfcu) kakkh (k&ksa-), kukkh (kuksl-).
 j: 86
makkhi (maksika), pakkh (pak?a-)> sikkh (6iksa), takhan
(taksa$am cl. acc. of taksan)
The words where ks appears as c(c)h are early loans from
a ch dialect and appear with ch in other IAVs( Turner §89)? e. g.
ricch, H. Or, rich, Mar. ris V ch>s(rksa-), kac3h-(kaksa, kaccha),
chura, with ch in others (ksura-: clmrika), taccha beside takhan
(tkksati), macchar beside makkhi (maksa cf. AMg, macchiya),
char beside khar (ksara-)
For tikkha (tiksna-) see Turner § 89. tinnhana ‘to prick, pr.
would be a doublet from the same if it does uot come from the
root Vtfh cf. tj*n$<Jhu : ^tjmdhati.
(2) t or p-hs become c(c)h.
-ts-bacclia (vatsa-), macch (matsya-) ussarna (utsarati)
goes back to Pkt. Guj. ucharvd may come from ucchalati. cf.
nittarna (nistarati) for the different treatment of ts or st when
one member belongs to the root and other to the preposition.

-ps-: accharS (apsar&) guccha (gucclia-: gppsa-).

(3) ?n and sn appear as nh- or n if there be another s, h in
the word.
tis (tj*?na) may be a ts. from trSfi, or cf. tysyavat RV vii,
103', 3.
-$p-: WPunhala, hunala (uspakala-)
“sn”:nhauna (sn£ti),neh (sneha ),nha (snusS).
(4) -sm-: sm- appear as -ss- (Turner § 55).
-Sm-: rassi (rasmi ), Initially 6m- > m-: mass beside mucch
(6ma6ru-), masan (6ma6ana) is a loan because of -s-.
-$m-: tusi (*tusme), kossa (#ko$m&), WP hussar (usrna-)
•sm-: as! (asm$), bhass (bhasma) bissarna (vismarati).
This treatment is peculiar to the North-Western Languages
cf, ka$ir, K6 word for Kashmir (ka$mfra-). • Ludh. amhattaj* ‘we
and others’; tumhattar ‘you and others’ are loans from H. They
have not been recorded by Maya Singh. . — -.
(5) Sibilant + y, r, v, and r 4- sibilant have already been
treated under y-, r-, v- groups.
 87

(6) Double sibilants become -ss-, or s-in nnaccenled syllables.1

nasang (niSSahka-).
-ss-: nissarna (nissarati).
§168. Groups with h.
-hm- > -mh : bahman (br&hmapa-), here mh has again been
transcribed as hm to denote the tone. It can also be written
bamhan.
Other h- groups treated under three of their other members.
Cerebralisation.2
§169. The subject of cerebralisation has been dealt with by
Dr. Bloch and Prof. Turner with respect to Marathi and Sindh?
respectively. The latter concludes that the phenomenon of
cerebralisation was of a dialectal character, and that it was the
result not of a single change, but of different changes which
formed a number of different isoglosses (p. 557).
Examining the cases where r and r, the chief cerebralising
agents could have exerted their influence, we may say that
Panjabi is a non cerebralising dialect. The words where
cerebrals appear in place of PI dentals must be held as loans
from some ancient cerebralising dialect because they are found
with cerebrals in most of the other non-cerebralising cognate
languages also.
§170. Examples of Panjabi words containing:—
(?) PI dentals preceded at a distance by r. Here the
dentals remained dental which subsequently disappeared. If
they had become cerebral they should have appeared as r, rh,
(i.e.y r with a tone on vowels), bhai (bhrlttr-), marea (marita ),
r5n (rodana ), paihlla (prathiUa-, c.f. prathama-).

(1) A few cases of a secondary change of MI -ss- > -s- > h

are found e. g., dihna dissana (dr$yate, Pkt. dissav, disaf).
s>h is yet a living tendency. See Dr. Bailey’s note JR AS. 1926.
2. Bloch §§108—109. Turner: Cerebralisation in Sindhi
JEAH 1924 j)p. 555-84. For cerebralisation in Vedic and
Sanskrit see Wacker-nagel i. pp. 167 ff.
 88

For gatth(i), gandh(i), parh, paraus(s)I, see Turner

pp. 560—61.
(ii) PI dentals preceded immediately by r. These remained
dental which, if single, disappeared later.
ghe5 (ghrtS,-), h!5 (hrdaya), khitti (krttika) moea cf.'
H. mua (mrti ), pohllO (prthula-), tijja, tiu (trttya ), klttii
(kr(6 the -t- being doub'ed, or -tt- being added by the influence
of sutta, tatta etc.), buddha H. burha, S. budho commonly
derived from vrddhi- should be referred to brdha- where the
-dh- has been doubled on the aualogy of Pkt. daddha. Pa*
vuddha- beside buddha- and vaddha- may be due to contamina¬
tion of vrddhi- and brdha- mitti (mrttika) is found with
cerebral in all except Mar. matl.
(if*) r-fdental. The dental reranms dental.
-rt-: All Panjabi words containing PI -rt- are connected
with the roots kartati ‘to cut’ and krnatti ‘to spin’, and v&rtate
‘to be’ and ‘to roll.’ Where doublets appear, one lias the dental
and the other the cerebral to keep distinction of meaning. Thus
kattana ‘to spin’, kattana ‘to cut’; bat ‘thing, matter’ (vartta),
bat‘road’ (v&rtma-; vartih n.). For details see Turner p. 562).
mrttika > P. mitti H. ma^ti, ma$i M. mati, Dog. mitti dental,
-rth-: sath (sartha), satthi (sarthika-), cauttha (caturtha-)
-rd-: gadha (gardabhS-), kuddana (kurdati), caudS
(c&turdafo), baddal (vardala ), bahld (baliv&rda-), paddana
(pardati).
-rdr-: Vadda (ardr4-), alia (*ardla-), kauddi (kapardikfi),
-rdl-: Jchadd°na (chardati) are found with cerebrals in
other languages also, daddu (dardura-) is doubtful on account
of the loss of -ra-.
-rdh-: addh (ardhi-), badhna (vardhate), pacadh (pa^car-
dha-) puadh (purvardha ). The roots vardhate ‘to increase’
and vardhati ‘to cut’ nave resulted in doublets in Panjabi, thus
badhna ‘to increase’; bacl^hana ‘to cut’.- In mud<Jh (murdhS)
the cerebral appears elsewhere also.
 89

(iu) Dental+r. Tliey remain dental after assimilation.

•tr-: got (gotri ), putt (patri-), etc. For further examples
see §162. Only citta, ‘white’ (citri ) appears with cerebral
perhaps to distinguish it from citta ‘leopard*.
-dr-: chidda (chidr&-) etc. See §162. dahna *to lay down*
(draghate), dunna, if from drona-, may be loans. For anda,
dan<Ja etc. see Turner p. 566.
-dhr-: giddh (grdhra-), baddhi (v&rdhra-).
(v) The cases where PI dentals uninfluenced by the
vicinity of r, r appear as cerebrals in Panjabi are common to all
other languages except paina (patati) where cerebral is shown
in Prakrit, Hindi, Gujrati etc. The following may also be noted:
nacCfna (niScotate), junta (yuta-), bahsra (vibhltaka-), harar
(haritakl-).
Iu the last three words the f may be a suffix.
(vi) “1**, n in all positions have become alveolar in EP.
§171. Mention however may be made of the tendency to
cerebralise a dental stop occurring in the vicinity of another
cerebral stop. This tendency is found in Hindi, Gnjrati
(Turner §44), in Sindhl (Turner p. 570) and in Marathi
(Bloch §119).
tutt-, WP trutt-, H. G. tut- (trutyati), tutth“na
(tu$ta-), dutfdha, duj.h (Pkt. diva<j<jha-), tadd“na (tardati),
(Jancjia (dan<j6-), (dardura-), <jiflt (dipa+varti-), (JahnuJI
(dadhibhaucja-), tbathcra (tv6st?-), d^ddha (dardhya), thaujha
but Mar. thanda (stabdha), dhattha (dhvasta-: *dhva$ta),
dbith (dhp$ta-), WP d*ttha (drsta-); t^ddha, H. tepba
but WP treddba; tatt* but WP trait*, but EP tur, WP tur
(turati); dar (darati) thera (sthavira), d?r: d^r, d^rl (dfiraka).
In the presence of f the dental remains, thus tCy, dhaj*,
dafhl, Guj. id. but H. dafhl.
thatt* 38.
thittar 78.
tbadd 3rd Eng. third > thadd-
£SQSIV 2
 90

Svarabhakti.

§172. Examples of svarabhakti are fairly common in Prakrits

(Pischel §§ 131-40) whore they probably represent tatsamas or
late borrowings from Sanskrit after the tendency for assimila¬
tion had died out. Mediaeval and Modern languages contain even
a greater number of examples of svarabhakti in tatsama words.

A few cases of svarabhakti are noticeable in Panjabi which

in other respects seem to be tadbhavas, e.g., sarahna, WP salahna,
in^ rapid speech srali-, slah- (#$raghate: flaghati?, cf., VSratffT
Vtiath). Other words like gJrafi, WP gir5 or g°rS, (gr&ma )f
bharn, WP id., L. bhira (bhrita), g«*rah, WP id., L. girah (grasa-)
are loans from a Western dialect (probably WP). EP gas
(grasa ) is a loan from Hindi.

§173. The Panj. prefix pay- meaning ‘secondary 9 as in

paj-bal (•pravala-), pardand Cpradanta-), parchatti ( prachatti-),
or ‘one degree further removed’ as in pajrOtta (prapautra-),
paynanna, paydadda etc., is rather difficult to explain. It may
perhaps be better connected with prati-. If it is really a case of
svaiabhakti from pra-, then why does r change to j*!

§174. In the following words, svarabhakti goes to Prakrit:_

barb-, barha, WP varh- beside vass-, varha (varsati, vars£„ cf.
AMg. varisa-), sarhtf (sarsapa-, cf. AMg. sarisava-). bar*s ‘year-
to rain ? and arsl (adarSa,, Pkt. arisa-) are loans from Hindi on
account of the preservation of -s-.

Insertion of Plosives.

§175. It sometimes happens that between the nasal norm

and the following r or 1, a voiced plosive of the same class as
the nasal, is inserted. A few cases of this kind are found in
Panjabi.

-nar->-ndar-: bandar (varara-), pand-rfi (I>kt. pannarasa-)

basantar ‘fire’ perhaps throngh 'basandar (viSvSnara- cf.’
 91

vaiSrandara- found in the Siyadoni inscription of the 10th

century A.D., Z.D.M.G. Vol. 47 p. 576). The change -nd->-nt-
inay have been due to the influence of basant (vasanta-) is.

The tendency is found in later borrowings, e.g.t hundar,

hudar beside hunar (Pers. hunar).

-mr->#-mbr->-mb-: This change is found in Pkt. also ef. Pis-

chel §295. amb (amra-, Pkt. aipba-), tamba (tamrA-, Pkt. taipba ,
Alokan taipbapapni); fl. bSbl or bambl (vamrl, cf. vahnlka).
Panj. barmi may be a tatsama with metathesis. Ainbarsar
whether connected with Amar ‘ the third Sikh Guru or with
am rat, amart, ammart1 nectar 9 (am’rta-) ts.

Recently the change has taken place in Persian loan-words

t.g. amblr, Sblr or amir (Pers. amir).

-ml- > Pkt. -mbil- > -mbl- or -ml-: imbll or imlf (amlika)
cf. J. Pkt. -aipba , aipbila- from amla Pischel § 295.

In tatsamas a plos’ve is inserted between anusvUrn and h;

t.g. sihgh (siipbi ).

Insertion of r.

§176. The N. W. languages Sina, Kashmiri, SindhI, Lahndi

and Western Panjabi have preserved some consonant-groups
in which r formed the second member, e.g., $. kriu, K. kruh, S.
krOhu, L, WP krch (kr6$a-). In the following words r is in¬
serted erroneously perhaps on the analogy of the preserved
groups. Some of these words are found in EP and Hindi aiso.
Thus k«r5r m- * ten million ’ but k5pl f. ‘score’ (ko$i-), sarap ts.
(Japa-), karmantjal ts. (kamandalu ). k°rcp ts. (kopa ) perhaps
on the analogy of k’rodh; WP trikkha (tlksna), WP tarkhap
(tak$ana-), WP methra, WP srakk (*$arka : $&lka ), WP traftl,
WP trp] etc. Their EP equivalents have no r. In srakk and
trattl, the r may be due to anticipation owing to a group t+
consonant occurring in a following syllable for which see § 162.

/
 92

Doubling of PI intervocalic stops.

§177. In a few words PI intervocalic stops (other than
cerebrals) appear doubled in Panjabi instead of being lost. For
a similar phenomenon in Prakrits see Pischel § 90. Thus
lakkar (lakuta-) ef. Nep. lauro f slick Panj. H. laura * penis ’;
thabba (stabaka-), uppar, H. upar (upari, cf. AMg. uppiip beside
uvariip), assl. H. id., (aSIti-). The case of ikk, L. hikk (6ka) is
puzzling. In Pkt. we get ekka- and ikka- presumably for e'ska-
from which the expected form in Panjabi would be §k as in Hindi,
Gujratl and Marathi, cf. Panj. H. G. khet, Mar. Set (ksStra-, Pkt.
khstta-, khitta-). In Iranian also the initial vowel was not i.
Metathesis.
§178. Metathesis is common in words borrowed from Persian
and especially in the mouths of illiterate speakers, thus kaccu,
cakkti (caqu), nuksa, nuska (nuskha), kajak, (kagaz), dejka
(degca), bujka (buqca), nuskan (nuqsan) etc. From Sanskrit
words the following may be noted:—
balt^h, banish (vartula+loha ), harasrnecklace' (mskhala-?),
cifba ‘flattened parched rice\ II. civ^a or ciu^a (cipifa-), kaura,
H. kajwa (ka§uka-), WP partoh, patroh (putravadhu-).
Contamination.
§179. Sometimes two words of a similar meaning so combine
as to become a new word, e.g. palettha or palottha (Panj.
paihlla-f-jettba), pales (Panj. pal+pos), mhSis (Panj. m&lh-f-H,
bh&is).
Onomatopoesis.
§180. There is quite a large number of words which denole
some sort of noise or motion All of them seem to be onomato¬
poeic though some are connected with Sanskrit or even Vedic
words which again are most probably onomatopoeic. Two termi¬
nations are chiefly used in forming such words and are perhaps
connected with the PI verb k&rati.
(1) —k as in kaj-ak, kharak, garhak, dha^ak, bhaj-ak, bhuj-ak,
mafak, jh^ak, rijak, tarak, tifak, phaj-ak, raj-ak; sarak (sarati)j
khurak, surak, cirak, curak, ghurak; kilak, bilak (vilapati),
tihlak, chahlak, tfuhlak (dolayate); camak (camat), damak,
lamak (lambate), dhamak (dhmati); taihk, baihk, saihk ($vasiti),
caihk, bulik (bukkati); elk (cltkara-), phuk (phutkara-), thukk
(thutkara-), cukk, fukk (trutyate) etc. Some of these do not
strictly denote sound or motion.
(2) -kar or -kar as in—
sukkar, hangar (huip), pukar (put), hflghar (huipkara-).
khSghar (Panj. khahgh kjongh’), dhak&r or §a<jh&r [t<,ak«a: r]etc.
Shift of Stress-accent.
§181. A stress accent or something with functions similar to
its has been assumed to exist in Sanskrit and its subsequent
stages. As regards its place in the word, Professor Jacobi’s
theory of penultimate accent (Z. D. M. G. Vol. 47 pp. 574 ff) as
developed by Sir George Grierson (JRAS 1895, ZDMG. Vol. 49
pp. 401 ff) lias been generally accepted upto now. This theory,
however, remarkably fails in the case of words whose syllabic
scheme in the Prakrit or ApabhraqiSa stage was x x x> x x x x,
v v v .
or x x x x. Take for instance the words vanijyara (Pkt.
vap:jjaip ^XX) and tiraSci- (Pkt. *tiracchao x w —).*

According to this theory the words

But we actually get.
should appear as.

H. #banij •tiracha ban*j tircha

EP. *banijj •taraccha banaj tircha

WP. L. *vap jj •tiraccha vanj tircha

Guj. #vaplj *tarach5 ^ vnnTj tirchfl

•tirachO J
(1) denotes a short syllable, X a syllable heavy by position
onJy and — a syllable containing a long vowel.
 94

$182. A study of such voids leads one to Use conclusion U at

at som.3 time prior to tlie compensatory lengthening of short
vowels in front of consonant-groups in Hindi and Gujraii, a shift
of accent took place by which all words received accent on the
initial syllable except those containing long vowels in lheir non-
final syllables in which case the accent fell on the syllable contain¬
ing a long vowel that was nearest to the final syllable.
§183. That there was a strong tendency to accent the penul¬
timate syllable some time about Uie ApabliraipSa stage may bo
inferred from such foreign words as J. Skt. Akabbara- (Pers.
Akbar), suratrana- (Pers. sultan), turu$ka- (Pers. turk) etc.
Detailed Examination.
§184. (1) Monosyllables may be left out oT consideration
firstly because very few of them have survived and secondly
because the accent has kept the same place in them, there being
no room for shift.
§185. (2) Dissyllables, too, require little consideration be¬
cause in their case what is the first syllable is also the penultimate.
They have become monosyllables in Panjabi open or closed, and
when the latter type ending in a neutral vowel becomes dissyllabic,
the place of accent remains unchanged.

~ ~y*di, Pkt. jar > EP je

kiti, ,i kai > „ kit, H. id.
kara, „ kara > „ k&r, H. id.
- - kali, „ kala > „ k&l, H. id. Guj. kij.
X w sapti. satta > ,, sitt, H.G. sat.
X - lajja, „ lajja > »» lajji H. Guj. laj.
— * vila-, tt > „ b41, H. id., WP vihl.
x w bandha. „ baipdha> „ binnh H. Guj. b&dh.
etc. etc.
§186. (3) Among tnssyllables the schemes x u x, and
among tetrasyllables the schemes like ^ x^or those involving
a naturally long syllable (—) after a syllable heavy by position
 95

only (x) du not call for any discussiuu as here also, the accent
falls on the same syllable according to the old and the nesv
theories.
w ^ — kfcrati. Pkt. karat > EP k&re, H. Guj. id.
— karanam, > karanaip > „ k&ran, S. k&rapu
?
ghata-, » gh&rlaO > „ gh&ra, H. td. Guj. ghiro
x w x kunda-. »» *kupdao > „ kfinda, II. kdda, Wl\
kunna
• ghanta-, >i •ghantia > „ ghindi, H. ghSti
kala-, »> kfilao > „ kala, H. id.

x — * palate-, V palaso > „ pallh;

karpasa-, It kappfiso > kapfth, H. Guj. kapfls.
a$adha-, >» asadhfl > ,, hltrh, H. as&rh, Guj.
as£<jh
gopala-, M govalo > „ gu$l, H. id. Guj. guSJ.
^ w w w prasarati, »» pasarai > IJ. p£s(a)rs
w x - - * parts v?dat„ > EP parsec*, parse, G.
parsev (o)
o w — purapa-, M purapas > „ purana, H. id.
x ^ - - carmakara-, „ camma#aro> „ ctaeSr, H. earner
cakravaka-, „ cakkavao > „ c&kva. II. id. The
expected form would be *cakvS, bat that being the
regular accentuation of causal verbs has shifted the
accent from the final to the initial syilable.
Moreover there is an overwhelming majority of words
ending in unaccented final long vowels in Hindi, Panjabi,
Rajasthani and Gujrall. cf. s£va (*su4o
— —-lshakara-, Pkt. lcha^aro > EP luhar, H. id.
— ^-SItakala-, „ slyaalo > „ se&l
x — ^ - prakhyana-, „ #pakkhanas> ,, pakhtna
x — w - w sambhalayati, „ saqibhalPi > „ samhille,
etc. etc. H. s&bhile.
 96

§187. (4) The schemes explained by the new theory are

those whore a syllable heavy by position only falls in a non¬
initial position without being followed by a naturally long
syllable. The fiual syllable, of course, is not taken into account,
Such are the schemes x_x x among trissyliables, and x x-^x,
V V V V

x^w*xorxxxx among tetrasyllables.

^ x x aniccha > Gig. dnach
w x w *}aputra- > EP. dut, H. id.
dranya- > H. drna ‘wild’
alakta > EP. H. dlta, Guj. djt5
alaksya- > Guj. djakh
alagna- > H. dlag (Fallon's Dictionary), EP.
aldgg may have been formed from lagg.

(Drf.) kaejacchu- > EP, H. Guj. kdrehl

karanka- > Panj. kdrSg (recorded in Diction¬
aries).
karamja- > EP, H. karni but G. karfi<Ji ‘gold¬
smith’s tool*, and kardntfo ‘box’.
kutumba- > EP kuram, H. kurma, kunba, kumba
S. kurmu.
kulattha- > EP, 1L kulthi.
k§urapra- > EP, H. khurpa. G. khurpl, S. khurpo.

(DPi) khatfakki- > H. khlrkl, Guj. khdrkhi

taraksa- > WP tdrafch, Guj. tdras
tiraied- > Panj. H. tircha, Guj. tfreho.
dhdntri > EP, H. dkdrat, dlidrti, Guj. id.
paraivah > EP, H. pdrsS
•parliya (cf. avaiya) G. paras /. dew, frost
•prathilla- > EP pdihlla, H. paihla, Guj. pghlo
pralagna- [Pkt. #palamga-] > Poth. pdldg^ia “a
string fastened round the neck of a pot1’. For
-?a cf. S. virnipo
pralambats > WP pdlamga

1
 97

bahutva- > EP. biuht, H. WP. bihut

manu§ya- > WP mify's
*maricya- > EP, H.mfr°c, WP mir°c.
Tkt. mahaqita G. mehta H. maihta
vaijijya- > EP, H. bin°j, WP., Guj. vi^j.
varatri- > H. birat, Guj. virat, S. yarta.
vahangifca- > EP. H., biihgl, WP viihngl
virikta- > S. virto 'tired*
viricyats- > S. vlrca^u 'to be tired*.
. "-rX* 'j yilagna-> [Pkt. *vilaipga-] >EP., H. bilSg, S. virnigo,
'w'Xw x J Guj vilagvu, WP vilagija.
vilamba- > U. bilam, WP. yilam
vilambate > WP. vilamga.
yi?amyats > EP., H. bisamna.
‘ sapatni > H. siut 'co-wife*,
saputra- > Panj. siut.
•Sarikkha- (cf., Pkt. sarikkh-, sariccha- Pischel $245).
> Panj. H. sarkha, Guj. sirkhti.
surucga > Panj. II. Guj. surfig.
sulagna- > Panj. H. sulagna, Gnj. sijagvu
haridra > EP h&ihdi, H. hdldi, Guj.hajad
WPhirdaJ.
~ w x — araghatta —> H. irhat, riiba^ by early loss of a-;
Panj. bihty by metathesis.
balivirda- > EP bihld, b&uld,
udvartana- > H. ub^an; EP. bdtna. WP vi^a through
an early loss of -u-.
XX— ^ paryanka- > Panj. pibl&g H. pilhg cf. palki.
J
XXw— paryasta-Pkt. palladia- > l’anj. pil^na, H. id.
vijnaptika > H. bintL
sambudhyati > PaDj. simjlPna, H. id.
lalyaka (P-kt. *sillaipka-)- > EP sihlig.
; ~-x— 'l kau^ujnba-> Panj. koyma
— J dauhitra- > EP dohte, H. id., WP dtihtra.
 9K;

dtlrbhik$a- >' H.” dubhuk (plutts), dubhak

.. b. S. I. IXf. p.491). —
nafafigika > BP naragl.' "" ..
manikya- > EP. manak, Hvid. WP. Guj. manak.
§188. Besides the above words . there . is a number of
grammatical formations which could not be, explained satisfac¬
torily without the application of the theory of accent-shift. They
are
(t) Present Participles.
karant-,Pkt. karaipta- > Panj. k£rda, Pc^h. kdma,
H. k&rta, Gnj. k&rtfi. See also §§ 117 and 156.
Lab. karenda is from Pkt. kareipta-.
(«) Present Indicative III pi.
karanti > Panj. kiran see also §156. ' H. kar8, O.H.
karahi cannot come from karanti.
(Hi) The s- future of Gujratl, Rajasthani and Lalmdl.
kari$yami, Pkt. Karissami >Lah- KarsS, Raj. karsyu
„ « Pkt. Karissaip.> Guj. kaiiS, pronounced
\ v [Tunl], dialectically kfcras.

(nr) The -b- infinitive of Eastern Hindi, and the -vu infini¬
tive of Gujrati.
Kartavyam, Pkt. kariavvaip > E. H. karib, Guj. karvii.
§189. There are a few exceptions several of which are com¬
mon to Panjabi, Hindi and Gujratl. They are probably late
borrowings introduced after the tendency for accent-shift had
died out, and the penultimate accept had come into existence once
more for which see below §191. . -
xxx ni&ankam > Panj. nasing, H. nisank . .
x x'w'— prasvidyate> Panj. pasijjana, H. pasljna -
prasvinna- > H. paslna, Guj. paslno
angus§ha- > Panj. gtittha, H. Sgtitha, Guj.
: •- - ^ - : aDguthc?
aguish*- > Panj; glttkl, SglttH H-. SgHhl, Guj .-id"
 99

ni$karma-> Panj. nakimma, H. nikSma, Guj. nakimfi.

nisputra- > Panj. naputta,- H. niputa • — --.1.
manjis^ha> Panj. H majl$h, Gajr id* -/The Panj;-word
is evidently a loan from fl. ., .
*pracchantati> Panj. pachanghna; perhaps H. pachfipna,
' Guj. paclidrvti with loss of nasalisation; cf. H.
j t

chSfaa, Gnj. chfi$vu.

ekastha- Pkt. ekkattba* > H. ikfcttha besiege ik^ha, ^
Pkl gkkalla > H. akfila beside ikla » -J
Panj. k&Mha Mia on account of the loss of a- before
the shift of accent took place.
— X * karind*- > Guj. karand^ beside Panj. H. karnl.
(De£) varaipda- > Panj. barSnda, H. barinda.
prartaptp- > H. pan&tl. &
•sarikkha- > Panj. sarfkkha, H. sarlkha
--nirlksa > Panj. nir°kh, H. id. Gnj. id. •
pailksa> Panj, H. Guj. p&rakh.
—aratrika > Panj. H. Gnj. 4r°tl. • The expected form
would be *ar&tl. The Sanskrit word itself is“ late and
doubtful. Perhaps the. word comes from arakta- or
•aratrika-.'" . J w * ’* •
• . .* •*•«* ^ m. •»
190. Then there are a few numerals which show irregular
accentuations e.g. * / r ^ - ’ ...
un&ttl (29), H. unittls beside untls and untls.
unanja (49), Ii. uncSs beside tineas,
akvfinja (51), Hindi form is regular ikySvan.
bav&nja (52), b2Lvan.
tav&nja (53), trepan.
cur&nja (54), ciwan.
pacv&nja (55), piepan.
chap&nja (56), chftppan.
satvinja (57), sativan.
a^hvinja (58), athivan.
 100
uaiiittar • (69), H. unhittar.
p&jhfUtar (75), H. pich4ttar.
_V sanhittar (77), H. satittar.
afhattar (78), H. athittar.
. Ip other numerals of this decade, Panjabi has a long
vowel in the second syllable, as an alternative pronunciation.

e. g kahattar (71), bahattar (72), tehi'ttar (73), cuhlttar

44

(74), cheattar (76). Hindi has the short vowel.

■§191. Recently Panjabi has lost the tendency of accent-shift
and has again developed penultimate accent thereby giving rise
to schemes like -w x' ^ etc. Such words are chiefly -
(t) tatsamas, - *
(ti) loans from Persian and English, or
(tit) words of unknown origin:
(i) parsiddh, parlikkh, basint, mahfcnt, namitt, nakhiddh,
bakunth, nacint, paki£n<j, atjtembar etc.
(«) pasind, pat&ng, nagfcid, kamind, maling, pagimbar,
tam&nca; Sat&mbar, Dasimbar etc.
(«») gbasunn, gham£n<J, bharlnd, ratidd, dab All, taring,
gharimm etc.
Most of the words of groups (t) and («) are common to
Hindi and Gujratl. Examples of the third kind also can be
found in these languages. 7 ' * -
 INDEX OF PUNJABI (LUDH1ANI) WORDS.
The diacritical marks and the infinitive sign -(a)=na of a root
affect the order. Bl. means that the other cognate forms are to
be found under the Marathi word in the index to Bloch’s La
langue marathe. Other abbreviations are
Amb. = Ambala District, Mai. = MultanI,
D. = DogrI, Pers. = Persian,
• •

0. = Gujrati, Poa. = Poadhi,

H. = Hindi, Poth = Pothohari,
K. = Kangra dialect, S. = SindhT,
Ks.=KashmIri, s — sina,
L. = LalmdT, Pkt. = Prakrit,
M. = Marathi, Skt. = Sanskrit,
Mai. = MalwaT, Ved. Vedic.
Tlie accent mark on Panjabi words represents the stress,
and that on Skt. words the pitch-accent.
Where the pronunciation is not correctly represented by the
transliteration, a phonetic transcript is added within square
brackets.
g y. nres. I sing., unemphatic= adda m. ‘ginger’. || M. al§ |1 Skt-
hfi ‘am’, — §133 ardra- _ $15,170 iii. Bl-
ab&j f. ‘sound’ 11 Pers. avaz—$52 addh m. ‘half’ || M. adlia |j Skt
ab6r /. ‘delay’, || Poa. hrr, || Skt. ardha- __ $170 iii. Bl.
avela — $143 V. adhuram [o'^aram] in. ‘impiety’,
abh&gga [op,ag:a] u, in. ‘un¬ ts Skt. adharma- _$89
lucky’, |j if. abhaga || Skt. agalifi=gahS q. v.
abbagya- — $d9 agg /. ‘fire’. |j m. ag Skt. agnt-
abtr=amlr q. v. — $15,49,154 (1) Bl.
accharfi /. ‘nymph., girl’s name’ agga m. ‘front’, || H. aga. |j Skt.
Skt. apsarfi_$ 167 M. asr? Bl. agra- _ $1G2
Sd /. 'entrail’ || W. P. andar, Aggp, adr. ‘in front’[|U. age||M.
M. St||Skl. antra-. $155, 162. Bl. agya |i Skt* agra-k P._ $103 Bl.
adambar m. ‘ostentation ’ ts. Skt. aggh (Lah.) ‘price ’ |( Skt.
adambara —$191 (i) arglia- _ ^163
 m
fcgtir m. ‘granulations in a healing ammft /. ‘mother' |j H. id. || Skt.
sore'. || Skt. aiikura _§ 155 amb£— _155
ainci /. ‘inch* || Eng. inch_§30 an /. ‘prohibition ? order?' ||M, an
ajj adv. ‘to-day' || M. aj. || Skt. Skt. ajna _ §154 (2) Bi.
adya- — §161 (2). BI. apach (G.) /. ‘disgust' || Skt.
akbanja= akvanja q. v. aniccha — §187
akl a (u) n (W. P.) m. ‘proverb'. an&j m. ‘cereal’ || B. id. || Skt.
Skt. akhyina- __ §52, 161 annSdya- __ §5l, 158
akl«Jra=kh^ra q. v. anftm m. ‘prize’ [|Ar. in‘am_§53
akk m. ‘particular plant'. || IT. ak. £nda »?. ‘egg’ || IT. inda, || Mul.
Skt. arka- _ §163 anna,‘eye-ball’. || Skt.’apda-
akkh /. ‘eye', || Amb. ankh || M. — §15, 155, 170 IV.
Skh, Ss. || Skt. aksi-. ang in. ‘mark’||H. G. M. ak.||Skt.
_ §49,113, 167 Bl. ahk4- _ § 155. BL
angur=S-gur q. v.
akkh! adv. ‘with eyes’ || Pkt.
akkhihim — §133 b anh6ra=nh§ra q. v.
akvinja adj. ‘fifty-one' || H. ik(y) anjan m. ‘collyrium’, || H. td.||Skt.
avan, M. ekavann. Skt. anjan a- _§155
ekapanca?at — §135 190 ann m. ‘food’, H H. id. G.-||Skt,
alagg adj. ‘separate’ || IT. alag l| anna- _§158
Skt. alagna- — §187 annba adj. m. ‘blind’,J|Amb. andha
a’ij m. ‘remedy' || Ar. ‘ilaj. —53 [and*], || IT. andha, Sdha || Skt.
andha- — §155
alakh (G.) ‘unknowable' [| Skt.
alaksya- — § 187 ap prow. ‘self’||M. ap, ||Skt. atma
— §49‘ 154 (4) Bl.
alas m. ‘laziness’ || M. aalas || Skt. 4pua prow, ‘own’, |[ W. P. appa,
alasya- §161 (8) Bl. Mu). avda || H. apna || Skt.
ilia adj. ‘wet’; |] M. ale ‘ginger’, atmanah — §22,154 (4)
Skt. *ardla-§143,1G4,170 tit.
Bl. apparna (W. P.) v.u ‘to reach’d
M.’upadn§||Skt. utpatati
alta m. ‘red dye' || M. alta |l Skt. §36 Bl.
alakta- _§187 Bl
aiAm m. ‘relief’l|Pers. aram—§52
amSn m. ‘ faith ' || 1'ers. Iman
— §53 arliat (H)m. Persian wheel||Panj.
amb m. ‘mango’ .M. fiba. || Skt. hfiitit,||Skt. araghatta- — §187
Smra* _ 22, 162,175. Bl. arlnd m. f. ‘castor’,||H arindi||Skt.
Ambarsar m. ‘Amritsar’ —§175 Eranda- ‘ — §55
ambtr=amlr q. v. arna (H) adj. in. ‘wild’ || Skt.
amir adj. ‘rich’ ||Ar. amir—§ 175 atanya- — §187
 103

&rsi f. ‘ring with a mirror*||H. id. ayali (WPJ m. ‘shepherd* || Skt.

Pkt. arisa-IJ M. arsa m. ajapala- — §138
‘mirror|| Skt. adarsa- aySpa (W.P.) adj. m. ‘ignorant*
__ §163,174 Bl. Skt. ajanal- _§138.
arifili adj. ‘forty-eight *||H. artalis
Skt. astacatvarimsat _§116 baoc m. ‘young ones*, || W.P, vacc
Skt. dpatya-_§51,138,161 (2)
&r°tl /. ‘wavering light before an
idol*. (I M. arat || Skt. aratrika bdccbii m. ‘calf* || M. vasrii 1| Skt*
§189 Bl. vatsd _167 Bl-
dsfi 'l pron. ‘we.* M. arabi || Skt. bachduna v. t. ‘to spread* || Skt.
dsl fVed. asme {dat. loc.) vicchadayati §152
J — §50,167 Bl. bachdra m. ‘colt *||Skt. vatsatara-
asa! ?n. ‘Christian* || Pers. 'Isa-f-I _§103
__ §53 bachdrna v. t. ‘to separate* || Skt.
asftn adj. ‘easy*|JPers. asan_§52 •vicchotayati _§109
dssi adj. ‘eighty* (| M. Ssl, aiftl. II bdddal m. ‘cloud* || M. vadal.||Skt.
Skt. a§iti- _ §177 Bl. vardaTa- _ 22,170 Hi Bl.
assu m. ‘N. of a month* || H. bdddh°na v. t. * to cut. || Skt.
asauj || Skt. asvind- _§165 vardhati _§170 Hi
fithna v. i.=atthamna q. v. bdddhl /. ‘thong* || WP vaddhari
athdttar adj. ‘seventy-eight*||H. M. vadh || Skt. bardhra-
id. Skt. a?tasaptati- _§190 __ §170 iv Bl.
athvdnja adj. ‘fifty-eight* || If. bdddhl/.‘bribe*. || W.P. vtlddhi
atthavar || Skt. astapancafcat Skt.vrddhi-. "vardhika-_§22,96
_ §190 badhna v.i. ‘to increase* || H.
Stta m. ‘flour*, || Mul. atta,||M. at ba|Tma,||WP vadhna||M. vadhpe
Pkt* atta- .1 §22 Bl.' ||Skt. vardhate § 170 iii Bl.
atth adj. ‘eight*. || M.'j atb. || Skt. bag /. 'rein*||WP. vag,||H. bag H
. a?tau — §15,166 Bl. Skt. valga _§25,164
Stthamna v. i. ‘to set son* || Skt. bagg m. ‘herd* || WP. vagg || Skt.
dsta-f-ayana-? _§25, 168 varga- §163
atthan m. ‘evening* || Skt. dsta- bagga adj. m. ‘white*||Skt. valgu-
— §25 — §164
an f. ‘pus’||W.P. & || M. 8v.||Skf. bagh m. ‘tiger’pf. vagh,||WP. id.
— §103 Bl. Skt. vyaghra-
dula m. ‘myrobalan* || H. fivlS||M. §81,161 (7), 162 Bl.
avia || Skt. amalaka- bagheSr [bagcea: p] m. wolf||Skt.
— §140, §119 (2) Bl. vyaghrd-f? §81
aut adj. *sonless*||W. P. IT. id. || bah m. f. ‘power* || WP. vah, H.
Skt. apntra- §138,183 bas Skt. va§a- §77
 104

bfth /- ‘ann’||WP. FI. ti.pl. bah! bakk m. f. ‘skin’pf. vak (h) j|Skt.
Skt. bahti- __ §137,147 Bl. valka- — §26,164 Bl.
bahltttar adj. ‘seventy-two’ || M. bakkh f. ‘side’ || W. P. vakkli||Skt.
bahattar |[ Skt. dvasaptati- v4k?as- _§141
— §190 Bl bakkbar m. ‘oil seeds’]|Skt. upas-
bahgra m. ‘myrobalan’ j| M. vehl \ kara- §54, 166
Skt. vibhttaka-_§35,170 V Bl. bakkara m. ‘goat’ ||H. bakra||Skt.
bahld m. ‘ox* || Skt. balivarda- barkara- — §137
— §128,170 m, 187 bal m. ‘hair’,||W. P. vahl, ||H. bal
bSthman m ‘Brahman’||M. baman Skt. vala- _ §128, 143,185
Skt. br£hmana-.._ §162, 168 Bl. 2. bal m. ‘child’|| WP. H. ii.||Skt.
&Shra adj. ‘twelfth’ (year) |] Skt. bal a- _§49
dvadasa- §135 baled m. ‘ox’||Skt. balivarda-
b5hnt adj. ‘sixty-two’||1I. basath — §103
Skt. dva?a?ti- §136 balt0h=batloh q. v.
b^liu f. ‘wife’ || M. valm || Skt. banaj m. ‘trade'j|M. vapaj || Skt.
vadhu- — §130 Bl. vap’jya-
_§64,140, 161, 181, 187 Bl.
bMhgi /. ‘carrying pole’ || H. id.
bandana v. t. ‘to divide’ || WP.
WP. vailing! || Skt. vahangika vandoDa v. t. to ‘divide’ jj WP.
— §187 vandaiiai|H. bStna ||M. vitna [|
bajj /. ‘defect, injury’USkt. vajra- M. vStne || Skt. vantati
— §162 1. §155 Bl.
b&jj«na v.i. ‘to be struck*flM. banda m. ‘slave’ || Pers. banda
vajne v. t.1| Skt. vadyate — §135
_ §22 Bl. bSndar m. ‘monkey’ || H. bandar
b&jja m. ‘musical instrument* M. vSdar || Skt. vanara-
Skt. vadya- __ §161(2) -175 Bl.
binia m. ‘trader’ ||M. vaijl || WP.
bftjjhS prep, ‘except, without’ vaij:a||Skt. vapga- §138 Bl.
Skt. bahya- _ §161 (9)
1. banjh m. ‘bamboo’||WP. vanjh
bSk /, ‘circular ornament for feet* H. b§s || M. vSsa ||Skt vam§a-
M. id. ||Skt. vakri- — §160 B. L.
— §26,114 Bl.
2. ban;jh adj. ‘barren’,||WP. vanjh
bakh&ra m. ‘basket, granary’, M. v8jha||Skt. vandhva
M. vakhar |[ Skt vaksaskara- — §155,161 (2) Bl.
§166 Bl. bannh„na v. t. ‘to bind'llM. b8dh$e
bakhgrna v. t. ‘to sprinkle, scatter’ Skt. bandhati §137,155,185 Bl.
M. vikharpe Skt. *viskerayati bar m. ‘door’ J|cf. || M. dar, ban
— §63,199,166 Bl. Skt. dv&ra- §165 Bl.
 105

b&rS adj. ‘twelve’||M. bara ||Skt. 2. batti adj. ‘thirty-two’ |] H.

dvftdaga __ §116,135,165 Bl. battis||WP. batti, battri|jSkt.
dvatrimgat- §
bar£g ad), ‘home sick’HSkt. vair-
agya- _ §161 batti/. ‘stone’||WP vatti||H. batti
Skt. varti- ’ _§25
bar&nda m.‘portico’. ||M. varamd
Dgg’varaipda- _§189 Bi. ban /. ‘wind’, || WP. va||M. vav,
Skt. vita- — §103 Bl.
b&ras in. ‘year’=b&rha q. v.
— §163 b&uhat adj. ‘much’llH. balmt||Skt.
barasna v.i. to rain’IlWP. vass«na bahutva- § 72,187
=barhna q. v. _§174 biula adj. m. ‘foolish, mad’||E.
barat /H.) /. ‘thong’ || M. varat bavla||Skt. vatula- _§10L
Skt. varatra _§187 Bl. bauna m. ‘dwarf’||Skt. vamana
barhna v. i. ‘to rain’||M. varasnS — §119
Skt. var?ati — §174 Bl. baur /. ‘snare’ }| Skt. vfigura-
— §101,138
barha in. ‘year’ll WP. varha||Skt.
var?a- — §174 Bl. varasne bavdnja adj. ‘fifty-two’||E. bavan
Skt. dvipancagat _§190
Birmi /. ‘ant-bill’11E. bftbl bambi
beih m. ‘marriage’|| WP. vyah,||H.
|| Skt. vamri, valmika- __ §175
byah. || M. vivah|| Skt. vivaha-
bas&h 7)i. ‘confidence’ || W. P. — §135, 142 Bl.
vasah||Skt. vifcvasa-_§58, 165 bsh /. ‘poison’ || II. bis||M. vikh
bas&nt m. f. ‘spring’ || ts. Skt. Skt. visa- __ §16 Bl.
vasanti- _§191 (i) 2. bPh in. ‘hole’ || Skt. vedha
bas&ntar m. ‘fire’ || Skt. — §138
visvJtnara —§L75 3. bsh /. ‘Pate, hick’ in bsh-
mata||Skt. vidhi- — §138
bat/, ‘thing, matter’||H. tV/.||Skt.
vartta _§141,170 Hi tehlla adj. m. vacant, WP. vshlla
Skt. viphala- _t § 80
bat /. ‘distance’||WP. vat||M. vat
behra in. ‘courtyard* ||WP. vghra
Skt. virtma, v&rtih n. §25, 170
Skt. ve?ta- _§126
— iii Bl
bflla in. ‘time’||WP. vglapl. vel
batSra in. ‘quail’ |[ Skt. vartaka-
— §103 Skt. vgla — §143 V Bl.
bsl /. ‘creeper’ j|H. id. ||WP vel ||
bitloh 77i. ‘vessel’ || Skt. vartula-f
Skt. valli- _§29
loha- _ §178
be6r in. ‘ladies’ suit of two gar¬
b£tna m. ‘nnguent’ || WP. vatna, ments 5 Skt. dvi +varaka-_§ 165
H. tibtan || M. utng || Skt.
ndvartana- _§54.165 187 Bl. bgr in. ‘jujnbe’ || M. bflr || Skt.
1. b&tti /. ‘wick'ljWP. vatti||M. badara- _§103 BI.
vat Skt. vartika _§25 Bl. bh&bbi /. ‘brother’s wife’_§7
 106

bh&deftr m, ‘store’, ‘company of bh£ita m ‘boiled rice’ll H. G. bhat

girls’ || M. bliftdar,11Skt. bhan- Al. bhat||Skt. bhalcta-
dagara- § 101,13S Bl. _§137, 153 Bl.
bhag m.‘fate’HWP, H. id||Skt. bhatth m.‘furnace’ll H. bhar||M.
bhagya _^16 L bhattaflSkt. bhr£stra-
bhagg°na (Amb.) v. i. ‘to run’ || — §162,166 Bl.
H. bhagna || M. bhagnS || Skt. bhau m. ‘fate, spare’ || WP. bha
bhagna- _§ 15 Bl. || Skt. bhagi- —§137, 138
bhai m. ‘brother’ || WP. bhra, || bhSu /. ‘eyebrow’ || H. iff.||Skt.
Lab. bhira. M. bhai. Skt. bhi atr bhrfi — §162
.... §16 2, 170 Hi Bl. bhauna v. i. ‘to wander’pf.
bbain /. ‘sister’ || M. bahfy || Skt. bbSvn§[jSkt. bhramati_§162 Bl.
bbagini _§49,101, 138 Bl.
bhaur ra. ‘blackbee’||H. bh&var||
bhajjana v.i. ‘to run,, break’ || Af. Al. bh6var.||Skt. bhramara
bhSjne || Skt. bhajvats § 119. 140 162 Bl.
_ § 1G1 Bl. bhsd f. ‘shcep’HH. bh£r || Skt.
bhala adj. m. ‘good’ || M. bhala || blisdra — §15
Skt. biiadra-* bhadla- bhe(b) /. ‘root of water-lily’||M.
__ § 143,164 Bl. bhisS!| Skt. bha_ §76, 126 Bl.
bbalfira (WP) ‘better’ || Skt.
bh<5fh)m ‘chaff’ll M. bhds||Skt.
bhadratara- § 103
bus&- — §76,126 Bl.
bhanaja m. ‘sister’s son’ || Skt.
bhQ f. ‘earth’ll M. bhuiffSkt.
bbaginSya _§157.142
bhttmi- —§119,137 Bl.
bh&ng /. ‘an intoxicating plant’ bhiigga adj. m. ‘rotten’J| Skt.
II. bfiSg || Skt. bbanga-_§155 bhugna- _ § 154 (t)
bb&nnoiia v. t. ‘to break’ || Af.
bhtll /. - bhfi q.v, —. §140
bli8jn§ ‘to divide’ § bhanjayati
— §155 Bl. bhtijjana v.i. ‘ to be fried ’ || M.
bhapli /. ‘steam’, || Al.vaph || Skt. bhA^8||Skt. bhrjj&ti
§137,103, 152, 161 Bl.
va?pa- _§126, 166 Bl.
bhirna v.t. ‘to fiIP.(|H. G. id f|Skt. bhukkh /. ‘liunger’ || M. bhuk
bbarati §137 Skt. bubhukSa_§127, 138 Bl
bbarind /. ‘wasp’ _§191 Hi bl m. ‘Seed’||M. id. || Skt. btja-
bharSt m. ‘brother’-bhai q.v. §172 §103,137,138 B!
bhass /. ‘ashes’ |1 Skt. bhasma biccharna v.i. ‘to go astray’||IT.
§167 bicharna || WP. viccbania||Skt.
bhisbhisa [‘poAs’pcs«] adj, m. •vicchutyatg— — § 109
‘acrid (eructation)’ .__ § 90 bicchfl m. ‘scorpion’ || M. vimeu ||
bhatt m. ‘bard.’ ||H. bhat || Skt. Skt. vr^eika_§67,103,160 Bl.
bhatta- §152 bicgh&r[bickca:r] perp. ‘in’—§ 90
 107

bill adj. ‘twenty’pl. vis|| Skt. buddh /. ‘wisdom' [| Skt. buddhi

viipsaU- _§135 160 Bl. — §152
bihl f. ‘street’ll W.P. vIhi||Skt buddba adj. in. ‘old*|| IL burha
vithi- — §15 Skt. bfdha- §98,170 ii
bijj /. ‘thunder, lightning’||M. vlj, bujjhana v.t. ‘to guess ’j|ir.
viju ||Skt vidynt- bujhna||M. bujli^e |j Skt. btidh-
_§49,141,161 (2) Bl. yati — § 137,161 (2) Bl.
bijli /. ‘lightning’llH. idi|Mid. Pkt. bund / ‘drop’)|M. bind |]Skt. biijdii
vijjulia || Skt vidyut — §271
— §65,121(S)B1.
Ciibb“na r.t. ‘to crunch, chew’||H.
bikk = bakk <j. v. cabnapl. cavpejlSkt. carvati
bikkhnrna r.i. ‘To be scattered’ — §163 Bl.
|| M. vikhvrne || Skt. vikirati, caihkna. r.i. ‘to sing in a pleasing
*vi§kirati, cf. viskira- way (as a bird)’||II./V/||Onomat.
__ §63,109, 166 Bl. — §180
bil mi. ‘The Indian Bael’pYP. bill cakk m. ‘potter’s wheel’pf. cakll
||M. btf || Sk. bilvi- Skt. cakru. __ §137, 186 Bl.
_§121 (4), 164 Bl. c4kva lit. ‘kind of bird’pi. i7/.|f
bll&g m. ‘rope for hanging clothes Skt. cakravaka- _§116 Bl.
on’ H S. virhigip, || Skt.. vil&gim call*na v.i ‘to walk’pi cal^e'J
Pkt. vilaipga — §187 Skt. calati ||Pkt, callai_§J29 Bl.
bilarn (H) m. ‘delay’ || Skt. callfi v. T may walk’[|Ski.
vilamba- — §187 calami: Pkt. callami-
bind = bund qv. — §L93,112,140
binga adj. in. ‘crooked’||M. vSk || camak m. f. ‘brilliancy’||H. id.
Skt. vakr8- — §36,114,141 Bl. Skt. cuinat—Onom. _§180
eam£i*“ earned r q. _§103,121
binnb“na v.t. ‘to pierce’ II M.
vldlne'lSkt. vindh&te camba m. ‘kind of liower’pf.
— §155 Bl. cSpa|| Skt. cauipaka— §155 Bl.
bisamna v.i. ‘to break’||H. id. earo&li /. ‘jasmine’ll Skt. cainpaka
Skt. visamyate — 187 -fkalika or valli _156 Bl.
bissarna v.t. ‘to forget’ || M. eame&r m. ‘ shoe-maker ’ |j M.
visaing || Skt. vismarati efimbar ||Skt earmakara
— §143,167 Bl. — §101,138, 186 Bl.
bit m. ‘means, wealth ’i|WP. vitpl. cauirn m. ‘leather’HAt. cam||Skt.
vit Skt. vitta- § 152 Bl. carma- _§137, 163 BL
bitth f. ‘space’||M. vft,||WP. vitth cand in. ‘moon’pi. c8d||Skt.
Skt. vitasti- — §103 Bl. candra- §15’ 137, 155 Bl.
bQjli w. *bnrden’i|M. ojlte ||Skt.# canga. adj. in. ‘good’llII. id. Skt.
uhya-||Pkt. vojjha-—§161 (9) Bl. cahga- — §155
 108

cann=cand q.v. ehatt /. ‘roof' || II. chat ||Skt.*

cdnnanm. ‘sandal* Skt. candana- chatti § 137.
— §64 ch&u /.‘shade' ||II. chaya ||M.
e&ubi adj. ‘twenty-four'If WP. §avll Skt. chaya _§137 Bl.
c&hvl, cavvi, c^hvvI[|M. co\is|| chg adj, ‘six’ffM. saha||s. sa||Skt.
Skt. caturviipasti- — 63 Bl. ?at (?) — §27,144 Bl.
c&uda adj. ‘fourteen’UM. cauda
chsj /. ‘bed'HH. Sfij||M. sej.||Skt.
eavda||Skt. caturdasa-
_10J, 13$, 170 iii Bl. sayya _§29 Bl.
chella m. ‘kid'||M. sSklh |J Skt.
Cauggana adj. m. ‘four times'll
chagald- _ §103,138 Bl.
S k t. ca tu rguga- ~ § 16o
c&uk m. ‘an open squared H. WP. clildda adj. m, ‘porous*||WP.
chidra || Skt. chidra-
caukllM. cauk || Skt. catuska-
— §7,137,162, 1/0 w.
_ § 166 Bl.
chij/na v.i. ‘to be separated' ||H.
cuimtl adj. ‘ thirty-four ' {[ WP. chijna || Skt. chidyate
cauttl || H. (&£itis||Skt. catus-
— §137,161 (2)
triiji?at- —§166
chikk /. ‘sneeze||Auib. chihkj|H.
caumpar ) m. ‘dice-cloth r||WP.
chile ||M. slk || Skt. chikka
feanpar||Skt. catuspata-
- §127, 152 Bl.
e&uppor ‘ —§166
1. chikka M. ‘ digit 6 ' || WP
caur m. ‘fly-whisk”||M. cSvar
ehaklca Al. $ak.||Skt. ?atka
Skt. eainara- — §129(2), 140
_ §26,* 153 Bi.
eauras adj. ‘quadrilateral’||H. id.
2. chikka m, ‘network for
Skt. caturasra- — §162
hanging things’ ||M. sikg || skt.
cautthfi adj. m. ‘fourth’ |( M srikya- __ §161 Bl.
cautha U Skt. caturthS chitt /. ‘staiu,||Anib. chi:pt|| H.
_ §101,170 iii Bl. clilt || Skt. sista- _ tY^113
eet *m. ‘X. of a mouth’ || H. /V/. chura m. ‘knife’ || M. sura |j Skt.
WP. Cfitar || Skt. caitra- k§ura- _ §167 Bl.
-i-§15, 20, 162
dbbliar m. ‘cucumber’IJSkt. cirbh-
ch6ddflna i\L‘to leave’ ||M.sSdne ata- _ §64,163
Skt. chardati _§170 iii BL cir mi. ‘delay’ || Skt. cira _§137
chail ?)i. ‘a. beau’|| M. chabila|[ dra m. ‘sparrow ’||H. id. || Skt.
Skt. chavi-Pkt. chailla- cataka- _ §26
_ §142 Bl.
cfttana v.i. ‘to paint'||WP. cittarga
cbainl f. ‘chisel' ||H. id. || WP.
Skt. citrayati _ §137., 162
chain! || Skt. chedana __ §101
citta vi. ‘leopard* || W.P. citra||H.
cliaun m. ‘verse' ||Skt. clidndah cita M. ci ta||Skt. citraka-
— §137 BL — §19,162, 170 IV Bl.
 109

citta adj. m. ‘white’||Skt. dtr4- dajjhana (WP.) v.i. to be burnt’

__ §162, 170 IV IIM. dajn§||Skf. dahyate
cfikklia . adj. m. ‘good’||M. c5kh • _ §161 (9) Bl.
Skt. c5k?a- _ §19 B1 dakh /. ‘grape, raisin’ |[ Skt.
c5r m. ‘thief’||M. cor||Skt. eora- drfiksa _ §15,162
__ §15,137 Bl. dakkhan m. ‘south’||M. dakhnj
ctikka m. ‘kind of vegetable’||M. Skt. daksina- _§64 Bl.
cuka || Skt. cukra-_§162 Bl. daman m. ‘minister’||WP. duftn
cullha m. ‘fireplace*||M. cul || Skt. Pers. diwan §140
culla- _ §128,137 Bl. damm m. ‘price*||H. dam || Skt.
cnnj /. ‘beak'llM. cfic||Skt. cancu- dramma- _§158, 162
__ §28,155 Bl. dand m. ‘tooth’||M. dfiipt || Skt.
etinna m. ‘lirae’pl. cuna || Skt. danta- _ §19,137,155 Bl.
cur^a- _ §19, 24, 163 Bl. dand m. fine, punishment 1
da postpos. ‘of' || K§. sanda||S. dan<ja m. “stick” J ||WP.
handa]|Poth na||Skt. sant_§118 dann || M. dand || Skt. daijdd-
dabbh m. ‘grass’||WP drabbapl. — §155,170, IV 17i Bl.
dabh || Skt. darbh£- §163 Bl.
dang m. ‘bite, sting’llH. dabk,
dadd /. ‘ringworm’ll WP. daddar
clftkll M. dfignS, daipkh |( Skt.
||H. dad || ir. dad||Skt. dadru-
■^dakna-UPkt. dakka, *daipka '
_ §162 Bl.
_§160 Bl.
daddhcga v.i. ‘to burn' ||Skt.
dagdha — §153 dfirhl /. ‘beard’||H. darhI|]Skt.
dadhika * _§171
dftddha adj. m. ‘strong’||M. dadha
' Skt. dardhya __ §24, 96, 176 Bl. das adj. ‘ten*||M. id. daha || Skt.
da<}dh(u) m. ‘frog’||Skt. dardura- dm * — §145 BL
- _§170 Hi, 171 Dasambar||Eng. December
d$hna ' v.t. ‘to stretch’||Skt. __ §191 ii
‘ draghate __ §162,170 IV
d5ssflna v.t. ‘to tell’||Skt. dar&a-
d&hl ?n.||‘curd’||M. id. Skt. dadhi- yati — §137,163
_ §103,116,138 Bl.
dahlndi f. ‘vessel for curd’ll Skt. d&ssana v.t. ‘to bite’||Skt. dasyate
’ dadliibhanda- _ §134,171 — §160

dain f. ‘witch’||WP. dain |J Skt. dittf f. ‘sickle’||Wr. datri || Skt.

‘ dakin! _ §101,106,137, 138 d&tra- — §162
daj m. ‘dowry’||M. dej||Skt. dava- dfiun f. ‘string’||M. davai? J| Skt.
or Pers. dad _§142 Bl. damam- — §106, 119 Bl.
dajh - f. .‘burning thirst’ ||Skt. dauru w. ‘small drum’ ||Skt.
dahya- — §116 (9) damaru- — §119,137,140
 no
debUrti m. ‘day’ [| M. disllSkt. dlttha (WP.) past. part, ‘seen* ||
divasa- _ §60 Bl. ' Skt. dr§ta- ~ §171
d6I /. ‘ased in girl’s name’ || Skt. diQt /. ‘lamp stand’||S. diati[|Skt-
.dfiv! _ §142 dlpa+varti- ' _ __ §171
dedr m. • 'husband’s younger do adj. two||M d5n[|Skt. dvau
brother’ || M. der, dir || Skt. - §165 Bl.
-dfivara- - ;—§142 Bl. d<Jhta m. ‘daughter’s son’lfWP.
dhan m. *rice’||M. t<i|[Skt. dhanyd- dOhtra- || Skt danhitra-
— §161 (4) Bl. §15, 65, 137, 162,187.
dharna v.t. ‘to place,’ ||Skt. dha- dda = dftjja q.v.
rati _ §137 dubb /. ‘grass’|jSkt. dtlrva — §24
dhar /. ’current’llSkt. dhdra §137 duddh m. ‘milk’HM. dudh || Skt.
dhdr*t /. ‘earth’|!Skt dharitrl dugdha- _ §19,137, 153 Bl.
__ §66,187
dtl<Jdha see dflrh
dhdttha past, parti, ‘fallen’ ||Skt.
dtljja adj. vn. ‘sccond’|]M. duja
dhvasta- _§165,171
Skt. dvittya- §142,165 Bl.
dhdnld adj. m. ‘white’||M. dhava} dull°na v.i, ‘to beconiei
Skt. dhavala- _§101, 142 Bl. unsteady* M. du^§
dullhana v.i ‘to be pour-1
1. dhaun /. neck|| Skt. dhamani
ed out’ J
- §119
Skt. #dulyate cf. dolayali
2. dhaun m. ‘half mauud’HSkt, — §128 Bl.
ardhamana- _ §51
dtilla adj.t m. ’generous’||Skt.
dhaunca m. ‘multiplication table durlabha —. §163,164
of 4$’ ||Skt. ardhapancama- dttnna in. ‘cup of leaves’||M. dOnl
— §51 ' ‘boat’||Skt. dv5pa__?§170 TV BL
dQr adj. ‘distant’[|M. dQr || Skt.
dhflna v.t. ‘to carry’ || Skt. dhau-
dflra- — §137 Bl.’
kate _ §137
dGrh adj. ‘one and a half’||M.
dk5h m. ‘deceit’ll Skt. dr5ha-
didh || Pkt. divaddha-
— §126
11103, 171 Bl.
dhQ8 m. ‘smoke’lfM. dhui ’fog’
Skt dhutnfi-—§112,137,140 Bl. gft /. ‘cow’|[M. gal||Skt. g6 #gava
137 Bl.
dliflr /. ’dust’HSkt. dhudi, dhfili- gdbbha m. ‘centre’|| M. gabh
' — §138. ‘embryo’||Skt. garbha-
din m. ‘day'||Skt. dina- _§137 _ §137,162 Bl.
diss°na v.i. ‘to appear’||M. disne gadha m. ‘ass’||M. gadhav, gaddha
Skt. dj*§yate Skt. gardabha- * .
— §97,137, 161 (8) Bl. — §15, 127, 138, 170 iii Bl.
 Ill

g&clda ttt.. 'earthworm11| Skt. geha in. ‘taking a thing forcibly*!]

gapdupada- _ §155 Skt. graha _ §147, 162
gaggar /. ‘water vessel'll M. ghag- g$ru in. ‘red earth’||M id. Skt.
garjj Skt. gargara-: gargarf- gairika- _§103 Bl.
§25, 163 Bl. ghaggVa in. ‘petticoat* || Skt
gajj“na u.i. ‘to thunder ’ || M. gnarghara—
gajn§l|Skt. garjati i)e§. ghagglmraip jaghanastha-
—* 137, 163 Bl. vastrabhgduh __ §163
gijjar f. ‘carrot'||Skt. garjara- ghail adj. Svoutided'||WP. ghail
_ §24, 163 Skt. gliata- _ §101,106
gal m. ‘neck, throat'HgaJa (| Skt. ghanrl in. ‘Adam's apple *J|H.
gala- §137 Bl. glifttiHSkt. gln.nta-
gal /. ‘abuse'l|WP. gahl||Skt. gali- — 137,155,186
- §128 ghara m. ‘jar'||M. ghada |[ Skt.
gallh /. ‘cheek'||1I. gal||M. gal gliata- _ §137, 138, 186 Bl.
Skt. galya- i gapda- _ ?§128 ill. ghasoa in. ‘rubbing’llSkt. ghar?a-
gdnda adj. m. ‘dirty’||Pers, ganda - §163
_ §135 ghatPna v.t. ‘to speak lowly of*
gdnda m. ‘thread used as a Skt. ghattate _§161
charm'll Skt. gapda- _§155 ghau m. ‘\vound’||WP. glialJM.
gdncjh [i] /. ‘knot’ifII. gSth|jSkt. ghayliSkt. ghata-
granthi- _§i70 (i) __ §103, 137,138 Bl.
ghe6 in. ‘clarified lutter’ UlVP.
gandlPna v.t. ‘to unite' ‘mend,||
ghiu||K. gli?||H. ghi |j M. gh!
11. gSthna || M. g8thpe||Skt.
Skt. ghjda-
grantliati §155
_ §60, 97, 101,103,137, L32 Bl.
gand6a = g&d6a <j v.
ghin/. ‘detestation'j|>Skt. ghj-pa
gdnnl /. ‘enlarged eyelash’ll Skt.
— §97
gapdi — §137, 138 Bl.
gardu, garih = grau, grab q.c. gh6ra m. ‘horse*||M. g’iB<Ja||Skt.
ghotaka-
g4rha adj. in. ‘thick’||M. gadha
_ §44, 103, 108, 137, 138 Bl.
Skt. gadha- — §137, 155 Bl.
gliuinm"na v.i. ‘to revolve *1|M.
gas- m. ‘mouthful’ ||Skt. grfisa-
ghiimnei|I)es. ghummai_§161
§162, 172
(5) Bl.
gatth [i] f. ‘knot’||Skt. granthi-
- *170 (i) giddh in. *vulture'||M. gidh||Skt.
erdhra-
gatth“na v.t. ‘to unite, mend’ Skt. _ §97, 137, 162, 170 IV Bl.
grathniti §155,162 g(jjli°na v.t. ‘to become accus-
geftrfi adj. ‘eleven*||M. akra||Skt. tnined*i|Skt. gr'dhyati
dkadasa §55, 116, 135 Bl. _ §97,161 (2)
 112

ginana v.t. ‘to count 9||M. ganp§ gunah m. ‘sin’ll Pers. gunah .
Skt. ganayti, gpnati - —.$135
— $26, 108,140 Bl. gurha adj. m. ‘fast (colour)’||
gltthi /. ‘fireplace’|jM. Sgtl|| Skt. Skt. gu^ha- — $15,138
agnistha- — $25, 189 Bl. guttba m. ‘tlmmb’||M. aijigtha
g5k f. ‘iguana’IjSkt. godkS Skt. angustha-
6 _ $137 _$51,166,189 Bl.
gtfhran /. ‘anuo’||Skt gudahadd m. ‘borie’HM. badda, hadde;
rand'ira- — $155 athi /. ‘stone of a fruit* || Skt.
gfira adj. ‘white, fair’||M. g5ru asthi-*had<Ja- — 132, 152 Bl.
Skt. gaur4- „_$15Bl. hal m. ‘plough’|| M. haj. |J Skt.
g5t m ‘sub caste’||WP. gOttar||M. bala- — 146 Bl.
g5t || Skt gfltra- balhdi /. ‘turraeric’||M. halad||Skt.
_ $137,162,170 IV Bl. haridra
grd'ilm. tnouthful’ilL giraV _65,128,143 (ti), 187 Bl.
gras’Skt. grasa- —$162 halh“t m. ‘Persian wheel’||M.
graihn m ‘eclipse’ Skt gra'iana- rahat || Skt. araghatta-
_ $‘162 _ $187 Bl.
grau «/. *village’||WP. gr£, |1 L. liamel f. ‘necklace ‘|| Skt. mskhala(?
girfi M. gav. jjSkt. gi &ma- (1) ■ -$178
— $162 Bl. bans m. goose|| S. hanj" J| Skt-.
gulllla m. ‘cowherd’||M. gav}i||Skt. hazps£ -*_$160
; gopate- — $101,186 Bl.
haran adj. ‘surprised’|| Ar.
guccha m. ‘bunch’|[M. guch, gh5s • bairan _$84
Skt. #grpsa- guccha- liarar /. ‘myrobalan’U WP. harir
- $98,152 Bl.
||M. hirda||Skt. haritaki-
gaggal m. ‘a gum used as insense9, — $67, 146,170 (V) Bl.
||M gugul ||Skt. gulgulu
— $64,152, 167 Bl. harh m. ‘N. of a mouth’ll D.-ahftr
[0oa:r]||M. akhad[|Skt. a?adha-
gun in. ‘excretion’||M. gu |jSkt« — $52, 138,145, 186 Bl.
• gutha- — $116, 137, 138 Bl.
gftjj&r »i. ‘a Gujar9||8kt. gurjaara~ bass in. ‘collar boue’||also bans ||
— $163 S. banja ‘waist’ ?||Skt. fcpsa-
— $132,160
gujjha adj. m. ‘secret’j|M. guj
• Skt. guhya-— $137, 161, (9) Bl. hasna v.i. ‘to laugh’ || M.- hasnS
Skt. basyate _ i 61 (8) Bl.
gfimmft m. ‘collection’llSkt. gulma-
- $137 164 bfissa m. ‘laughter’|| Skt. hasya-
guinmhS hi. ‘bard boil’ || Skt. — 161 (8)
gumpba- hatli4li=thj]i q. v.
 113

hat£ f. m. ‘shop* || M. h&t, || Sk. ikkh f. ‘sugarcane’ ||M. us || Skt.

hat£a- __ 152 Bl. ik§u- __ §15, 49,167 Bl.
hatth m. ‘hand'||M. hatHSkt. hasta- imli /. ‘tamarind'llalso imblTHSkt.
§19, 146, 166 Bl. amiika _§26,175
hatth! adv. ‘by hand' |j Skt
hasta bhyam [|Pkt. hattghiip injk (u) m. ‘tear' Jj WP. hunjhu
— §l33b M. asu s.ftsu Skt. asru-
h&tthi m. ‘elephant'HM. hattJ||Skt* _§26, 39, 132, 160 162 Bl.
hastin- _§25 Bl. innhaii in. ‘fuel’||Skt. indhana-
h!8 m. ‘heart'll H. hia||M hiyya — §15, 155
couryllSkt. iifdyaya- itt /. ‘brick'11 Amb. i^t||M. v!t
— $97, 146, 170 («) Bl. Skt. is taka, #i?ta- _Ll5, 136 Bl.
hill (WP.) /. ‘side of a bedstead'll jAna v.i ‘to go’HSUt. yftti
M. is||Skt. __ -§15, 132 Bl. ' __ §137, 141
hil^na v.i. ‘to be shaken *j|l£. jAdda (Poa) in. ‘cold, cbilP||H.
hilnallSkt. hiJati: hilyati _ §129 jara||M. ‘jad cold’HSkt. jadya-
— §161 Bl.
hlran in. ‘deer'||WP. haran||M.
haraijIlSivt. hanjia- §26 Bl. jaddha ‘term of abuse’||WP.
yaddhallSkt. yabdha- — §153
hdea past. past. ‘been, become'H
H. hua||Skt. bhuti-:-u->-0 on jigna v.i., ‘to awake’]|M. jagge
account of the root being ‘ho-’ Skt. jagrat- _§162 BL
§98 jai pt on. ‘how many'HSk. yati
h5r pron. adj ‘more, other’ll tf. __ §193
aur ||Raj. Qr || Panj. also ar, or, jaihna v.t. ‘to copulate*||WP.
rJISkt. apara- _§132 yaihna||M. jhavne||Skt. yabhati
humruh in. ‘sultry weather'||\VP. §144 Bl.
hussar |] M. ub||Skt. u?man- jalna v.t. ‘to burn'ijM. jal^eiiSkt.
- §132 Bl. jvalate _§165 Bl.
hun adv. ‘now'llSkt. adliuni jamil m. ‘son-in-law’UWP. juai||
— §51,138, 140 M. javai||Skt. jftmatj-
_ §57, 140 BL
hunila (WP) m. ‘summer||Al. un
jani&r /. ‘a kind of cereal'||WP.
(h) ‘heat'HSkt. usnakala-
juir|}M. juvarHSkt. yavakara-
_ §167 Bl. §101, 140 Bl.
hund ‘gold coin'll WP. hunn Skt. jamm m. ‘birth'llSkt. janman-
_ §137. 157
htifla- : hujjda- — §155
jdmmil ‘a kind of fruit'||also
liQjhna ot. ‘to collect’HSkt. uhcliati j&niman||II. jaman||M. j&b (h)
_§155 Skt. jambu- _§155 BL
ikk adj. ‘one’||Al. Sk||Skt. 6ka- jSn°na v.t. ‘to know' i| M. ja^e
_ §132, 177 Bl. Skt. janiti — §137 BL
 114

j£nda pres. part. ‘going’||H. jata jibh /. ‘tongue’||M. jibh |l Skt.

Poth, jana[|Skt. yant- jihv& —$25,137, 165 Bl.
— $117,153 Jih~pro«. rel. obi. ‘whom’ || H. jis
janeau m. ‘sacred thread’llWP* Skt. yasya — $141
janju||M. janvlHSkt. yajnopa- jim§ adv. rel. ‘how'||WP. jiv8
vlta- _ $154 (2) Bl. Gr. jsmf|Pkt •jime^a _$140
jangh /. ‘thigh’pl. jSg (h)||6kt. jifin m. ‘life’ [j Skt jtvana-
j4ngha _$49,155 Bl. — $60, 142
jann f. ‘wedding party ’||WP. janj pron. rel. dir ‘who’||M. jO||Skf-
Sktjanya- —$161(4) yah - — $141 Bl.
jar m. ‘friend; paramour’||WP. jot w. ‘yoke’||Al. iJ||Skt. y6ktra-
yar ||Skt. jara- c.f. Pers. yar — $14L Bl.
_$141
/. ‘louse’pl. Q||Skt. yOka
jarau m. ‘mode of setting jewels’ — $103, 116 Bl.
llWP. iar^Hfroin jarna ‘to set’
' _$106 jua m. ‘gambling’|[M. juva|| Skt.
dyuta
jarli /. ‘grinding teeth’||H. dark • — $15,103, 138,161 (2) Bl.
j|WP. darh? ||Skt. daipstra
dadha, || Poa. datha — $126 juh&ria m. ‘gambler’||Skt. dyfita +
dhara-f . _$102
iaf! m. ‘barley’||Al. jav.||Skt. yava
— $116, 141 Bl. jug in. ‘pair’HSkt. yugma-
— $154 (1)
jg conj. ‘if’||M. jaillSkt. yddi
— $103,138, 141,185 Bl. j til a m. ‘cross-bar of a yoke’j|M.
jSlira direct pron. reL ‘who'llSkt. jfivalilSkt. yuga+hala-t
yasya+f — $141 — $138
jp.th m. ‘N. of a month’||M. jgthvad jun f. ‘life birthflSkt. y6ni-_ $40
Skt. jy$ stha- jyaistha- jurna v.i. ‘to be united *||Skt. yuta
_$137, 161,166 Bl. ~t — $170
j6ttha adj. m. ‘eldest’HAl. jstha jhttba adj. m. ‘polluted’, impure||
Skt. jy$stha- — $19 Bl. H. jliUta||Skt. justa.... §25, 13T
jhanda m. ‘flag’UAI. jh§d ||Skt. kabra adj. ‘spotted’||M. kabra ||
dhvaja-rdagda— t — $165 Skt. karbara- _$163 Bl.
jhank&r [Qdnka:r] /. ‘rattling’ kaccli /. ‘armpit’ |j Al. kfis
Skt. dhvanf-? —$165 udder’||Skt. kaksa
jhatt a dr. ‘at once’||WP. jhabh, — $152,167 Bl.
jhatt||Skt. jhatiti ? — $137 kacchu m. ‘tortoise’||Al. kasav |J
jhitir m. ‘water-carrier’ |j Skt. Skt. kaccbapa _$152 Bl.
dhTvara- ’ — $142
kaddhflna v.t. ‘to take out’ ||A1.
ji tn. ‘creature’||Al. jiv||Skt. jivci- kadliije]|Skt. kf§ta-i|Pkt. kat$ha-
— $15, 103, 137,142 Bl kad^Ih&Yf * $J26 B1.
 115

kftcjeftri / ‘a thorny bnsjh’ || Skt. kamarft adj. m ‘umnarried’i|M.

kantakari- _§106 luigvfirl Skt, kumara-
k&ddrna m. ‘hedgehog’ || Skt. _ §101,140 Bl.
kantaka+karaija- — §103 kdmbana=kamraana //. v. § 165
kali ft ni /. ‘story *||Skt kathanaka, kdmbal m ‘blanket’||also kdwmal
Pers.'kalian! § 7, So M. I<fibl5|| Skt. kambald- §155 Bl.
kai pron ‘into how many’IJSkt. Kainheftr m. ‘potter’flalso kamhar
kati §103, 185 f| M. kflbhar||Skt. kumbhakara-
kaih imperat. ‘tail’ll Skt. kathaya — §101,155, 138,103 Bl.
__§ 70 kamm m. ‘work’ll Mi. kam || Skt.
kdihna v.t. ‘to tell*||Skt. kathayati kdrman. § 19163 Bl.
— §137,138. kanimand v.i. ‘to shiver’||M.
kftiha (WP.) m. ‘bronze’llSkt. kfipne Skt. kampate § 156 Bl.
kaijisd- — $160 kan /. ‘defect, crooekedness’HSkt.
kafra adj. m. ‘squint-eyed’HSkt. •kanya? __ §161 (3)
kfikara — §101
lcftna adj. m. ‘one-eyes’ ||M knn5
kaj m. ‘work’ ||M. iVf.||Skt. karyd- Skt. ka*d- §15 Bl.
_ §161 (9) Bl.
kajjal m. ‘collyriumf || M. kajal kdndam. ‘thorn’ ||M. kftta !|Skt.
Skt. kajjala- — §64,152 Bl. kanaka- _§155 Bl.
kakkar in. ‘frost’ll M. kamka k'anc m. ‘glass’lfSkt. kaca-_§113
‘pebble’llSkt. karkara-§163 Bl. kandh /. ‘wall’||Skt.kantha_§ 155
kakkar! /. ‘cucumber’||M. kftkdl II kandha m. ‘edge’ || M. kaipth
Skt. karkatika —§B1. ‘throat’llSkt. kantha _§155 Bl.
kakkh in. ‘blade of grass’||Skt. kandddu »>. ‘swelling behind ear’
kdk§a- — §167 Skt. karija kaijdu _§103
kal f} ‘niachine’l|M. kal,[|Skt. kalft kandr in. ‘kind of plant’ M. kajj<5
_• §185 Bl. Skt. karnikara- kanrkara-
kftla adj. m. ‘black’||M. kala||Skt. _ §103 Bl.
kala §137, 186 Bl.
kandra (Mul ) m. ‘mat-weaver’||
kalftva m.‘ bundle’||M. kalvallSkt. Skt. kandakara _§103
kalapa- — §138 Bl.
kangan m. ‘bracelet’||M. kaijikaijll
kdlla adj. nu ‘lonely’ ||. Poth. Skt. kankana- _§64, 155 Bl.
ghalla || H. akPla ||Skt. ekakin- kahganl f. ‘kind of grain’ll M.
Pkt. ekkalla _ §55, 169 kagllSkf. kangum §64 Bl.
kallh adv. ‘tomorrow-yesterday’||
M. kali||Skt. kalya- kdngha m. ‘comb.’||M. kannkva
_§128,161 (6) Bl. Skt. kankata _§126 Bl.
kftman m. * jugglery ’ [| Skt. kanhdra m. ‘shouhler’HSkt. skan-
karmana- — §163 dha+tata- _§103
 116

kanj •/. ‘slough of snake’ |) Skt. basSra m. ‘brazier’ || M. kas5r

kancu- — §28,153 Skt. #kamsakara- __ §103 Bl.
kann m. ‘ear’ f| M. kan Jj Sbt. kasna v, t. ‘ to tighten ’ || M.
kar$a — §137* 163, Bl. kaspe H Skt. kapsati
kanna ?n. ‘reed1 ||Skt. kftnda- — §121 (4) Bl.
__ §15,19,155 kfissi /. ‘bronze’ || M. kSsS ||Skt.
kannea /. ‘girl’, virgin’ |l WP. kaipsya- _§160, 16L (8), Bl.
kanj. Skt. kanyB — §161 (4) bath m. ‘wood* |fM. kathl || Skt.
k&nnha m. ‘ shoulder * || Arab. kas^ha- §19,121, 137, 166 Bl.
kandha||Skt. skandhd- §155 kittak m. ‘N. of a month’ || WP.
kafltha m. ‘necklace’ H WP. •kattS IISkt. kafttika- „ §22
kaintha {s. ||Skt. kantbd __§30 katt“na v. t. ‘to spin’ || M. kfttnfl
kapSh m. f.‘ cotton * || M. kapfis Skt. kartati __ §170, Hi Bl.
Skt. karpasa- katt"na v. t. ‘to cut" Skt. kartati
_ §145,163,186 Bl. — §110,170 Hi.
kappana (WP.) v. t. ‘to cut’ ||M. kattha adj. adv. ‘ together ’,
kSpgS Skt. kalpayati—§164 Bl. ‘united ’ || Poth ghattha Skt.
k&pp*ra m, * cloth ’ || M. kapad Ska'stha- _ §55,131,189
Skt. karpata- _§64 Bl. k£tti adj. i thirty-one ’ |) Skt.
kfirna v. t. ‘ to do ’ |i If. karpg ekatriipsat __ §55,135
Skt. karati ... kauddi /. ‘ cowrie shell ’ || Skt.
__ §15, 49,137,147 Bl. kapardika _ §103,170 iii
k&rBg m. *skeleton*||Skt. karanka- kaul w. ‘lily, flower’ ]| Skt.
§187 kdmala- _ §101,119 (2) 140
k£ra m. ‘bracelet* II M. kadf||Skt.
kataka- _i 38 Bl. kaura adj. m. ‘bitter ’ || Skt.
katnka- . • ., _§63,178
karAha m. ‘ frying pan ’• || Skt.
kataha- §135,138 keAra m. ‘field, bed’HSkt. kedara-
karchi /. ‘ladle’ || M. kado? |] D?s. §60,101,138
kadacchQ •_87 Bl. kSHa m. ‘banana’ || M. kPj, k?]§
karhna v. i ‘to be boiled’ [| M. Skt. kadali §103 || Bl.
kadhgS Skt. kvathate_§165 Bl.
kPssu m. ‘kind of flower’ || Skt.
k&rha (WP) m. -‘camel ’ || Skt. kaiipSuka- _§24,160
karabha- _ §138
khabba adj. m. ‘left, not right’ |)
karlh f. ‘bits of cowdung’ || Skt. Skt. kharvd- §163
karl?a- §145
kdrni/. ‘masson’s trowel’ || Skt. khdgga m. ‘leaf of ghia kamar’ ||
karanda- _§187, 189 Skt. khadga- §153
kfirfl m. ‘medicine for horses’ khal /. ‘ditch'||M. iU||Skt khati-
Skt. ktyika- • §138 - §137, 138 Bl.
 khair in. ‘ kind of wood * || kliFs /. ‘a sheet of figured cloth’
M. kher fj Skt. khadirfi- Pers. kes __ $i 25
_ $10L Bl. kh^t m. ‘field’|| M. s*t |J Skt.
khaj /. ‘itching’ || M. id. j|Skt. kSStra- __ $15,19 Bl.
kliarju _$25 Bl. kbferl /. ‘mixture’IfSkt. khieca
khajja m. ‘food* || M. khaj8j|Skt. $152
kliadya- __ $161 (2) Bl.
khfnkhap f. ‘brocade’ || Pers.
khajur /. ‘date* |j M. y7Z.||Skt. kamkhwab _$125
kliarjtira- _$163 Bl. khir /. ‘rice pudding’ || M. id.
khammha m. ‘column, pole' J1 M. ' Skt. ksfrd- __ $167 Bl.
kliSd |i Skt. skambhd- kMrki (FI) /. ‘window’ || M.
_ 155, 166 Bl. khidki||Dcs khadakki
kh&na v. t. ‘to eat’ [|S'it. khftdati _ $187 || Bl.
— §137 khfssa m. ‘pocket’ |j Pers. klsa-
khand /. ‘sugar’ |] Skt. khanda- — $125
— $155
khitti /. ‘constellation’ |J M. katya
khand a prep. part. ‘eating’||Skt. Skt. kfttika
kh&dant- . _ $117 — $97,124, 152,170 t* Bl.
khangh /. ‘cough’ f| M. khasflS kliSh /. ‘hunger’ [| Skt. ksudhfi
Skt. kasa, || Pkt. khasiya-, — $76, 86, 135, 138, 167
•lchassa-, #khamsa khf5t m. ‘basealloy’HSkt.kautya-
— $125,160 Bl. — $124
khanna m. ‘one quarter’ || Skt. kliuddfl /. ‘ball’ || WP. khiddu,
kb and a- _137,155 kh?(h)nu ||Skt. kanduka-
khappar m. ‘skull, bowl’ (| M. — $281, 103,124
khapar || Skt. karpara- kbUh (a) in. * well’|| .M, Ioiva
_ $124, 163 Bl. Skt. ktipa- _ $124 Bl.
khar /. w. ‘alkali’ || Skt. ksara- khulla m. ‘mean fellow’ || Skt.
— $167 ksudrd-: ksudla- $143, 164
kh&ra m. ‘arena’ | khundha adj. m. ‘blunt’ [| Skt.
Skt. aksatpata _ $51 kuptha- _124,155
kh&rl f. ‘basket’ [j Skt. khari khftnja tn. ‘corner’ || H. k5na
_ $137 Skt. kuna- T $124
khdssflna v. t. ‘to take by force’ khunjlPna r. i. ‘to miss’ || Skt.
Skt. karsati __ $125,163 ku?nati ||Pkt. •kussai, kuipsai
khatt /. ‘dowry with a bedstead’ •khumsai — $100
|| M. kbat || Skt. khatva
— $137,165 Bl. khfirpa m. ‘ scraper ’ || Skt.
ksnrapra- _ $65,187
kh$t[h]na v. i. ‘ to play ’ || M.
khtfnS || Skt. kridati ksvplati khursl /. ‘chair* J| Pers. km'fti
__ $35, 63,124 Bl. — $125
 118

khussana v. i. ‘to miss’ |j Skt knee m. ‘brush’ || M. kumca||Skt.

kus^ati §125 kftreA. ' — §24,163 Bl.
khutthi /. ‘ bad woman ’ ||Skt. kudtil m. ‘mattock* || M. kudsl
kastri §125 Skt. kuddala- _ 152 Bl”.
kflla m. ‘peg’|| >1. killi, khil lcuddana v.i. ‘to jump’ || kudng
Skt. kila- _ §137 BL Skt. kurdati
kSm8 adj. inter ‘how?’ || WP. _ §24,170 Hi BL
klv§, || GK kgm || Pkt. #kimena kuhftra m. *axe’||M. hurhad
— §i40 Skt. kuthara? _ §62 Bl.
kirna v.i. ‘to be scattered* || Skt* kfihl /. ‘ canal, stream ’ || Skt.
kir&ti §108 kuly& ___ §25,128
ktihul /. ‘elbow’ ||Skt. kapbOni-
ktra m. ‘insect’ || M. kida||Skt.
kfta- _ §137, i38, BL - §78138
kirtghan [kirtkcAn] adj. ktikkar m. ‘cock’ || Skt. kukkutfi-
‘ungrateful’ is. ||Skt. krtaghna- — §64, 137,152
- §90 kukkh /. ‘womb’ || M. kus ||Skt.
kltta past. part, ‘done’ || M. kela kuksi _ 15, 49,137,167 Bl.
Skt. kptd- _ §25, 97, 170 it BL kula adj. m. ‘soft’ |j M. kQmvJa
Skt. komala- _§103 Bl.
k6h m. ‘league, li miles’ ||M. k5s
Skt. krdSa- _ §145, 162 Bl. kulthi /. ‘kind of pulse’|| Skt.
kulattha- _§187
k6hnl = kfihm q. v.
kummfi (WP.) m. ‘tortoise’||Sbt.
k61(6) prep, ‘near’ || M. kCr
kurmd _§24,163
‘side’? Skt. kr5d4-
— §49,103,162 Bl. kunS.1T f. ‘dish’ ||WP. kunnl

ksrh m. ‘leprosy’ 1|M. k0dh||Skt. kunda m. ‘large cup’ ||M. kuipd

kustha- cf. Pa. kstha- Skt. kunda- — §155, 186 Bl.
— §38 BL
kundan = kunnon q. v.
k6rl /. ‘score’ ||Skt. koti_§176
kubgu m. ‘saffron, red powder’
kdrraa vi. ‘ family ’, || Skt.
kautumba-. _§155,187 || M. kunkum ||Skt. kunkuma-
__ 103,155 Bl.
kdssa adj. m. ‘lukewarm’ || Skt. 1. kunj = kanj‘snake’s slough’
kosma _ §137,167
kftttha m. ‘room, cell’ || M. kstha 2. kunj /. *crane’|| Skt. krunca
§155
Skt. ko?tha-
— §15,19,137,166 BL kunji f. ‘key’HSkt. knneika
__ §155
kubba adj. m. ‘hump-backed’||M.
kubda, khuba || Skt. kubhrfi-: kunnan ?». ‘pure gold’
•kubra- _ §162 Bl. - §155
 119

kuram m. ‘child’s father-in-law* latth /. ‘axle’ j| H. lath, lathi

IIH. kurma kumba||M. kutuipb lEtthi /. ‘stick’ |JM. lat(th)
Skt. ku£umba- Skt, ya?tl- •latthi- _§25 Bl.
§64,138,155, 187 Bl. laulnjda adj. m. * small * || Skt.
kurattan /. ‘ bitterness * || Skt lagnii- _ §138
katuka-Mvana §165
Hh /. ‘line’ || Skt. l$kba __ §138
labbhana v.t,*to find*||M. labl’.ne lik(h) /. ‘line’ ||Skt. lekha ts-
Skt. labhyate Bl. _ §136
laddaua v. t. * to load * || Skt. likli /. ‘louse, nit’ H M. id. [| Skt.
lardayati §110 Hbsa
laddhfi (WP.)past. part ‘found’ _ §15,19, 121 (2), 143 Bl.
Skt. labdha- _ §153 limbana (WP.) ‘to besmear* ||
lagg°na v i ‘to be attached’ || M. also. limm"na || M. limpne H Skt.
lagne || Skt. lagyati, lagna- lipamti' _ §155, 156 Bl.
__ §154,161 Bl. lfpp'Ina bt. ‘to besmear’ |] H.
I&lia m. ‘gain’ || Skt. labha- npana || Skt lipyate
_ §138,147 — §143,161

1. lajj /. ‘shame* || M. laj ||Skt. lfilia m. ‘iron* || Skt. loha-

lajja __ §49,143,152, 185 Bl. _ §142,147
IShda m. ‘frying pan* || Skt.
2. lajj /. ‘rope’ l|Skt. rajju-
loliabhanda- §134
_ §143 it, 152
16htiya m. ‘iron-monger* || Skt.
lak(h)tr /. ‘line* || Skt lekha ts. loha+hatta+ika- __ §134
_ §136
I5rha ?ii. ‘stone-roller; strange-
lakkar m. ‘stick* || II. Panj. laura ners* || Skt. lsdha- _ 126
‘penis’ ||Nep. Iauro ‘stick* || if. Ifi m. ‘soft hair, down* || il. 18
lakda Skt lakuta-: "Jakhuta* (v) Skt lQman-
. *_ §64,177 Bl. — 103, 119,140 Bl.
lalctrl m. ‘dyer* || Ski. mla+kara luh&r in. ‘blacksmith’ [| Skt.
— §58 16hakara- _§85, 103, JS6
lamba adj. m. ‘long* || W. 1*. m8 /. ‘mother’ || M. mal j| Skt.
lamma || ill. 18b |j Skt. lamba-
_ §155 £1. mat}* — §115 Bl.
langlPna v.i. ‘to pass, cross’||M. macch m. ‘iish’ || M.
masa || Skt.
laipgl ne j| Skt langhate matsya- _ 167 Bl.
_ §55 Bl. niacchar m. ‘gnat’ ||
Skt maksa
— §167
las f. ‘rope’ |( Skt. rasmi-l madiii in. ‘magician * || Skt.
— §143 it mantrakura- §155
Intt /. ‘leg’ || II. lat || Skt. Iattfi madham /. ‘churning stick |] Skt.
— §152 manthana- §b’7,155
 120

magar perp. ‘after’ || Poth. /. mill! m, ‘gaidener’ (|Skt. malin-

magg ‘road’.AX. mag ‘road’. M. ___ $44,103
mag ‘road’ Skt. marga— 22 Bl. man- pref. ‘not’ || M. ‘ra&id’
‘stupid’ ||Skt. manda- _ $155
magghar m, ‘X. of a month51|
Skt margasira_ $22,127, 1(53 mfihak in. ‘gem, jewel’ || Skt.
marbkya
magh in. ‘X. of a month’ H WP. _ $64,123, 140, 161, 487
mall |j M. main, maliQ || Skt.
man&kkba adj. m. ‘blind’ || Skt.
magha- ts. — 133? BL
mandaksa- $155
mfth m. ‘black bean’ |) Skt. mand in. ‘charm’ || WP. mandar
m&?a* . $U5, 145 Skt. mantra- $155
inahl f. ml ‘belt of a wheel’ (j DQ&ndri (WP.) tn. ‘magician’ ||
Skt. malya - — $123 Skt. mantrika- $155
mancAra m, ‘one who sells
mS'gha adj. m. ‘costly, dear5 1J
bangles etc.’ || Skt. manikara-
M. raahSg || Skt. mahargha-
• _ $134,163 BL _ $101
mungana vt. ‘to ask’ || M.
m&ih /. ‘buffalo’ || WP. majjh l| magne ||Skt. margati __ $22 Bl.
AI. mbais |i Skt. mahi$I
manhSnma m. ‘destitution of
_ $80, 134,160 BL
milk’ || Skt. manda+dbainava-
majilli/. mddei ’ || Skt. meh- __ $155
ji?th& __ $25,189
manja in. ‘bedstead’ || maca |
m&jjlia m. ‘the majh country’ |[ M. mac ||Skt. manca-
M. maj' centre’ |j Skt. madhya- — 139,1.55 Bl.
- $161 (2) Bl.
mann"na vt. ‘lo believe’ || AI.
makkar in. ‘spider’ |j AL makad maun§ |J Skt. manyte
Skt. markka- _163 Bl. — 161 (4) Bl.
ra&kkhai? w. ‘butter’ || M. minnS /. ‘ill luck’ |) Skt. maudi-
maklian ]| Skt. raraksana- man- __ 155
- $162 Bl.
mappa m. ‘measure’ |j M. map
mfikkhi /, ’fly’ || A£. masi II Skt. Skt. mapya- __ $161 Bl.
maksika _ $103,138,167 Bl.
marhl /. ‘tomb’ || M. madhi ||Skt.
maliaulira m. ‘life’s or hus¬ matha- — ’$138 Bl.
band’s maternal uncle’ H Skt.
mas m ‘flesh’ || s. masu; s mos,
matula+svasura _$134
maIPna vt. ‘to occupy’ || Skt. gen. maz&i || M. mas, mis || Skt.
mallati _$129 maqisa- — $160 Bl.
m&'lan /. ‘wife nf a gardener’ masSd m. ‘end of a month’ ||Skt.
Skt. malini $G4 masanta- sts. __ $155
 121

maslto wi. ‘burning place* || M. mitt m. ‘friend’ ||Skt. mitra_§19

mhasan || Skt. smasana- (loan mlttha adj. m. ‘sweet’ ||M.mitha
from H.) _ 167 Bl. Skt. mista- _ §i66
mass /. ‘growing moustache’ nilltl /. ‘earth’ H M. mail U
Skt gmasStu _ §28,162,167 Dog. mitt? (dental tt) |i Skt.
m&ssi /. ‘mother’s sister’ || M. liifttika _ §138, 139, 170 vi Bl.
mavsi || Skt. matr^vasr- m6ea past pait. ‘dead' || H. mna
— §165 Bl. Skt. uipta- _ §98,170 ii
mat (/)= mark (?) qv ts. in6lila m. ‘pestle’ |J M. musaj
mater /. ‘step-mother’ || Skt.* Skt. musala- _§76 Bl.
matritara- — §103. ni6pri m. ‘leader,||Skt. mukliara-
mattlia m. ‘forehead’ U M. — §76
matha || Skt. mastaka- niQkla adj. m. ‘kose’ i| J. Skt.
__ §152,166 Bl. mutkala- _§38
maltha m. ‘fritter’ || Skt. mr&ta- m6ttha mi. ‘kind of grass' || Skt.
— §96 musta ___ §38
mattl /. ‘big earthen vessel’USkt. m6t(i m. ‘pearl’ [| M. motl || Skt.
mpttika? marttika _ §97 mauktika- _§153 Bl
m&ulna vi ‘to bloom’ H Skt. inu?Las (WP.) in. ‘husband’ ||Skt.
ruukula- — 36 manu?ya- _ §187
mails /. ‘day on which sun and mucch /. ‘moustache' || Skt.
moon are in conjunction’ || M. $niasiu-Pkt. maipsu
av&s li Skt. amivasya ts. — §28,167
_§5!, 140 Bl. muddli m. ‘beginning* jj Skt.
mhais /. ‘buffalo’ contain, of mtirdhan __ §24, 49,170 tit
math and bh&is — §179 muli m. ‘mouth’ |j M. mukh HSkt.
mfdtlha in. ‘ram’ jl M. mldha mukha- _ §113,138, 139 Bl.
Skt. merlhra — §162 Bl. mukk^na vi. ‘to be finished’ |J
mill /. ‘rain’ li Skt. megha- O. niukvn il M. mukijg || Skt.
_ §78,115,138 mukta- *mukna- §154 (i) Bl.
mijjh /. ‘marrow’ || Skt. majjS, munj /. ‘a kind of grass’ || Skt.
m£das- _§26,126 munja _ §155
inline f. ‘chilli’ || M. mill [| Skt. munnana vt. ‘to shave’ |1 Skt
niarica- * maricya mundayati _§155
__ §26, 64,187 Bl. miit m. ‘urine’ || M. id. || Skt
missa adj. m. ‘mixed’ || M. mtitra- §15,139 Bl.
miss! /. ‘tooth powder ]| Skt. mutth /. ‘fist’ |i M. mu^h H Skt.
miSra- _ §139,162 Bl. must! __ §15, 3 39, 166 Bl.
mltna / /‘tobe obliterated’ |JSkt. nnbftrnfi rt. ‘to finish’ [| trans.
— §13G form nibbarna (nirvartate-
 122

nirvfta-) $109 nar /. ‘vein’ |j M. nad ||Skt. uadi

nabhAg [n9pca:g] adj. ‘unlucky’ — §138 Bl.
Skt. nirbhaghya- §89 nar (a) gl /. ‘tangerina |j Skt.
naccana vi. ‘lo dance’ || Skt. naranga _ §187
Djdyati _§161 (2) nar6(e)a adj. in. ‘wholesome’
nacOrna vt. ‘to squeeze’ H Skt. Skt. niroga-
niscotate — §109,166,170 v — §58,101, 138, 139
nadhal [natca:l] adj. ‘weak’ nasang adv. ‘certainly’ || Skt.
Pauj. na-fcihal • _ §89 ni&ankam — §58,155,167,189
nah&rna m. ‘nail-cutter’ || Skt. nussana v.i. ‘to run’ || M. nas$e
nakha+karana- §103 Skt. nasyati — §161 (8) Bl.
n&i /. ‘stream’ || M. na (h)l nalArna v.t. ‘to clarify’ |j Skt.
Sktnadt -.§115,138 Bl. nistarayati §109
n&i m. ‘barber’ || M. nail /. nattli f. ‘nose-ring’ || M. nath
lihavi || Sat. napitd- Skt nasta — 166 Bl.
... §103,138 Bl. ndtthana v.i. ‘to run’j|Skt. na?ta-
nain /. ‘wife of a barber’ || WP. — §139,166
nain || Panj. nai+n < Skt.-inI 1. n&u adj. ‘nine’ |] M. nav.
— §101,106 Skt. niva - 115,139 BL
niij m. ‘cereal’ |] Skt. annAdya- 2. nan m. ‘name’ |] WP. n£u ||
§51 M. nSv. || Skt. nAma
nakbfirna vt. ‘to separate’||Skt.f §106, 112, 115, 119,139,140 Bl.
— §109 m&uh m. ‘nail’ |J also n&ih || M.
nakh [| Skt. nakha-
nakk m. ‘nose’ H M. nak Skt.
— §72, 74,115,138 Bl.
uas+ka*f — § 166 Bl.
naul m ‘mungoose’ ||Skt. nakula-
nak&mma adj. m. ‘useless’ || M.
— 101
nikami || Skt. ni§karma-
— §166, 189 Bl. nena[k] v t. ‘to carry’. || M.
none (| Skt. nayati — §103 Bl.
nam = an am q. v.
lu Ara adj. m. ‘separate’ |j Skt.
nan&d /. ‘husband's sister’||WP.
anyfikara- — 161 (4)
nanan Skt. nananda
— §155,187 n§b m. ‘affection’ |] Skt. sneha-
— §167
nanga adj. m. ‘naked’ (| M.
naga || Skt. nagna- nembu m. ‘ lemon ’ [| Skt.
— §154 (1) Bl. •naimbuka-mimbuka- — §34
ndnglPna i i. ‘to pass, cross’HSkt. neSda m. ‘invitation’ || also
• langhate, nanknati 1 nifida || cf. M. avalne |[ Skt.
— §143 (iv) nimantra- _ §60, 101,119 Bl.
uaputtfi adj. m. ‘sonless’ H Skt. nera m. ‘vicinity’ || H. neti |jSkt.
mSputra- — §58,166,189 nikata- 103 Bl.
 123

nbftuna v.i. ‘to bathe’ || M. dttliii (WP.) adj. m. ‘belonging

nahne II Skt. sn&ti _ 167 Bl. to a camel’ ||Skt. mi?Ira-
nh$ra in. ‘darkness’ || Skt. ’ _ §10,!
•andhakara- '.andhakara- del in. ‘a wandering tribe’ |j Skt.
_ §51,103, 138 6d ra- __ §15
nibbarna v.i. ‘to be finished’ |] pabb m. ‘forepart of the foot’
M. nivatn§ |j Skt. nirvartati, Skt. padma-, padva-?
nirvpta- — §109 Bl. _ §154 (4)
nibhna v.i. ‘to be finished’ || M. pabban (Mill.) || /. ‘water-lily’
nibhne || Skt. nlrvahati Skt. padmini §64,154 (4)
__ §127 Bl. pacSdh m. * western half a
nlcla adj. in. ‘motionless’ || M. country’ ||Skt. pascardha-
nical |[ Skt. nicala- _ §166 Bl. _ §170 «i
pacna v. i. ‘to be digested’||Skt.
n!d /. ‘sleep’ll WP. nfndar || M.
pacyate _ §121 (4). 16L
nid || Skt. nidra
_ §7, 25, 114,162 Bl. pacchS /. ‘western wind ’ || WP.
paced Skt paScima- _ §116
nikkalna v. i. ‘to come out’ || cf.
pacel adj. ‘twenty-five ’ |j WP.
M. nikal ‘passage’||Skt. #ni?ka-
panjhi Skt. panca viipsali
lati cf. niskalanam — §166 Bl.
_ §117
nimm /. ‘the nim tree’ || M. niipb
pach5n°na r. t. ‘to recognise’
Skt. nimba- _ §139,155 Bl.
Skt. pratyabhijanati _§125
nimmal adv. ‘clear’ |j K. nimba J
pachand°nfi v.t. ‘to thrash,
Skt. nirmala- _ §163
winnow’ || H. eh&tna Skt.
nimm&jh^a (WP.) adj. m. •pracchantati __ §189
‘sorrowful’ l| Skt. nimna-Knpa- paddana v. i. ‘to break wind' H
dhyana- — §157 M. padne ||Skt. pardati
nirakh /. ‘ knowledge ’ |J M. _ §170 Hi BL
nirakhnS ||Skt. nirik?a palm m. ‘foot path’ j| also p$ha,
_ §67,189 Bl. pdiha, l|Skt. patha-_ §75,13S
nissarna. y. t. ‘to issue ’ ||Skt.
p£hl5g hi. ‘bedstead’ 1| M. palSg
nissarati — §167
Skt. paryanka- _§112,121
nittarna ». i. ‘to be squeezed’
|| WP. niccarna intrans form (3), 128,143,155,161 (6), 187
nacfirna q. v. — §33, 109 Bl.

nOh /. ‘son’s wife’ || M. sun Skt. pdina v. i. ‘to lie down’ || M.

snu?Jt — §77,167 Bl. padne || Skt. pntati
_ §103,170V Bl.
nun m. ‘salt’ ||WP. luri |J M. Ion
Skt. lavana- pSLid /. ‘foot of bedstead’ || WP.
— §142, 143 (VI) Bl. pnSd, ||Skt. padanta- — §155
 124

paih /. ‘dawn1 (| also panh ||Skt. paltittha adj. in. ‘first born* [|
prabiiS $72, 138 also palettha con lam. of paihlla
paihlla adj. nu ‘first* || M palula and jSttha- — 179
Skt. prathama- || Pkt. #pahilla palthi f. ‘sitting on buttocks’ ||
_ $133,170 (1) 137 Bl. M. palat || Skt. paryasti-
p&inti adj. ‘thirty-five’ |j Skt. _ 143 Bl
pancatriipsat- — $30 patnft m Meg of a bedstead’ ||Skt.
pair m. ‘foot’ || Skt. *padir6- pada- — $140
— $10 L panel)! m. ‘bird’ || WP. painehf
paj£h adj. ‘fifty’ |i M. pannas II M. pamchi || Skt. paksip-
Skt. pancaSat - $30 Bl.
_ $112,121, (3), 117, 135,145 pdndarS adj. ‘ fifteen ’ |[ M.
Bl. paipdhra || Skt. pancadaSa-
pakb&na m, 1 proverb ’ |j Skt. __ $175 Bl.
prakhyana- _$161, 186 pandh in. ‘distance, journey’ ||
p&kka adj. m. ‘firm’ || M. pike M. p&mth ||Skt. panthah-
Skt. pakva- _$165 Bl. — $155 Bl.
pakkh m. ‘side, party’ || Skt. pindhi vi. ‘ traveller ’ |f Skt.
pak§&- _$167 panthika-H _ $155
pSni m. ‘water’ J| M. pap! || Skt.
pal&gna (Poth) m. ‘string
fastened round the neck of a panfya- _ $123, 137, 140 Bl.
pot’ ||Skt. pralagna-?_$187 panj adj. ‘five’ || M. pSc || Skt.
palJh w. ‘kind of tree’ || M. p6nca- _ $ 49,137, 155 Bl.
pa]as || »Skt pala$&- pan jam & adj. in. ‘fifth’ || WP.
_ $125,186 Bl. panjavft [| Skt. pancamji-
p&lamna (WP.) v.i. to hang ||Skt. _ $140
pralambate ...... $155, 187 panna in. ‘leaf, page’ || M. pan
Skt. paini- _ $163 Bl.
palan m. ‘saddle’ || M. palan
Skt. paryana- __ $129,143 Bf. pantal! adj. ‘ forty five 9 || H.
pdlatna v. t. ‘to change, turn’ pSitalfs HSkt. pancacatvariipSat
Skt. paryasta-, || Pkt. pallatta'i - $30
— $143, i 87 par —prefix ‘ secondary ’ [| M.
palattan /. ‘yellowness’ || Panj. pad- |1 Skt. pra-, prati-?
pi!a+-ttan < Skt. -tvana- — $173 Bl.
— $63,165 p&rakh f. ‘ examination, know-
p&lla m. ‘border of a garment’ ledge'IJK. pans, parakhne ||Skt
|| M. pala || Skt. pallava-? pariksa _ $67, 189 Bl.*
— $164 Bl. paraus [s]im. ‘neighbour’ || M.
palosna v.t. ‘to pat’ contam. of padosi |1 Skt. prativ^sin-
pal- and p5s- _$179 $170 (1) Bl.
 125

parb&l m. ‘ trichiasis ’ || WP. pastjj"na v. i. ‘to sweat’ || Skt.

parwal |j Skt. *pravala-! §173 prasvidyate
parbliat [parb«a:t] /.‘morning’ — §121, 161 (2), 165, 189
Skt. prabhata-1*. — §89 pas)na. m. ‘perspiration’ || Skt.
parcbitti /. ‘a shelf under a prasvinna- __ §189
roof' |1 Skt. *prachatti-? §173 pfissa m. ‘side’ || Skt. parSvd-
pardftdda m. 'great-grandfather* — §19, 24, 163,165
Panj. par-<pra-+dadda pas(sa)H /. ‘rib’ | M. pasoji
_ §173 Skt. pariii- __ 65, 163 Bl.
pardand m. ‘an after tooth’ || patiauhra m. ‘father-in-law’s
Skt. *pradanta-t or Panj. par- younger brother’ || Skt. pitriya
< pra-+dand. — §173 -l-5v4£ura- — §131
patt m. ‘foliage, leaf’ || WP.
pardli&n tn* [pard«a:n] adj.
pBttar || M. pat || Skt. pattra-
‘foremost’ || Skt. pradhiina- t*.
— §89 - §162 Bl.
pfittha m. ‘muscle’ll Skt. vjMdhi-
pdrhua v. t ‘ to read ’ |j M. form of prstlQ- _ §22
padlme II Skt. pathati patthar m. ‘stone’ || M. pathar
__ §91.138,170 (?) Bl. Skt. prasfara- _ §166 Bl.
par6sna v.t. ‘to serve meals’ || pattT /. ‘bandage’ || M. pat ||
WP. prihpa || M. parasn§ F Skt. patta- _ 152 Bl.
Skt. pariveiayati _ §142 Bl. pauna v.t. ‘ tn get * || Skt.
prapayati _ §162
pardtta m. ‘great-grandson’ ||
pSu /. ‘itch’ |j WP. pg || Skt.
Skt. prapantra- — §173
paman- —103,119,140
pirsS adj. ‘day after to-morrow’ pafta m. ‘wooden sandal' || Skt.
Skt. paraivah — §187
•padnkaka-: paduka __ §103
part6h (WP.) /. ‘son’s wife’ || panh f. ‘dawn’ j|also pa ill 7. v
also patr6h || Skt. putravadhu- Skt. prabhg «... § 162
_ §187 pann nr. adj. ‘three quarters’ ||
pas prep, ‘with, near’ || M. pas M. pau? || Skt. padona-
Skt. parsve — §49 Bl. — §101, 138 Bl.
p&sarna v.t. ‘to stretch’|J M. pg&r w. ‘affection’ || M. pyar
pasarpe || Skt. prasarati- Skt. priyakara-
_ §186 Bl. - §60,101,103, 142 Bl.
 126

p$ha = palia q. r. phind f. ‘ball’ || Skt. pinda-?

p§o m. ‘father’ it WP. plu,UK. p?5 — *124
Sktpitr- — *60,101,103 phftrna v. t. ‘to. break’--H Skt.
phdggan m. *N. of a month’ ||cf. ‘sphfltayate’ _*108,166
M. phag ‘ HolT song ’ || Skt. phull m. ‘flower’ || M. phu1|| Skt.
ph&lguna- phulla- , — *137 Bl.
— *22, 64,137, 140,164 Bl. phtittnna v. i. ‘to burst’ || M.
phftha m. ‘snare, noose’ |[ M. phutnS || Skt. sphutyat?
phasa ‘dice’ || Skt. p&s\- _ *108, 166 Bl.
_ 124, 160 Bl. picch /. ‘rice water’ |f M. p!s||Skt.
phal m. ‘frnit’ J| M. pha} || Skt. piceha _*152 Bl.
phdla- — 49, 137,143 Bl. piceha m. ‘the hind part’HSkt.
phftla m. ‘ ploughshare * || M. pa§ca- „ . _*26,166
phaja || Skt. pbila-_ *137 Bl. pfgh /. ‘swing’ || Skt. prankha
phal&h m. ‘kind of tree’ = palah — *78,121 (3), 155
q. v. ... _ *57, 125
plgla adj. vn. ‘lame’ |JM. p8g(la)
phambh /. '‘fine wool’ H s. pas
Skt. pangu- _ * 2fi, 155 Bl.
Skt. pak|avan—if not from
Pers. pa§m, pamba- __ *125 pthna v.t. ‘to grind* [| ?. pexoiki
Skt. ’piipsati, I! Pkt. pissi
phdmmhan m. ‘eyelash’ || also
— 110, ICO
bhdpphan || Skt. pfiksman
_ *125 pijj m. ‘pretext’ || WP. pajj ||
Skt. paryaya- ...... *26
phan m. ‘snake’s hood’ || M.
phan || Skt. phapi- plla adj. m. ‘yellow’ || M. pivja
Skt. pita'a-
— 137, 140 Bl.
_*63, 103,143 Bl.
phnngh m. feather, wing’ || M.
pinda m. ‘bndy’||M. Skt. pfnda-?
pftkh || Skt. pS,ksd-
— *114,125 Bl. — *155

ph&rba m. * blade, nib ’ || M. pinj°!a adj. m. = plgla q. v.

pbaras || Skt. pa"a§u* pinjflna v. t. ‘to card (cotton)’
— * 124,145 Bl. || also pinn#na || Skt .pinjayati
— *155
pbfitna v. i. ‘to be split’ H M.
pbatpS || Skt. sphatyate pinjara w. ‘cage’ (] M. p#jra
_ *107,161 Bl. Skt. pinjara- — *26,155 Bl.
 127

pinn mi. ‘ball’ll M. piipd || Skt. p6uua mi. ‘ sugarcane ’ || also

pi^(Ja- . _ §15, 137, 155 Bl. p6nda || Skt. paundru-
pipla luul m. -root of long pep — $38, 103, 155
per’ || M. piippjl [| Skt. pippali- p6ttii m. ‘grandson’ |j Skt.
§152 Bl. pautra- — §15, 20,162
pippul m. ‘the pipal tree* || Skt. pdttlia uu ‘book’ || Al. pothi ||
pippala- — §12 Skt. pustaka-: ‘puustaka- cf.
Pens. pust, || 1’eli. post §38 Bl.
pir /. ‘pain’ || Skt. pifla
■pp(an) sullix for making
_ §15, 127,138
abstract nouns also pan (a)
pirlia mi. ‘footstool’ || M. pidhe Skt. -tva(na)- _ §i6u
Skt. pitha- _ §15,138 Bl. puidh mi. ‘eastern pait of a
pittana V. t. ‘to beat (breasts) ’ country’ || Skt. purvardha-
II M. pitne || Skt. pista-1 — §170 tii
— §136 Bl. pucch“na o.t. ‘to ask’ || M. puspe
pitta.tn. ‘bodily constitution’ fokt. ppcchati
Skt. pitta- §152 — §98, 137, 152 Bl.
pit$h /, ‘the. back’ || M. pith || pucli /. ‘tail ’ || W1’. pucch ||Skt.
Skt pj$tha- §97 Bl. puccha- _ §25, 152
pujlina v. f. ‘to wipe’ || 11.
pitthi /. ‘wet dal ground or
pScbna, puchua |j AL . pusp$ ||
bruised’ |l Skt, pista- §166
Skt. prOncliati, || I’kt. purpchai
polr'mi. *N. of a month’ H Skt. — §78 125 Bl.
pau?a- '‘ ‘ __ §137 pujjapa (WP.) v. i. ‘to reach’ ||
pdhau mi.‘cart9 IJSkt. pravaliana- EP. pugg*na || Skt. puryats(?)
— §162 — §24, 161(f)
p61illo adj. ‘fat (person)’ ]| Skt. punn mi. ’merit, charity’ || Skt.
punya- ts.t _ §161 (3)
pfthula- — §98,170 ii
punna (VYP.j pan/, part.*arrived’
pdkkhar m. ‘tank, lake’ J| Jl.
Skt. purpA- __ §24
pokhar H Skt. pauskara*
panned /. ‘full moon day’ || Skt.
— §105, 166 Bl.
putnima _§24, 163
pol mi. ‘hollowness’ (| M. p5l jj. pur in. ‘single stone of a mill’
Skt. pftlya* *paulya< j| AL prnla || Skt. pwla-
— 38, 129 Bl. — §13, 138 Bl.
 128

puv&iia adj.. m. ‘old1 || Poa. ratt m. ‘blood’ || M. rata ‘red’

par&na || Skt. purana- Skt. rakta- _§153 Bl.
_ §59,186 rdttl m. ‘short form of personal
ptitla m. ‘doll’ || M. id. || Skt. name Ratan’ || Skt. ratna-,
puttala- ___ §65, 12L (5) Bl. raktika __ §154 (3)
putt m..‘soiiv || WP. putta || M. rauh m. ‘juice’ || also raih, ras
put || Skt. putra- Skt. rasa- _§72, 74
— 7,15, 19 49, 137,162,170 raula m. ‘noise’ || Mul. rdla |[Skt.
(IV) Bl. rava+-la- — §105
puftha adj. m. ‘turned upside ricch m. ‘bear’ || M. ris || Skt.
down' || Skt. pf4tha-— §97> 98 yk?a- • _§99,167 Bl •
rai /. ‘mustard’ || M. id. [| Skt. rijjh“na v.i, ‘to be boiled’ ||
vajika — §138 Bl. Skt. fdhyate- _§99,161 (2)
raili"t in. = kallifc q. v._§187 rin /. ‘grains of sugar, sand, etc.’
raj hu ‘kingdom’ || Skt. rijya- rgn recorded by Maya Singh
_ §161 Skt. repu- _§39
1. rammh8na v.t. ‘to begin’ || iindi f, ‘castor’ || Skt. grapda-
Skt rabliate §155 _ §26,’ 155
2. rammh“na v.i. ‘lowing- of iinnh°na v. t. ‘to boil, cook’ ||
cows’ Skt. rarabhate • _§155 Skt. *ripdliati- __ §155
ram = ar&m q. v. rlttha. m. ‘ Soap-nut ’ [j WP. •
rainji /. ‘widow’ || M. rid || Skt* ha riff ha || M. ritha || Skt.
raijda __ §155 Bl. ari§ta- — §25, 51,132, 166 Bl.
rang m. ‘colour’ || Af. raijig II rOk adj. ‘cash’ |] Skt. raukma-
Skt. ranga- _§155 Bl. - §154 (1)
rlni /. ‘queen’ |j VI. bam || Skt. r6na i!. i. ‘to weep* || Skt. rOdati
rijni _ §154 (2) Bl. §103,170 (i)
rann f. ‘wife’ || randi ‘widow’ rfi m. ‘soft hair on the body’ ||
Skt. randa- __ §143,155 Skt. rflman- _ §103, 119
rassi /. ‘rope’ || AJ. id. || Skt. ra&li m. 1 large beans ’ || Skt.
rasiui- _ §143,167 Bl. rajamasa- __ §138
rat /. ‘night’ || M. id. Skt. WUrl- rftcua v. i. ‘to be pleasing’ ||Skt.
— §143 Bl. rucyati __ §161
 129

rO| /. ‘cotton’1| Skt. r6man- saha m. ‘hare’ | also saiha, seha

— $140 AI. sasa || Skt. $asa- ___ $75 Bl.
rukkha adj. in. ‘dry, without sihl&g m. ‘fook* |[ cf. 31. sal!
grease* ||M. rukba ||Skt. ruk«a- Skt. salyaka- _ 128,187 Bl.
— $24 bi. s&I = as&I q. V.
ruiinlfnii v. t 'to engage’ || Sat. sfii m. ‘master, saiut’ || Skt.
"rundiiati _^155 svamin- $140
itippa in. ‘silver’ |j AI. rupe ||
saihna v.i. ‘to bear, suffer’ || M.
Skt rupya- _ ^ 161 Bl.
salipe || Skt. sahaie_$147 Bl.
russ"na v. i. ‘to be angry’ || AI.
sain /. ‘ hint ’ || M. sSje || Skt.
rusrie || Ssct. rusyate
saqijnS- — $154 (2) Bl.
_ $15, 143, ltil (8) Bl.
sainti adj.* thirty-seven ’ || Skt.
sabat /. ‘courtyard’ || Ar. sabat-
saptatriqi5.it- $30
-- $57
sftjh m. ‘share’ |[ s. s&zhu |j Skt.
saber nt. /. ‘ morning’ H Skt.
saipsa $160
-savsla- _ 143 (V)
sajja adj. in. ‘right, not left*
sacc m. ‘truth’ || Amb. sane || H.
sSt'lj M. sac, saipca ||Skt satya- Skt sajja- _ $152
sakna v. i. ‘ to be able ’ || M.
— $113, 161 (2) Bl.
sad J. ‘welfare’ used in the sakne If Skt. sakuSte, sakyate-
phrase sukklt sad H Skt. s&nti- - $154 (1), 161 Bl.
_ $155 sak&rna v. t. ‘to honour a lrnpdi’
sadda m. ‘invitation’ j| M. sad || AI. sakar ‘ honour ’ || Skt.
Skt. sabda- _ $19, 153 Bl. satkarayati BL
sakk m. ‘bark’11 WP. srakk-||
s&ddhe alj. ‘increased by half*
Skt. salka-: *sarka- _ $164
|| M. sadiiS ||Skt. sardha-
sakkar /. ‘sugar, not refined’ |1
— $144 Bl.
Al. sak(h)ar ||Skt. Sarkara
sadlidr m. ‘red veimillion’ ]| M.
_ $163 Bl.
seipddr || Skt. sindura-
S&la m. ‘wife’s brother’ |j AI. id.
— §126 Bl.
Skt. syala- _$ 16 L (8) Bl.
sSg /. ‘point* || M. sSku II Skt. SalhibbI /. ‘dampness* || Pers.
sanku- _$25 Bl. sailabi 128
sail in. ‘breath’ || Skt. svasa- sail in. dart’ll Ai. sal;|Skt.Salya-
__ >145, 165 _ $ 129 Bl.
 130.

saluna adj. m. ‘salted' || Skt. savhS /. ‘rape seed’ || Skt. sar-

saiavana- . _§ 142 ?apa- — $ 163,174
samh&lna vt. ‘to protect’|| Skt. sarikkha adj. ‘similar’ || also
sarabhalayati _$ 196 s rkha || M sarkha || Pkt *
f?amjh“na n.t. ‘to understand ’ M.
sarikha- $ 189 BL
samajne || Skt. sambudliyate
sarkha=sankkha q.v. — § 187
■; ; — § 187 Bl.
samm /. ‘ferrule’ || Skt. Sainba- sass(u)= /. ‘wife’s or husband’s
— $ 155 mother’ || M. sasu J| S' t. sva-
sru- _ $49,162, i 65 Bl.
sanSlia hi. ’message’ || Skt.
sat m. ‘essence, power’ || M. id.
sande|a- — $ 114,155
Skt. suttv£- _$ 165 BL
sang/, ‘modesty’ || Set. &ank£
sath m. ‘coinpany’ll M. id. ||Skt.
— $ 144,135
sarthfi- * __ $ 17()iiiBL
sangal=stingal q.v,
satt adj. ‘seven* || M. sat || Skt.
sangh m. ‘tbroat’HSiet. §ahklia.?
saptan-
— § 155
sangtleana o.t. ‘to shrink’ {| Skt. ■ _ $ 19, 49, 144, 153 Bl.
saipkucya'c satth adj. ‘sixty’ || M. sath||Skt.
sanjh /.. ‘evening‘ |j M. sSjh sasti- $ 144 Bl.
SktiSandbyS" satthal m. ‘thigh’ ||Skt. sakthiu-.
...... $87, loo, 16, (2) Bl.
. ...... $ 64,153
s&njhl in. .‘share-holder’I) Skt. ’
s&tthi.... m. ‘companion’ || Skt.
saip?a- ... — $.160 sauthika- $ 170.iii.
s an tail. adj. ‘forty-seven1 || Skt.
saptacalvfiriipsat- . ...... $ 30 sattu m. ‘meal olr parched grain*
H M. satu II Skt. saktu-
sappm. ‘serpent’ || Amb. samp|[
M. sap l| Skt. sarpa- — $ 103, 153 BL
— $ 15,10 BL sau adj. ’hundred' || Skt.sata-
sai&p sftrnuhna=srap, srauhna — $138,144
q.v. • ••
sauh /. loath’ || Skt. Sapatha-
sarl&h m. * headache ’ j|
_ $ 116.138, 144
L’anj. sir + ? |] Skt. vyadlii-
- §161 (7) sauhra m. ‘father-in-law* || M.
sarbJ A ‘scarf’ || M. sfuji || Skt. sasrn || Skt. svasnra-
miz ’ _ 126 Bl. — $ 143, 145, 165 BL
 131

saula adj. m. ‘black’ H M. savja. 1. si past tense ‘was, were* H

Ski. Syiiva-T. gyamala- Lab. ha etc. || Skt. aslt ?-
_ $ 101,161 Bl. _ §145
saun m. ‘X. of a mouth* || Skt. 2. si f. ‘furrow, ploughing’ ||
Sravaiji _ $ 101,142,162 Skt. Sita- _ § 103
ss'umda prep. past, ‘sleeping* si f. ‘boundary* || Skt. simaii-
Skt. svapatt- _ ^ 117 — 103,119
siddlia adj. in. ‘straight, honest’
sant (H). /. ‘co wife* || AT. savat
Skt. siddlia- _ § 152
Skt. sapdtnl
sfdhra adj. in. ‘simple* used in
_ $154 (3), IS7 Bl.
phrase Sidhra pudhra || Skt.
Sava adj. ‘(one) and a quarter*!!
sidhra- § 162
M. id. || Skt. sapada-
sijjhana c. t. ‘to liave a settle-
_ $ 138 Bl.
ment* ||M. si;j$e j| Skt. sidhyati
seil m. ‘winter* [] Skt. sitakala-
_ § 161 (2) Bl.
__ $ 60,101,103, 133, 143, 186
sikkh /. ‘advico* || Skt. sik?a
s&lh m. ‘personal name* || also
- § 15, 167
sfcddhu cf. seth || Skt. srgstha-
sib adj. ‘cool* insil subhau f| M.
— $ 126 sila ‘cold’ ||Skt. sitala- _ § 103
s6ha=sdha q.v. _ $ 145
also slllha ‘damp* _ § 128 Bl.
sShra m. ‘chaplet’ || M, sera
sing m. ‘horn' J| M. id. $!ipg||Skt.
Skt s£khara- — $ 133 Bl.
Synga- — § 97,155 BL
sPj=eh Pj q.v.
singh ?w. ‘used in personal
sSlkhari /. ‘soap stone* || Skt. names* j| Skt. a^ipliMs_§ 175
$aila+f _§128. sinjana v.t. ‘to water’ || M.
sSlla m. ‘spear* H Skt. Salya (1J siipcp5 || Skt. sinedti /
— §29 _ ^ 19, 155 Bl.
spm/. ‘flat bean* || Skt. Simba: slrhi (H) /. ‘ladder* || Skt.
Saimbya, also simba_ § 34, 155 srpdhi- _§ 78
1. sSth m. ‘banker* || cf. s5<Jh, || sittana v.t. ‘to throw’ || WP.
M. SPt || Skt. 5rS?thin- satt-, sutt-||M. $it||Skt. || spstn-
— § 166 Bl. or Sis^a- __ 5 97, 136
2. ssth m. ‘expressed sugar¬ siuna ?n. ‘gold’ || also se5na ||
cane’ || M. sit || Skt. si?ta- M. sonellSkt. suvarija-, svai^ta-
— § 34 Bl. •sivaina- _ § 37, 163 B1.
 132

s6hna adj. m, ‘beautiful* || Skt saJanvd||Skt. sulagna- __ $ 187

iobhana- _ §138 suuanfi -v.t. 'to- hear* || Skt,
sdla adj. ‘sixteen* || M. s5la||Skt. • 4j*n6ti _^ 98,140
?6da4an- § 144 Bl. sundh /. ‘dry ginger* |j M. 4Qth
srauhna v.t. ‘to praise* || Skt Skt. 4 ant hi- __ 155 Bl.
slaghatP- § 138,172 sune&r m. ‘goldsmith’ || Skt.
srakk (WP.) m. ‘bark'=EP. sakk suvanjakara- _§ 101
q.v. sungal vi. ‘chain’ll M. s?tkaj
srap vi. ‘curse’ || Skt. Skt. Sphkhala-
— 176 — § 96, 98, 136 Bl.
•fibar m. ‘monday* || Skt.
sungarna vi. ‘to contract* || Skt.
sCmvara- —. § 103
*saijikutati- _§109
eubb m. ‘swab to dear utensiis*
stihgh°na v.t. ‘to smell* || M.
M. suipb|| Skt. $ulba-
suipgnS II Skt.* Spakhati-
— $164 Bl.
stth /. ‘news* || Skt.* 4odhi-c/. _ § 33, 93, 115 Bl.
bOdhi- _ % 78. sfmhdpp (WP.)=sub6ppan q.v.

stlha adj. m. ‘red’ || Skt. sSbha- _ § 165

- §78 sunna adj. m. ‘empty’ || WP.

auhtig m. ‘union with a husband’ sunja || M. suna |1 Skt. $unya-
• Skt. saubhagya- § 161 _ §24, 161(4) Bl.
Buh^ppa? (WP.)' m. ‘beauty’ stir w. ‘hog* || Skt. siikard-
Skt.* subhatvana (?)_ § 165 ~ § 103,138
suhduna v.t. ‘to be pleasant’||Skt sur&g /.‘underground passage*
•sukhapayati § 138 || M. suraipg || Skt. surunga
stihni /.‘broom’ || Skt. 45dhanT- — § 64,112, 187 Bl.
_ §88 slitna-tf.t. ‘to draw as wire’ ||
sul/,‘needle’pf. sui||Skt. suci Skt. sfitrayati- §110
_ $ 15, 138 Bl.
?ut m. ‘thread’ || ftf. id. || Skt.
sujjhana v.t. ‘to occur to mind’
slitra- - •§ 7, 19,162 Bl.
Skt. sudhyat? _§ 161 (2)
sntta past part, ‘slept, asleep* ||
sukka adj. m. ‘dry* sukkhft m.
Skt supta-
‘a particular plant* || M.
_ § 19,97, 144, 153
8uk(h)a H Skt. ftfifk*
— § 166 Bi. tacchBna v.t. ‘to hew* H M.
slilagna v.t. ‘to be kindled’ |[ G-. tasng || Skt. tdk§ati _ 167 BI.
 133

ta<Jdana v.t. ‘to open wide’ ||Skt. tappaj* m. ‘mat* jj WP. trappar
atrdati _ § 171 Skt. talpa-:* tarpa-
tihnavA ‘to drive away’ j| WP — § 163, 164
tral pa |j M. taras || Skt. tiirna v.i. ‘to cross’ j| M. lan:S
trasayati _ § 162 Bl. Skt. tarati- _ § 108 Bl.
tfika m. ‘copper coin '||Skt. tankn- tarakh (WP) m. ‘liyena* || M.
— § 137 taras || Skt. fnraksa-
takhftn m, ‘carpenter* || Skt. — § 187 Bi.
t&ksan- _ § 57,167 tatlhra m. ‘sandpiper* J| Ski.
tukk°na v.t. ‘to estimate* |j Skt. tittibhat _§ 137
tarkayati- _§ 137, 163 tfitta arfj. m. ‘hot* || Skt. taptfi-
t&kkala m. ‘spindle* || WP. __ § 137, 97. 153
trakk*"la H Skt. tarku- tattl f. ‘screen* || WP. tratti ||.\1.
— §61, 163 tat, origin not known.
t&kkari /. ‘balance* H WP. — § 171 Bl.
trakkflpl || Skt. tarka-(?) tt(an) suff. used in forming
— §163 abstract nonns = pp(an) tj.v.
Lalnu v.i. ‘to go away* || M.
_ §165
tajne ||Skt. tvalati- _§ 137 Bl.
tau m. ‘heat*||WP. ta||Skf. tapa-
t&mba m. ‘copper* || M. tfibe J)
_ § 103,137
WP. trama |) Skt. tamra-
tPddha ad), w. ‘crooked, slanting*
— § 162,175
Wl\ trPdha, |1 H. t@rha, origin
t£n*na v.t. ‘to stretch* f| M.
not certain _ §171
tann || Skt. tanayati-
teh&ea adj. m. ‘thirsty* || Skt.:
— § 140 Bl.
tand m. f. ‘gnr, thread' || M. •ffSayita- _§ 60
tftipt il Skt. Untu- tPl m. ‘oil* |j Skt. taila-: #tailya«
-- § 137, 155 Bl. __ §129
tang f. ‘leg*|1 Ski. tanka_§ 137 thabba m. ‘bundle9 || M. thava
tfipna v.i. ‘to be heated* || Skt. Skt. stabaka- — & 177 BI.
tapyatP § 107,161 thah w. /. ‘bottom, depth’ Jj M.
t&pp°na v.i. ‘to jump* || Potb. tha||Skt. sthagha-? —§ 166 Bl.
trapp'pa || Skt. •tarpati: thftli f. ‘plate* || M. thaja || Skt.
Ifpyati _§ 163 slbali- _ § 166 Bl.
 134

thammh in. ‘column’ || Skt. tfkkha adj. m. ‘sharp’ || WP. L.

stambha- — § I’m, 16b trikkha||.U. tikha||Skt. tTksri^.-
than m. ‘toat, adder ’ |1 M. thinfi _ 4 23, 167 Bl.
Skt. stana- — § 166 Bl til m. ‘sesame seed’ [| Skt. tlla-
than! arfv. ‘through’ilSkt slh&na- — 4 137
‘ _ 4 166 tin m. ‘blade of grass* |1 M. tan
thdn<Jha adj. m. ‘cold’ II M. Skt. tjrpa- — 4 137 Bl.
thaipda || Skt. stabdha- tinn adj. ‘three’ || M. tin || Skt.
_^ 171 Bl. tri^i- _ 4 7,162 Bl.
thathgra m. ‘brazier’ || Skt. tvdstf- tinnh*na v.t. ‘to prick ’||Skt.
-L § 171 •tyndhati cf. VtrTT, tjnfidhu-
thau f. ‘place, room’ || WP. thS -.4167
Skt. stti&man-' tircha adj. w. ' ‘slanting’ || M.
_ 4 103, 112, 119, 140
tirka || Skt. tirasca-
Lh&nkar m. ‘lord’|| H. thakur — 65,166, 181,187 Bl.
Skt. thakkura- — 4 137
ttttar m. ‘partridge’ || M. titar
th$li f. ‘palm* || Skt. hastatala-
Skt. tittirl- _ 4 64,152 Bl.
— 4 103
toh m. ‘hnsk’ H Skt. tu?a- •
thSra m. ‘aged person’ || M.
— 4 76,145
thSrllSkt. sth&vira- __ 4 101 Bl. t61na v.t. ‘to weigh’ || Skt.
th6h!lu m. ‘fat man’ || also tolayati 4 108
thulla l| Mul. thohl || M. tlmli, t6rna v.t. ‘to break’ |[ Skt.
thull, th5r||Skt. sthula, sthaulya- trOtayati _ 4 108,162, 171
— 4 38 Bl.
trai (WP). adj. ‘three’ |] Skt.
thdra adj. m. ‘little’ || M. thoda
trayah — 4 105
Skt. stok&- . — 4 166 Bl.
trfcj (WP). /. ‘dew’ || EP. tel
tia adj. m. ‘third’ || also tijja
Skt. tftiya- _ 4 97,142, 170 ii origin not known. _ 4 176
1. till / ‘thirst’ || cf. M. tahani ttihla vu ‘buoy with Iamps’USkt.
tanh (tf§nai || Skt. tr3a- tnTft- (?) - 128
— 77, 97, 145 Bl. tnl&i /. ‘quilt’ll Skt. t'ftla _ 4 59
2. till adj. ‘thirty’ || M. tis || tummana v.t. ‘to clean cotton,
Skt. triqiMt- _ 4 135, 160 Bl. wool’ || Skt. trurapati
tijja=Ua g. v. — 4 155, lo6
 135

tunn°na - \\t. ‘to stow * || Skt. uggarna v.i. ‘to wield91| Skt-
turna- _$ 24 udgurati _ $ 64
turna v.i. ‘to walk9 i| Skt. turati ugglia adj. m. ‘famous* || Skt.
_ 'i 137 udglia- ? _ § 153
tusi prou. ‘you’ || a'so tus& uggliarna. v.i. ‘to become clear’
Skt.* tu$me cf. asm 6 Skt. udglia tats _ $ 153
_ $ 50, lbT ukkarua i.t. ‘to engrave’ || Skt.
tuss“na v.i. ‘to appear9 (of utkirati _ § 64, 109,153
small-pox)’ || Skt. tusyali ukkhal ui. ‘mortar9 || M. ukhiij
__ § 1UL (S) Skt. ultikhala-, #utkhalu-
tuttana v.i. ‘to break* |] M. — * 153 Bl.
tutne || Skt. trutyati
ukkharna v.i. ‘to come off9||Skt.
__ $ 108,161,171 Bl. •utkhatati, •utkhitati
tutthana v.i. ‘to be kind’ || Skt. _ $ 109,153
tu$ta- — >§171
ul&mbha m. ‘complaint9 ||
ubbha (WP,)adj. ‘erect, upward *
ulammha || Skt. upjllambha- !
IS M. ubha, udhav||Skt. Urdhva-
— ^ 155
_ $ 24,165 Bl.
ill lama v.i. *to lean out9, origin
ubbharna v.i. ‘to project, swell’
not known. _$ 109
Skt. udbharati ___ $ 109,153
uccarna v.t. ‘to speak’ || Skt. tina adj. w. ‘deficient9 ||
uccarati ^ 15 2 Una || Skt. una-_ § 15, 140 Bl
uccarna v.i. ‘to be separated as tinea adj. m. ‘high’ || WP. ueea
skin from flesh’ || M. ucatr§ II M. uipca || Skt. ucca-
Skt. uccatati _ § 152 Bl. * 25, 113. 152 Bl.
uc6rna trans. ‘points to’ nngal /. ‘finger91| Skt. anguli-
Vucest- __ § 28, 64, 155
lidna v.i. to fly=urna q.v. ungarna v.i. ‘to sprout91| Skt.
uddharna v.i. ‘to be unstitched9 ankura- _ $28
Skt. ) — % 109 iinghana v.i. ‘to nod’ |{ Skt.
ug&h m. ‘\vitness’||Pers. gawah- unkhati _ § 155
— § 135 unli&la (WP.)=htm41a q. r.
tiggana v.i. ‘to grow’ |j also unjal m. ‘double handful’ |1 M.
ug(g)amna || Skt. udgata-, oqijal i! Skt. anjalf-, udanjali-
udgamyatc _ § 153, 161 (5> _ § 28 Bl.
 136

unn /. ‘wool* II Skt. thna 5th m. ‘camel’ || WP. ut$h || Skt.

_ $ 24,163 t§tra- __ $ 25, 166
upajua v.i. ‘to grow' || M. uttarna v.i. ‘to come down’ || M.
upajnS || Skt. utpadyati uttarne || Skt. uttarati
_ * 153,161 (2) Bl. — § 109,152 Bl.
fippar prep. adv. ‘upon’ || M. vassana(WP.)i;.i. ‘to rain’ J| Skt.
var||$kt. upari_4 49,177 Bl. varsati — $ 163
upparna (WP.)dpparna q. v. vilamna (WP.) ‘to stop’ || Skt.
_ § 36,153 vilambate _$187
tipphan*na v.i. ‘to swell’ || M
vlrto (8.) ‘tired’ f| Skt. virikta-
uphapne || Skt.* ntphanati
— $ 187
— § 153 Bl.
vircapu (S) v.i. ‘to be tired’
liriia v.i. ‘to fly’ |] M. udn§liSkt.
Skt. viricyate $ 187
ucldayate _$ 152 Bl.
ussarna v.i. ‘to be built’ |J Skt ya conj. ‘or’ || also q.v. ||
utsavati _§ 109, 167 Pers. ya __ $ 141
utaha adv. ‘upwards’ || M. (it yar m. f. ‘friend’ [| also jar q.v.
Skt. ud-M — $ 54 Bl. I’ers. yar- $ 141
 INDEX OF SANSKRIT WORDS.

aipsa- liass, hassi, h&ili. apupd- puya (?)

dk&a+patu (a)uliara. apsara*., apsaii acch°rft.
ak?ara- akkhar. umd vasya - inaus.
dk$i- akkli. amj*ta- anil.
agni- amba-, ambfi anunS.
agg-
agnistha- gitthi. ambarn- amar, amhar.
agga. amra-=anmi- amb.
agra-
amlika imli, imbli.
•agrake aggp.
aranya- arna.
anka- ang.
arista- (unhurt) r!t(ha.
attkura- dgur.
arka- (sun) akk.
anku$d- angas ts.
argha- MuJ. aggh.
angara- Sgear.
ardha- addh[a].
anguli- ungal, ung"Ii.
-trtiya- dhai.
angu?tl»a- guttha.
-pancanm- dhauuca
aja-fpalin- WP. ayaji.
(loan from IT.)
ajanat- WP. ayajja.
-pura- adlmra.
anjana- anjan. -tnana- dhaun.
anjali- unjal. arma- (Susratra-) ambcna.
atta- atari, atali. alakta- alia.
adyd- ajj. alagna- afagg.
adhund- bun. avasya- Os.
antara- andanPersian?) avgla- abfr.
andha- annha. n$IU- as si.
■'andhakara- nh5r[a] a$ru- injh(fi).
anna- aim. aivina- assfi.
annddya- anaj. a§tan- atth.
anyakara* lieara. dsta- athnfi, atthamna.
apatya- bacc. -m ayana- atthan.
dpara- hCr. astlu- hadd (?)
aputra- aut. asmd- asl, asfi.
 akhyatf akhna, akkl/na. udgamyate uggamna.
akhy&na- WP. akha[u]n. udgha- uggha ‘famous*.
ajna an. udghatats uggbapna.
apcla- iinda. ndgnrati uggarna.
atmau- ap, apua. udbharati ubbharna.
anayati WP. anflna. * udvartana- batna, IT iibtan.
antra- ftd. npari- uppar.
amau* 5u, WP ft. upaskava- btikkhaL’.
fimalaka- aula. upalambha- ? ulambba.
arura- (=amra-) airib. uluka- nllu.
ardru- adds. ultildmla- ukkhal.
#ardla- alia. uStra- (3 tli, utth.
ardhika- addin. uspakala- Imnala.
ala.sya- alas. n? ma¬ hussar, hu$t,
asa- as(ioan from M.) hummh.
aivinji- assu(?)li. asauj. ul jya- (Pkl. vojjha-)
vujjha bfijh.
a?adha- liarli.
Ullu- una.
aba- *Vah WP. alipa.
• ikkh. urdhva- nbblia.
iksfi-
pksa- ricch.
indhana- innhan.
pdhyati . rijjhana.
*i?ta. kjtaka * itt.
eka- ikk.
lfivara- issar.
Skastiia- kat$ha.
I?i- ■ WP.bfhP •
Skakin- * kalla.
unkliati , ungh*na.
Skadasa gyarS, gSarft...
acea- • ; unca, ticca.
aikya- 5kka.
nnchati hQjlma.
fidra- fid.
u<jdayatfi -udna, urn a.
6?tba- IT. h8t.
utkirati . ukkarna.
au?tra- WP. fittha.
uttarati uttarna.
kaipsa WP. k&iha
*utthati r (Pkt. uttha!) :
kaksa- . kakkh.
utthBna.
kak§a- kacch.
utpadyalg upajna.
kankana- kangan.
utphanati upphanflna.
kankata- kanglifi.
utsarati - ussarna.
kaccbapa- kacclui.
udgata- uggana. kajjala- kajjal.
 139
kancu- kanj, kunj. plough. kali- kal
kataka- kaya. kalapa- kalava.
kalpayati WP. kappflpa.
katalm- kapali [a].
kalya- kallh.
k&tnka • kau|*a.
kapisya- kSssi.
kfintaka- kandii.
kaka- k&u.
kapthfi- kandha.
kacfi- [*kacca-] kanc
kdti- kai. WP. kacc>
kathayati kaihna. kapd- kana.
kantha kandh. kSnda- kanna.
kadall kfilla. katara- kair.
kandaka- khnddO. -kara- suff.—ar.
kannyll RP. kannea, WP. karttika- katta,*S kattak.
kanj. karmana- kam&n.
kaparda- kauddi. karyu- kaj.
kapliala- kahla. kala- kal.
kaphSni- kahiil. kala- fcala.
kSmala- kaul. kasa- kahl.
kampatP kamm*na. kastha- katb.
-kara- suff.—?r[a]. kasa [•kassa Pkt.
karanka- k$r&g. -kaqisa].
karati karna. khangli.
karabha- WP. karhn. kahala- kahla.
k4rl?a- karib. kirana- kiran.
k&rkatifca- kakkari. klta- kira.
fe'arkara* kakkar. kila- klila.
karpa- kann. kukkutfi- knkkar.
k'artati katt°na. knksf- kukkb.
katt'na. kunkuina- kungii.
karpata * kapp*ra. kuneika- kunjl.
karpara- ' khappar. kutumba- knram.
karpasa- kapah. kuttayati kutt'na.
karbara- kabra. kuntha- kliupdlia.
k&rma- kamm- knpda- kunda, knnali
karsati kasna. knddala- kudal.
kliass*na, kuputra- kaputta.
 140

kustrl- khutthi. krOdd kol

"kubra- kubba. kvathate karhna.
cf. kubhra. kvatlia- karha.
k§ara- kliar, char.
knmara- kaur, kauiara.
k§h*a- khir.
kumbhakara- kamhear.
k^udra- ■(•ksudla)
kfila- kul.
khulla.
kulattba- kulthi.
k?udha kliQh.
kuly&- kuhl. chura.
ksurd-
ku?tha- kattb (plant). ksurapra- kburpa.
ku?fha- kBrii.
ks Stra¬ khSt.
kuspati khussana.
in lia^va kbatt.
kiita- WP. kur.
kha^ga- khagga.
ktlpa- khuh, kua.
khaijda- khanna.
kurcd- kucc.
khand.
kiirdati kiiddana.
khadird- khair.
kurrad- WP. knrama.
kharju khaj.
kf(d- kitta.
khujli.
kpttika- khitti.
kharjtira- khajbr.
kpkara- kaira.
kharva- khabba.
ketaka- keora.
klialla- khall
kgdara- keara.
kp$arin- kliatd- khal.
kph«r
khidati kliana.
kehrl
kPhra. khadya- khaj j a.
kaiipSuka- kpssu. khaii- khari-
kOti- kori, kr5r. kliihga-(Hemacandra).
kOmala- kfila. khibga.
kOra- kCr. khicca khicri.
kO?tha- kottha. gaijda- ganda.
*k5?ma- kossa. ganni.
kaukaa- k5kh (W P.) gandakn- gaida.
kautumba- ktffma. gauna, g&dPri.
kridati kbghlna. gaijuiupadi- gSdOa.
krunca- kunj. •gandhilla- g&dhla.
kr6$a- ksh. gamayati gamauna.
 141

gargara-"! gaggar. graha- gaba, geba.-

gargarl J. grahaija- graihn ts. 1'.
garjati gajjana. grSma- giau, grfi.
garjara- gajjar. grasa- grab, g4s.
gardabhfi- gadha. ghata- ghara
garbha- gabbha. +manea- gharaunja.
gala- gal, gall. ghatayati gharna.
gadha- . garha. gliati- ghari.
giyati • gauna. gbattayati gbatfna.
gali- :gaJ. ghanta- gband [I].
guggulu- guggal. •ghara- ghar.
gucelia- .. guccba. gharna- giiaesa.
guda+randhra- gOhran. gbala- ghau.
gampha- gum mh a. •gbatilla- gbail.
gurjara- gbasa- gliau, gba [h].
guTguIu- guggal. ghrna- ghun.
gulma- gumma. gbfiia . ghfo
guhya- . gujilia. gl rfa- ghe5.
gudh&- .. i?urha. +pGra- glieOr.
gurda- .gudda. gliOtaka- ghBra.
gr?iti gin“na.
cak ra¬ cakk [I].
gfdhyati gij^h°na.
ce kravaka- cakva.
gfdhra- giddh; canga- caiiga.
#gf?ma- giimmh. tancu- cunj..
grha- see*gbara-. tataka- cira.
g6- gS. • catati carhna.
gfitra- g<5t. catur- can-, cu-, ca-,
gOdl S' g5li. caturiba- cauttba.
gopa.16- gualla. caturtbi* cauth.
gOpura- gOora. c6turdi.Sa- caudfi.
gaura- gOra. caluiviipsati- caubi.
grathiiftti gatthflna. catuska- e&uk.
gran tli ati gandb°iia. catuSpancasat curanja.
granthf- gntth, gandh. catnspada- cupaea.
granthila- gSdhla. eatustriipSat- caunti.
 142

cbAudah- chann.
catvarah- ear. ■,
ehala- chal, ckalna. :
eatvariipsat calt *
chavi- cliail.
candana- cannan.
chadana- chauni, ckauna
candrA- : cand, can-.
eamkar. chaya- ch&u.
camatkava-
chikka chikk.
carnara- ’ caur[i]. -
chidyate ehijjana.
campaka- cambA-fkalika-
chidra- cliidda.
camel!.
•
clmtyate cliult°na.
earinan- camrn.
chsdana- chain!.
-fkara* ;camear.
chQtayati H. WP.
carvayati eabb°na.
chorna.
•calyati calPna.
calani chalni. jaiigha jafigb.
citta- citt. jana- jana.
citta, citta. janayati jan°na.
citrfi- /
citt*na. janma- jamm.
citrayati
cird- cir. jdnya- ianD.
cirbliata- cibbhar jainbu- jammQ.
clra- cira. jaminan.
cukra- cukka. jala- jal ‘water’,
cuptati cnndana. jagrat- jagna.
culla- cullha. jadya- jadda.
cu?ati ciisna.? cunghBna. jata- jaea.
cuina- cunna. janAti janana.
ctida- cfira. jAmatr- jamai.
caitra- c<5t. jara- jar.
cOk?a- cokkha. j ilrri jibh.
c5ia- cOr. jiv£- jk
cyuta- cuna. jivana- jiun.
chagala clislla. ju?ta- juttha.
•cliatati charna. jbfith.
•chattati chattana. jyftstha- j?ttha.
•chsijtati chandana. cf. II.G. 1 jyal§tba- jfith.
ciit jvdlati jalna.
•chalti- cbatt. tanka- taka.
 143

tanka tang. triipsat* tlh.

tittibha- tatihra. trtpi- tinu.
tvalate talna. trutyati . tutt”na.
damaru chuni. trumpati turamaiia.
dakni dain. trCtayati torna.
dbaukate dbOna. tvaStp- thathsra.
tdksati taccUtfna. ddipsttfi datha q.v.
t£k?an- takhan. daksina- dakkhan.
t£ntn- tand. dagdha- dadd!iana.
taptd- tatta. danda- dan<Ja.
taraksa- tarakli. dadru- dadd.
taratl tarna. dddhi- dali?.
tarkayati takk*na. -rb!ianfh- dihindi.
tarku- takkala. danta- dand.
tardati laddana. dardura- daddu.
•tarpati {appana. darbha- dabbh.
tdlpa- tappar. daisavati dass°na
tanayati tan®na. d«i$a- ten.
tamra- tamba. datka- jarh, darhi.
tittira- tittar. d&tra- dattL
tira$c&- tircba. daraani- daun.
tlla- til. daya- daj.
tik§pa- tikklia. dardhya- daddha.
turati • tnrna. divasa- dehara. .
•tula (tula) tulha. dlpa- diva.
tu?a- toh. dugdha- duddh.
tu?ta- tutthflna. durlabha- dulla.
•tusms tUal. dur£- dur.
tusyati tuss“na. dfirva dubb.
tu'pa ttmn"na. dpSyate dlss'hia.
tlila* tula!. dpsta- dittha.
trV- tin. devara- deOr.
tftlya- tijja, tia. dauhitra- dohta.
tf§a tgh, til). dytlt4- jua.
trasayati tabna. dramma- darnm.
 144

draksa dakh. nimantra- neSda. .

draghatc dahra. nimna+apa+
dliyana?' nimmojbajja.
dv&triqigat- batti.
niraba- niram. _
dv£da$a- barg.
nirik?a- nirakh. .
dvara- bar.
nirbhagya- ' nabhSg. '
dvitfya- dujja. ‘
nirmala- nimmal.
dvdu- ds.
nirvartats nibbarna.
dhnrndni- dhann.
nirvaliati nibhna.
dhdritrl dhar*t.
niseala- nicla.
dhavala- dhaula. n:$e5tati nacfirna."
dhanya- dhan. nissanka- nasang.
dhgra dhar. m§kalyate nikkalna.
dhlvara- jhiur. •• nisputra- naputta.
dl.uma dliQg. nistarati nittarna.
dhuli-, #d!iQdi- dhur. nissarati nissai’na.
dhvaja jhanda, niroga- narSa.
dhvanf- jhankar. ntla- lalari.
nakuli- nan). nptyati nacc°na.
nakhd- nauh. pakvd- pakka.
nagnd- nanga. pak?d- pakkh, phangh.
n&dl na?. pak?in- panchi.
nanand|*- nan&d. paksman- pharaman,
n&nandr- nanan. - phambh.
nayati pangu- Plgla.
ngna [k].
pdcyate pacna.
ndva- n&u, 9.
pdncan- panj.
ndiyati nass*na.
pancamd- panjamS.
na§td- natth°na.
pancaviipSati- paccf.
nds+ka- nakk.
pancaSat
liasta- natth.
panjara- pinj°ra.
nadi nar.
patta- patti.
napita- naT.
pathati parhna.
ngma- nafi. pdttra- patta.
nikata- nsra. patha- paha. .k
nidra- nld. pathin- (panthan)pandh.
 145

#padira- pair. pippala- pippal.

padma- pabb. pippali- piplamul.
padmini pabban. pista- pittln, p:ttana.
paraSu- pbarba. pitha- plrha.
paraSvah parsO. plda plf.
parivpsayati parOsna. plta’a- pila.
pariksa parakb. pLtecha- pQcli.
parija- panna. puta- pur.
pardati padd*na. punya- punu.
paryaya- ? pajj, pi.i.i- puttaln - putla.
paryasta- palfltna. putrd- putt.
paryasti- paltbi. puran:i- purana. ■
p&r$u- passali. puskara- pOkkhar.
palasd- palali. pustaka- pottha.
par(I)yanka- pahl&g. purna- punna.
par(l)yfiija- palana. purnima punueS.
pallava- palla. puryate • pujjana. -
paSca- piccha. purvardha- pnadli. •
paSeardha- paeadb. ptilya- pel.
paScima- paecbO. ppcchati puecb°na.
patayati pauna. ppthuln- pohllO.
pada- pam$. pr?tha- pitth, puttlia.
padanta- p^id. paundra- pOnna.
paduka paua. pautra- pOtta.
padona- paun. pau?a- poll.
pa mya- pan!. pauskara- see puskara.
pam&n- pau. paastaka- see pustaka.
par$va- prissa. prakliyanA- pakhana.
pSSa- pbaha. prathaina- paihlla.
p'ip?ati pilma. prativasiu- paransi'sil.
p:cclia pi ccb. prapautra- pnrOtta.
p;njayati pinjana. prabl:4- paih, pauh.
plnda- pinn, p’ndn. pralambate palamna.
peO. pravaliana- pOhan.
pV- ,
pitta- pitta. prastara- patthar.'
 146

prasvidyate pijjana. bharati bharna.

prasvsda- parses. bhasman- bhass.
prabara- paihr. bhag£ bhau.
prapayati pauna. bhagineya- bhanaja. -
priyakara- peara. bhan lagara- bh&dear.
prenkha ptgh. bhugna- bhugga.
proncbati pftjhna. bhtimi bhQ.
pheni- phan. bhpjjati bhujj*na.
phala- phal. bhedra- bhed.
phalguna- phaggan. bhramati bhauna.
pliftla- phala. bhramara bhaur.
Ijlmlla- phull. bhr&stra bbatth.
bhrS-ff- bbai.
bandhati bannVna.
bhru- bhau.
barkara- bakkflra.
baliv&rda- babld. mak?a macchar.
bahutvo- banht. makslka makkhi.
bahu- bSl). mijjb.
bahya- bajb. maneaka- manja.
b’mdu- bund. manjistha majitb. •
bind. matba- marhi.
bilva- bil. maijikara- manear.
bisa- bbS(li). matsya- macch.
blja- bi. mathra- . matha.f
budhyate bujjhflna, manthana- rnadhanl
bubbuksa bhukkb. mantra- mand.
bus6- bh5b. manda- man-
bfdba- buddha. +ak?a- man 4k kb a
brShmapa- bfi liman. +kara- m&dari.
bhakta- bliatta. +dhainava manShmfi.
bhagini bhain. mandiman- manno.
bhagna- bliaggflna. manusya- muns.
bhanga bhang. mark&ta- makkar.
bhajyate bhajj“na. mallati mallBna.
bhatta- bhatt. mastaka mattha.
bhadra- •bbadla- b mahargha- maihga.
 147

m alii? I mSih. mi^na.

maipsa- mas. mekhala . hamel.f
maghi* magh. megka- mjh.
mfinikya- man&k. medas- majjft, q. v.
maif* mft. mauktika- rnotti.
madliya- maji). inraks&ga- makkliau.
marga magg, magar. yajnopavitd- janeau.
margate mang°na. yati- jai.
margas'.ia- mngghar. yad&- 3«-
marttika- matti. yadi- je.
malya- mahl. yantra janda.
nid?a- mah. yabhati jailina.
masanta mas&d. yabdlifi- jaddha.
mi tri¬ mitt. yiva- jau.
mil ati milna. •yavakara- jxiar.
misri- missa. ya?ti- Mattha, q. v.
mi§ta- mittlia. yasya- jih-
mukulayati maulna. yiti jana.
mukta- mukkana. yaga+liala- jula.
#mukua J yugma- jug.
mukha- raftt). yuka jo.
mukhara- mohri. yfiktra- i5t.
munja nranj. ydgya- jffgga.
mundayati munn°na. y4ni* jun.
mutkala- mokla.
rakta ratta.
mudga- ni&ngi. rakkli.
rak?a
mu?^i- rnut^i.
ranga- rang.
musala- mQlila. rujju lajj.
musta mottha, moth. | vanda- raun, randi.
mtitra- mut. • ratna- ratti?
murdh&n- muddh. rasmi- rassi
mulya- mull. rdsa- rauh.
mj*ta- mOea. r&jan- rai.
myttika mitti. J^ji- rift.
mj’Sta- maltha. ! rajni rani.
 148
rajya- • raj. ) vaksaskara - bakhara.
rStri- rat. vdjra- bajj.
•rindhati rinnh*na. vanijja- banflj.
rule? 4- rukkli, ‘tree1. ' va^tati bandBna.
rucyate rucna. vatsa- bacclia.
rudhyate rujjh°na. . vadhu- bahu.
"rundhati runnh*na. vandhya- banjh.
ru?yati russBna. vamri- barmi.?
ruk?a- rukkha. vdrga- bagg.
ifipya- ruppa. vartaka- batSra.
rOdati rOna. . vartats batfga.
rbman- • - rtt, rfifi. vartis- "l
• bat.
raukma- r5k. vartmau- J
*Jakkuta- lakkar. vartika- batti.
Jagyati Iagg*na. vardliati ba<JdhBna
laghii- Jauhdda. vardhats badhna.
lapgkate * IangkBna. vardlira- baddhi.
lajja hjj. var?a- barha.
•lattlm- latth, latthi. varsati barhna.
labhyate Jabbhana. valka- bakk.
Jamba- ‘ lamba. valga bag.
lardayati ladd°na. yalgu- bagga.
lavana- nfin. vallabha- balli.
lagayati 'launa. valli- bsl.
labha- ’ Iaha. vfiSa- ■ball.
lipyate • lippana. vahangika •. -b&iligi.
limpati liinb°ija. vagura- bair.
lik?a likh. vftta- ban.
lgkha- *lih. vadya- bajja.
l5tha- lOrha. vadyate bajj ana.
loman- • its! vanara- bandar.
lcha loha. vamaua- bauua.
vaipsa- banjh, bis.
vakra-
vaksas-
binga.
bakkhf.
%. fn1 M
v^la-
'7S%f>s |
OR*
bal.
va?pa- bhapb. Sankha- sa6gh (T).
viipSati- bih. $ata> sau.
vikirati bikkbarna. Sapatka- safih.
bakherna. Sabda- sadda.
vicchadayati bachauna. Sdmba- samm.
vitasti bitth. $ayya sej, chgj.
vittd- bit(t). Sarkara sakkar.
vidy&t- bijj, bijll. SAlka- sakk.
vidhi. behmata. Salya- sail, sella.
vinfi* bin(8). •Salyaka- sahi&g.
vimdh a to binnh°na. $a$a- salia.
viphala- behlla. $5nti- s8d.
vibhltaka bahera. $ati sarhi.
vivahd- beah. Siky^* chikka.
vi$v£nara- baaantar? iiksa sikkh
viSvasa- basah. ilia si!.
vi?a- beh. Sitd- si.
visamyate bisamn3. 4-kala- seal.
vi?tha bitth. Sftala- sillha.
vis ma rati bissarna. $nnthi- sundb.
vl^a- bln. iudhyate sujjhttna.
vlthi- bihf. Sulba- snbb.
vlrd- Mr. Su?ka- snkkha.
vptti- butt!. sukka.
vpddbi- b&ddhl? $unyd- sunna.
VfScika- bicchu. ^rnkhala- stingal.
vgdha- bell. Sj-nga- si fig.
ve?ta- behra. sj-n6li sunana.
vfiira- (Pkt. vaira-) Sekhara- sekra.
bair. daimbya- sem.
vairagya- barag. •$<5dhi- suh.
vyaghrd- bagh. Sodhani suhni.
ftaknOti 1 SObhate sohna.
sakna.
iakyate J smaiana- masan.
ftafika. safig. imasru raucch.
iafiku- eSg. mass.
 150

Syamala- saula. siiphfc- sib.

Sravana- saun. sincati sinjana.
$re?thin- setb. siddha- 1 siddha.
siddhrA-J sidhra.
Slaghate srauhna.
sidhyali sijjhana.
$v£$ura- sanhra.
supt&- sutta.
SvaSrtt sass.
surunga surSg.
Svasa- sab.
suvarija- siuna.
?at- cbp. sur.
sukara-
?ajka- cbikka. suct- sfll.
satth.
sbtra- stit.
?UdaSan- . snl8.
sutrayate sUtna.
sankutati • sufigarnS. sQbar.
s6ma-fvara-
sajja sajja. suhag.
saubhaghya-
saipjfia sain. skandba- kannha.
afiktu- sattb. skambha- kbamba.
sfikthin- satthal.
st&na- than.
sablrucyate safiguccana.
stabaka- thabba.
satkarayati • sakarna.
stambba- tbanimh(4).
aattvfi- sat.
stokk- thora.
satyfi- sacc.
sant- da. sth&vira- thera.
sandPSa- sanpha. sthagba- thab.
sandhyft sanjh. stbana- tbanf.
sapfitnl (H.) sant. sth&mnn- th5u.
sapada- . sava. sthali thali.
saputra-. sant. slhuU- thullha.
saptan- satt.
snftti nlmuna.
sapfati- . sattar.
snusS, nQh.
sambndhyati samajhna.
sneha- neb.
sambhalayati sambalna.
sphutyate phutt°na.
sarp4' sapp.
sphctayati pkOrna.
sar?apa- . sarb(5.
syaU- sala.
salavaija-. saluna.
svapati sauna.
s&hate sailma.
sftjh. svarija- suvdnja.
saipSa-
sardha- sadh. 8vamm- sfii.
 151

haips*- hans. +tala- (ha)theli.

hatta- liatt. hastin- hatthl.
hadda- hadd. blritaki- harar.
hari^a- liiran. hasya- hassa.
liarich’a- hallidi. hu$da- hngd, hum.
liala- lial. hfdaya- h!i.
h&sta- hatth.
 PART II.

A
LUDHIANI PHONETIC READER

(Thesis approved for the Laura-Soames Prize for Phonetics

by the University College, London.)
 PREFACE.

The Ludhiani Phonetic Reader is very welcome. It will bi*

welcomed especially by those who desire to study the pronuncia¬
tion of this Panjabi dialect.

The main body of the work consists of twelve tales which

are given in phonetic script with an English translation and a
vocabulary of between 600 and 700 words. There is an Introduc¬
tion on the sounds, describing in detail vowels, consonants,
assimilation, stress, tones and intonation. Thanks to the employ¬
ment of the alphabet of the International Phonetic Association, it
is possible for one who has made a study of that alphabet to
get a really good idea of how the language is pronounced.

The author is doubly qualified for the task he has under¬

taken. Firstly, all his life he has spoken the dialect which he has
here described; and secondly, he has made a prolonged study of
Phonetics under the lecturers of the University of London, who
have assisted him in his investigations and checked his conclusions.

A comparison may profitably be made between this Reader

and my own little volume “A Panjabi Phonetic Reader” (London
University Press), which deals with the dialect of north-east
Gujranwala, spoken 60 miles north of Lahore, while Ludhiana, the
home of LodliianT is about 100 miles south-east of Lahore. It is
possible to compare the two dialects in their vocabulary, grammar
and pronunciation. Dr. Jain has (very wisely in ray opinion)
retold three of the stories in my book, so that in their case it is
possible to compare the narrative almost word by word.

To this unpretentious, but practically useful and most in¬

teresting book I wish every success.

T. GRAHAME BAILEY,
Reader in Hindi and Urdu,
University of London.
 LUDHIANI PHONETIC READER.
INTRODUCTION
1. This reader describes and records accurately in the
International Phonetic Script one type of the pronunciation of
Ludhianl, the object being to facilitate its learning by foreigners,
and to interest the Panjabi speakers in the study of Panjabi
Phonetics in particular. For this purpose a number of texts
have been transcribed preceded by brief description of the
Ludhianl sounds.

2. Ludhiani is a dialect of Panjabi spoken at and near the

town of Ludhiana. It appreciably differs in grammar and
pronunciation from the Wazlrabad dialect described in Dr.
Bailey’s Panjabi Phonetic Reader as can be seen on comparing
the texts Nos. 10-12 of this reader with the corresponding ones
in Dr. Bailey’s Reader.
3. The pronunciation represented here is that ol the author
himself analysed under the guidance of Miss Armstrong and
Miss Ward, and finally checked by Prof. D. Jones. Where possible
the results of this analysis were tested and amplified by kymo-
grapliic tracings taken under the supervision of Mr. S. Jones.
As is natural with a speech never taught in schools, but on the
 156

contrary affected so much by education in and contact with alien

languages, it was often difficult to decide as to which of the two
or three different pronunciations of the same word belonged to
the author’s native tongue Where decision could not be made,
the alternative pronunciations have been described.

Ludhiani Vowels.

4. Taking the definition of a phoneme as given in the

Pronunciation of Russian”*, Ludhiani has the following vowel-
phonemes :—

Simple: ileeaoouuAO
Diphthong: ea, eo, Ai, Ag, ao, au, ua.

5. The nasalised forms of all the vowels and diphthongs

occur in Ludhiani.
6. As it is rather difficult to describe in words the exact way
in which a vowel is formed, so that the reader may get an
accurate idea of its acoustic value and formation and thus may
be able to pronounce it from the given description, it is found
practicable and satisfactory to compare the vowels of a given
language with the cardinal ones. The latter are “a set of fixed
vowel-sounds having definite tongue-positions and known acoustic
qualities”.8 In the accompanying diagram the thick dots
represent the highest tongue-positions in the formation of the
cardinal vowels, while the circles represent those of the Ludhiani
vowels.
” ~~ — -s-------—

By V. Trofimov and D. Jones (Cambridge University

Prefix) §§ 174-75.

9. lb § 110. Also seo §§ 98-111. The cardinal vowels

have been recorded on gramophone discs, e.g., the double-sided
record, No. B804 in the catalogue of the Gramophone Co., 363,
Oxford Street, London. W.
 157

Diagram illustrating the Positions of the Principal and chief

subsidiary members of the Lndhianj vowel phoneme* compared
with thn cardinal vowels. Symbols for subsidiary mombors are
enclosed within brackets.
Notes on the Lndhiani Vowels.
7. [i] is slightly more open than the cardinal vowel No. 1,
bat is a little closer than the English vowel in ‘heed’ when the
latter is not diphthongised.
S. [t] is the nasalised form of the Lndhiani [i],
9. [I] lies between the cardinal vowels Nos 1 and 2. It is
closer and less retracted thin the Eng'ish vowel in ‘sit’.
10. [I] is the nasalised form of the Ludbiani [i],
11. [el is a shade lower than the cardinal vowel No. 2. It
must be distinguished from the English diphthong in ‘day*.
12. [§] is the nasalised form of the Lndhiani [e].
13. [e] lies between the cardina vowels Nos. 2 and 3, and
occurs as the final element of the diphthong [Ae] when medial.
14. [(e)] is a subsidiary member of [e]- phoneme, and occurs
in the diphthong [ae] when final. It is opener than the cardiual
 158

vowel No. 3 but closer than the English vowel in ‘hat*. Some
speakers use this vowel alone where others use the diphthong [Ae].

15. [g] and [(g)] are the nasalised forms of the Ludhiani [e]
and [(e)] respectively and are similarly used.

16. [a] is nearer to cardinal vowel No. 5 than to No. 4. It is

almost identical with the English vowel in ‘calm’.

17. [a] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [a],

IS. [o] lies between cardinal vowels Nos. 6 and 7, more to¬
wards No. 7 than towards No. 6. It occurs in the diphthong [ao]
when not final.
19. [(o)] is a subsidiary member of the [o-]phoneme and
occurs in the diphthong [ad] when final. It is more towards the
cardinal vowel No. 6 than towards No. 7.
20. 21. [5] and [(5)] arc the nasalised forms of the Ludhiani
[a] and [(a)] respectively and are similarly used.

22. [o] is a shade opener than the cardinal vowel No. 7. It

must be distinguished from the English diphthong in ‘pole’.
23. 15] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [o].
24. [u] lies between the cardinal vowels Nos, 7 and 8. It is
a little closer than the English vowel in ‘put\

25. [u] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [u].

26. [u] is a shade opener than the cardinal vowel No. 8. It

is quite back whereas the English vowel in ‘soon’is somewhat
advanced.

27. [fi] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [u].

28. [a] is intermediate between the English vowel in ‘hut’
arid the cardinal vowel No. 5. It occurs in prominent syllables
closed by a single or short consonant.

29. [(a)] is a subsidiary member of the [a]-phoneme and is

somewhat closer than the principal member. It is almost identical
 159

with the English vowel in ‘hut’, ail'd occurs in stressed open

syllables. •

30. 31. [*] and [(A)] are the nasalised forms of the Ludhifini
La] and [(a)] respectively and are similarly used.

32. [e] is a little closer than [(a)] and is used in stressed'

syllables closed by long consonants and followed by a long open or
a short closed syllable as in ('p9t:a) ‘leaf', ('cad:ar) ‘sheet*.

33. [(a)] is a subsidiary member of the a-plioneme and is

similar to the English sound of a in ‘agree\ Tt is used in unstress¬
ed syallables. A very short nou-syllabic [a] is generally-heard after
final plosive consonants especially when long.

34. 35. [5] and [(§)] ure the nasalised forms of the Ludhiani
[a] and [(a)] respectively and are sunilarly used.

The Ludhiani Diphthongs.

36. Ludhiani Inis a large number of diphthongs. They are

distinctly rising and long when oecnring in syllables closed by a
short or single consonant, and’ as such are denoted by double
length-mark (:). In other positions they arc more like falling
or level diphthongs especially when final. The final element of the
rising diphthongs is somewhat closer than that of the. falling or
level, ones. •/ Sometimes the rising and falling varieties distinguish
words, and in such cases also, the rising one is marked with (:) as
in (pea) ‘fallen* but (pea:) ‘cause to drink*, (lea) ‘taken* but (lea:)
‘bring*.

$37. In a nasal diphthong it is usually the final element that

is nasalised. Sometimes especially in the vicinity of a nasal con¬
sonant the whole is nasalised.
[ea]. Its initial and final elements are the same as the
38.
Ludhiani [e] and [a].

t
See §$ 83—84.
 160

39. [ed] is the nasal form of [ea].

40. [eo] - initial and final elements same as [e] and [o],
41. [e6] — tlie nasal form of [eo].

42. [Ai]. Its initial element is the same as the subsidiary

member of the Ludhiam A-phoneme. The fin il element is a shade
opener than theLudhiim [i],

43. [ai] is the nasal form of [Ai].

44. [as]. Its initial element is the subsidiary member of the
Ludhiani A-phoneme. The final element is [e] or [(e)] as des«
cribed above.

45. [a§] is the nasal form of [as].

46. [ao]. Its initial element is the subsidiary member of the

Ludhiam A-phoneme and the final element [o] or [(o)] under con¬
ditions described above.

47. [a5] is the nasal form of [ad].

48. [au.] Its first element is the subsidiary member of the
Ludhiani A-phoneme, and the final element a shade opener than the
Ludhiam [u].

49. [au] is the nasal form of [au],

50. [uq]. Its initial and final elements are the same as the
Ludliiani vowels [u] and [a].
51. [ua] is the nasal form of [uq].

Ludhiani Consonants.

52. In the following chart the Ludhiam consonants have been

arranged in such a way that the vertical columns show the place of
articulation, and the horizontal rows the manner of articulation.
Tint symbols within brackets represent Ruhsuliary members of pliwuemes.
 162
Plosives.
53. The voiceless nnaspirated plosives of Ludhiam
[p, t, t, k] are altogether free from aspiration, up. they are pro¬
nounced without any insertion of h-sound between their plosion and
the foil Awing vowel. The voiceless aspirated plosives
[ph, th, th, kh], however, are fully aspirated, i. e. a Cull
sound of [h] is inserted between their plosion and the following
vowel. The voiced plosives [b, d. g] are more fully voiced
than in English.
54. [p, ph, b] - the place of articulation as in the English
Bilab;al plosives. •!”'
55. [t, th, d] are dental as in Italian or French. In pro¬
nouncing them the tip of the tongue rests behind the lower teeth,
and the blade makes an occlusion of considerable area at the hack
of the upper teeth.
56. [t, th. d,] are commonly formed on the inside of the-teeth- *
ridge further back than the English alveolar plosives.
57. [k, kh, g] -the place of articulation as in English Velar
plosives.
53. Plosives are either fully exploded, or are accompanied
by a vocalic off-glide which, especially after long consonants, is
often sufficient to be represented by [e]. When however, an un¬
aspirated plosive is followed by another of the same articulation,
the first is not exploded, e.g. (kAt gea) but (lAg, gea); (c^At ke)
buj (ruki ke); (be:c dit:a) but [be:c, checked]
Affricates.
59. In pronouncing [c, ch, j] the tip of thp tongue touches
the lower teeth, and the front part being raised is brought into
contact with the forepart of the hard palate. At the same time,
a part of the tongue-blade touches the back of the teeth ridge.
Nasals.
60. [m] as in English.
61. [n.] The chief member of this phoneme is formed by
the tip of the tongue against the central part of the teeth-ridge,
a little behind the English *n\
 163

The first subsidiary member is a forward variety used

before dental plosives and articulated at the same place as they.
The second subsidiary member is a back variety used before-
post-alveolar plosives, and articulated at the same plac<y as they.
The third subsidiary member is a palatalised variety used
before [c, ch, j] -and articulated at the saint* place as they. . .
Some speakers palatalise it so much that in their case it
may well be represented by *)i\ - - .
62. [q] as the sound of ng in English word ‘King.’
Lateral. ’
63.. .[1] is nearly the. same as the clear variety of [1] in
‘black’. There is a subsidiary member used before dental plosives
and articulated at the upper teeth., * -
Rolled and flapped. . T
64. [r] is rolled sound as in Scotch or in English singing.
It consists of a single tap; at the end of a word, however, it
may have more than one tap'.- -[r]-is always preceded and followed
by a small vocalic sound. - • ‘
65. [pj. In making this sound, tlie tip of the tongue is curled
up considerably behind the tccth-ridge from whence'when released
it makes a flap against the ridge.' For the fricative variety used
as a subsidiary member, see under Tricatives.
* Fricatives. • ..
67. 1(D)] is a labio-dental sound with a very slight friction in
forming which the inside of the lower lip lightly touches the upper
teeth. It is often pronounced as a.weak plosive [b], and is used
in place of [b] between vowels* when coming in an unprorainent
syllable. .
68. [(F)] is the corresponding voiceless sound used instead
of [ph] uuder. similar conditions. ’ * .
Sometimes the bilabial varieties are used especially before a
consonant.
 164

• 69. [(6)1 resembles English (th) in ‘thin’ but is weaker. It

is used instead of [th] when followed by [d] which then becomes
m-
70. [(5)] is the corresponding voiced sound substituted for
[d] after [0].
71. [ (x) ] resembles Scotch (ch) in‘loch’ but is articulated
in a more forward place. It is used for [kli] he fore a cousouant.
72. [(c)] is a sound between [s] and the German consonant.
in'Ich*. It is substituted for [ch] before [c] and a few other
consonants.
73. [S] is nearly the same as in English.
74. [(«*)] formed considerably behind the teeth ridge is
substituted for [p] before [n, 1] or a dental plosive.
75. [J] resembles [y] in English ‘yes’ but is more fricative.
Initially it is often replaced by [j]. It also occurs as nasal.
- 76. [h] as in English. Between vowels it becomes partly or
fully voiced.
• Assimilation.
The following cases of assimilation are to be found in
Ludhiani:—
77. (1) Regressive assimilation takes place between neigh¬
bouring unaspirated plosives and affricates:
ik gid:et > fkgtd:apl

peo put dia > peo put dia

v

kad t6 > kad td

A

Ub: pea > ttb pea.

bAc ja > bAc ja.

78. (2) An unvoiced aspirated plosive after a short vowel,

if followed by an unaspirated plosive of the same articulation, be¬
comes a kind of fricative resembling lh] followed by a short stop
of the same articulation e.g.
*. The sign ▼ rneanB partly voiced, o means devoiced.
 165

Ukh ke > Uhk ke

puc:h cuk:ea > puh- pus-?
gAth tup: kArke
rAtk to > rAht td
Ath t»t:Ia > Aht tat:ia.
79. (a) After a long vowel, however, the unvoiced aspirated
plosive becomes the corresponding fricative when followed by an
unaspirated plosive1, e.g. :• *
de:kh ke > de:x ke
de:kh da > de:xda
bu:th da > bu:e 5a (for [d] > [B], sec $70.)
80. (4) If the following plosive also is aspirated, the aspira¬
tion of the first is lost, c.y.
de:kh kha > de:kkha
sA5:ph phak:i > sa5:p phokii
sa:th thofa si > sa:t fchopa si.
81. (5) Au [h] is partially or. fully voiced when a word
beginning with it comes after a vowel, c.y.
ki hoea > ki fioea. _ ,
82. (6) A dental plosive followed by a pal a to-areolar
affricate undergoes regressive assimilation, c.g.
adalat co > odaloc co
kAd Janas > kAJ Jana 8 . ...
kAd cal:ea si > kAc coliea si. . ;
Stress.
83. There is a feature of Ludhiani pronunciation which
closely resembles a weak kind of stress. It is, however, not a real
force-accent, but a combination of length and pitch, sometimes
accompanied by variations in vowel-quality. A syllable thus
atTected may be called pseudo-stressed, but for convenience we use
the term ‘stressed'.

1 This does not hold good in the rose of the post-alveolar

unvoiced aspirated plosive, thus
ka:th da; ka^h tut:ea>ka:ht tufcea.
 84. The following pairs of words illustrate this feature of
the language. The syllables with -this pseudo-stress are marked
with ordinary stress mark preceding the syllable:

'tA£ka ‘seasoning’ -I tar'ka:‘get. (a dish.) seasoned’,

'suta ‘attention' ‘ suta: ‘cause to be drawn out’.
. 'kcAta.. ‘thick clouds’ • kca'ta : batca! or k^atca: ‘decrease’,
'rala ‘mixture* | ra'Ia: ‘cause to be mixed, mix’,
'paid ‘ladle* pa'.'a : ‘cause to drink*.
'sAsta ‘cheap* sas'ta:‘wait (a minute) *.
'phAtka‘dashing, jerking*, phat'ka: ‘cause to: he dashed*.

.Length. *'

85. Length is a significant attribute of Ludhiap! speech.

Four degrees of length are recognisable, viz., very, short, short,
half-long and long, but in transcription the long sounds only arc
marked with [:], others are left unmarked. The following principles,
however, will guide the student in determining the length of a
sound in any particular word.
86. (1) [i, e, a, o, u]1-are long in syllables closed by a short
consonant, and in final positions, when stressed as in (bi:n) ‘flute*,
(dalsha:) ‘show*. In open syllables other than the.final stressed
ones they are half-long as in (kola) ‘black*. Before a pause in an
unstressed position, they are half-long tending, to long. Before
long consonants or groups of equivalent length they are short as
in (kan:a) ‘reed’, (Janda) ‘going*. They -are seldom short other¬
wise; but wheh so, their shortness is denoted by the sign [~] placed
over them as in (keha) ‘said*.

87. (2) [i, u, a] are short in stressed syllables open or closed

by a short consonant as in (dm) ‘day*, ('pAta) ‘clue*. In syllables
closed by a long consonant or a group of equivalent length, [j] and
[u] become very short as in (dinda) ‘giving!, (dil:i) ‘Delhi*. So is
[u] in unstressed syllables whether opeu or closed (su'nai)
* relate *, (mur'dair) ‘dead*, [a] is always very short.

1 Including .3 .when gccurring as monophthongs.

 167

88. (3) Diphthongs behave like [i e q o u] as regards length.

89. (4) A consonant is short at the beginning of a word. In
other positions it may be short, half-long or long.
90. Distinction must be made between a long and a double
consonant. The latter is a little longer than the former, and has
an extra impulse on its last part. In transcription a long conso¬
nant is denoted by the length mark[I], and a double consonant by
doubling the symbol. When a nasal consonant followed by a
plosive behaves like a double consonant it is distinguished by
adding half-length mark to the nasal where there is nothing else to
show it.

Thus
sAdda ‘inviting’ sed:a ‘invitation’
Jiddi /. ‘discussing’ Jid:i adj. ‘obstinate’
banda‘being made’ banda ‘slave’
Jaindci ‘knowing’ landa ‘going’
dm da ‘of the day’ dinda ‘giving’
hun da ‘of now’ hunda ‘being’
bun*da ‘weaving’ bunda ‘ear ornament’

Tones.

91. Apart from sentence intonation Lndhiani has two special

‘tones’ which distinguish words. Sometimes by combining them
a third special tone is produced. The nature of these tones is
practically the same as in the Wazirabad dialect described by
Dr. Bailey, except that the third or combined tone is not so
common in LudhianP.
92. The tones are as follows:—
(1) Low-rising (or briefly low) tone represented by the
sign [r]placed before the vowel “begins about a tone above the
lowest note which the speaker can command, rises about two semi*

1 Panjabi Phonetic Reader, 1914, p. XV.

 168

tones1 2 * and sometimes falls again about a tone*’. There is a

cmsiderablo feeling of constraint in the larynx. Syllables with the
low-tone are often produced with creaky voice.

93. (2) High-falling (or briefly high) tone represented by

the sign [A] placed over the vowel is uttered about a fifth (seven
semi-tones) above the first note of the low rising tone. The voico
generally falls about a tone from the highest tone'9.

94. (3) In the combined tone the low rising tone always
comes first.

95. The acoustic effect of tones (1) and (2) is somewhat similar
to that of the Chinese Tones Nos. 3 and 4 as spoken by Yuen
Ben Chao in Lesson 2 called “Finals in all tones”, and recorded in
the gramophone disc No. 2 —S(93654) of the Columbia Phono¬
graph Company New York*. The last part of the Chinese third
tone rises much higher than that of the Ludhian! low-rising
tone.

96. There are numerous pairs of words which are distin¬

guished by the .special tones only, c.q.

average middle pitch low-rising high-falling combined

kopa ‘whip’ k,,opa ‘horse9 kopa ‘leper9 _

toea 'pit* tfoga ‘carried9 tdea ‘touched9 _
ka ‘of9 k„a ‘grass9. ka ohl. sing, of Interr. ked
pron. used for ‘grass’
Inanimate objects.
A

ma ‘mother9 _ ma‘black bean9 _

CAp ‘hangnail9 CcAp ‘fall9 cAp ‘rise9 _

1. In tho Reader Dr. Btiloy said “four or five semi-tones''

bur he modified it afterwards. Bloch in Melanges Vend ryes
p. 58.
2. Lesson 2 of liis “Gramophone Count of the Chinese
2fational Langungt'\ Commercial P»ess, Shanghai.
 169

Notes on Ludhiani tones.

97. Syllables uttered with high tone are always stressed,
while those uttered with low tone may or may not be stressed1 2, e.g
'gAda ‘ass1, (mo'ld:) ‘boatman1, (na'khid:) ‘mean1, (bog^i't ‘trap’;
('pcAra) ‘bundle’ but (pea'ra:) ‘cause to be filled’, ('kcAta) ‘thick
clouds1 but (koO'ta’) v.t. ‘decrease1.
98. A low-tone syllable often affects itB neighbouring syllable.
Thus (pfla'rcii) may be pronounced (p«a'rcai) or (pa'r<ai), (pa'foQi)
maybe pronounced (pcapcai) or (pce'pai).
99. In whispered speech the distinction of special tones
disappears. The low tone, however, can be detected on account
of laryngeal constraint*.
100. When a high-tone syllable comes in jin unstressed1 posi¬
tion, especially in the vicinity of another high-tone syllable, it loses
its high pitch to a great extent, and may even sound to be of
middle pitch. Thus in (o kida put: e?) ‘whose son is -he!1 (6) or
(ki-) may lose the high-tone if unstressed.
Intonation.
101. Intonation is a significant element of speech in Lmdhiani.
Thus [ipm] pronounced in mid-falling tone means ‘yes1, in high-
rising tone expresses ‘surprise*_aud is used as an equivalent of ‘I
beg your pardon1, in low-falling rising tone it expresses a kind, of
challenge, and in high-level tone it expresses ‘disapproval1.
102. Lndhiani intonation has not yet been fully investigated.
Broadly speaking, there are two sentence tunes, one falling and
the other rising. The first is used where nothing more is implied
t.e. in plain statements, questions containing Interrogative words,
requests, commands e'c. The second is used where something
more is implied ».e. in incomplete speech, in questions,.requiring
‘yes1 or ‘no1 as their answer, in expressing surprise, etc.

1. See §§ 83—84.
2. See Bulletin of the -fahoul of Oriental . Studies, London.
Vol. IV pt. 1, p. 218. "
 170

Plain Statements

asI pm^o calie a

(We are going to the village.)

muntja hune gea e

(The boy has just gone.)
104. Questions containing a specific interrogative word

tera ki nA5 e mun^a kit:he gea?

(What is your name?) (Where has the boy gone?)
105. Requests and Commands: —

JAra kAlam dAJ:o thali ure kArl

(Please give me the pen.)' (Pass the plate this side.)
106. Incomplete Statement:—

o:s Julabe de I do tcDa si | te ik put:||

(of tliat weaver | there were two daughters | and one son||)
107. Questio)is requiring ‘yes* or ‘no'as their answer: —

tusl dil:I6 ae a5? t-fi babu da put g?

(Do you come from Delhi?) (Are you Babu's son?)
108. Surprise

ac:ha hfin pAnjo bAj gAe?

(Hullo! Is it five o'clock now?)
 Additional notes on the LudhianI sounds.
(Arabic numerals refer to the paragraphs of the Reader).
38a. Some speakers begin the diphthong [ea] with a higher
tongue-position so that in their ease it can be transcribed as [la]1 2.
In the GurmukhI script the first element is represented by the
same symbol as the short [i] (t.e. I). In rapid speech the diph¬
thong may even become [Jo].

40a. The remarks about [ea] apply to [eo] also.

42a. The older vowel-groups in the interior of a word
which should have phonologically developed into the diphthong
[Ai] appear as [Ae].
48a. The same remarks as in [Ai] except that the older vowel-
groups appear as [ao].

• 50a. Some speakers begin the diphthong [ua] with an opener

tongue-position.
58a. In intervocalic positions, [ph] and to a less extent
[th, th kh] are aspirated to a les? degree and tend to become
fricatives Thus (sapha) ‘turban’ is often pronounced tsaFa).
58b. Simlarly [b] and to a less extent [d, qs g] between
vowels are pronounced with loose articulation so that they resemble
somewhat the corresponding fricatives. Tims (daba) Maw suit’
is often pronounced as (daoa).
59a Between vomels [J] and [ch] tend to be pronounced as
forward [J-f] (t.e. sonant of c) and [p] respectively. Tims (raJa)
‘king’ and (be'cha:) ‘spread’ are often pronounced (roJ+a) and
(be'pa).
61a. The dental and post-alveolar varieties of [n] do not occur
initially or between vowels, hence the native name* .of the

1. Compare a similar case in English where the prefix ex-, the suffix
-est etc., may be pronounced with e or I.
2. The native name of the Gurraukbi letter representing [kj i* (k«k:r<)
of that representing (kh) is (kha:kh «) and so on.
 ll 2

Gurniukhi letters representing these sounds is (nenia) and (nana)

pronounced with alveolar [n].
6ib. Similar is the case with [p], the GurmukhI letter being

called [JaJia],
61c. [pi usually results from [i] followed by [e, a, o, u]
when one or both of them is nasalised.
62a. [13] a!so does not occur initially or doubled. The
GurmukhI letter representing this sound is called [sqga].
64^7. Some seakers with a speech defect use a fricative [t]
instead of rolled [r]. That, however, is considered incorrect.
64b. [r] is never doubled, hence the native name of the
GurmukhI letter representing this sound is [rara].
63a. [p] does not occur at the beginning of a word, nor is it
doubled. The name of the GurmukhI symbol is (rapa) or [rapa].
66b. There is a number of words, however, in which [r] and
[p] come together, e.g. (kArpa) ‘hard’, [kArp bArpe] ‘black and
grey (hair)', (hArpa) obi. pi, of (hArep) ‘myrcbalan* (khArpa,)
‘rough-book’etc. Some speakers use a letufiex fricative variety
[ j] instead of [r] which with [p] gives the impression of a long [p].
G7fl. [0] does not occur long or double nor initially and
finally except in the name of the GurmukhI symbol for this
sound which is [ttaoa] or [uaua]. In orthography it ;s very often
represented by the native symbol for [b] and sometimes also
pronounced so.
72a. [F, 0, 0, 8. x] and fc] are not independent phonemes in
Ludhiani but ceeur as alternative or subsidiary sounds for [ph. b,
th, d, kh] and [c(h)] respectively.
76a. [h] does not occur long or double except in (ohho) ‘alas’I
The name of the GurmukhI symbol for this sound is [haha].
 173

Chief difficulties experienced by English speakers

in learning Ludhianl and vice versa.
766. English speakers find it difficult to pronounce nasal
vowels while Ludhiani speakers often nasalise English vowels in
(he vicinity of nasal consonants.
76c. English diphthohgs [er, ou] are pronounced as [e:, o:]
by Ludhiani speakers, while Ludhianl [e, o] are pronounced as
diphthongs [er, ou] by English speakers.
76<f. English speakers fail to make any distinction between
the Ludhiani unaspirated and aspirated voiceless plosives and
affricates [p, t, t, k, c], whereas the Ludhiani speakers do not
aspirate the similar English sounds [p, t, k, tf].
76e. English speakers do not distinguish between the
Ludhiani dental [t, d] and post alveolar [t, $,] pronouncing them
always as alveolar sounds. Ludhiani speakers pronounce the
English alveolar |t, d] as post alveolar [t, <|].
76/. The English affricates [tj, cjj] are articulated by the
tip of the tongue, while the Ludhiani [c, I] are articulated by the
blade, the tip remaining depressed behind the,lower teeth.
76^. Ludhiani speakers pronounce the English [6, 5] as
dental [th, d] respectively.
766. English speakers find it difficult to pronounce the
Ludhiani [p] sound, while Ludhiani speakers pronounce the [^] of
English orthography everywhere as rolled [r.]
Length.
S5a. Besides these four grades, there are variations in length
caused by the vicinity of certain consonants, e.g. a vowel is
longer before a voiced than before an unvoiced consonant. It is
also longer before a short than before a long consonant. A nasal
consonant is longer after a short than after a long vowel. This
seems to be a general phenomenon found in most languages.1
Length of a vowel in languages varies with its quality also.
(1) S*»«» D. Jones 'Outlines of English Fhoneties” §§ 537-57:
Trofimov and Jones “Fronunriation of Russian’1 §§ 736-59: E A.
Meyer “Englisrhe LautriautF' in Vol. VIII pt. 3 of Skrifter
ufgi/nn of K. Hunnlnistiska Vetevspaps San*fnn/let % Uppsala
 174

85b. The absolute length of a short vowel in isolated words

ranges between ten and twenty hundredths of a second, of a
half-long vowel between twenty and thirty, and that of a long one
between thirty and forty. A very short vowel is less than ten
hundredths of a second. In the case of consonants these limits
vary a good deal.*
85c. Tn connected speech the absolute length of a sound is
considerably shortened.
85d. Examples of the length of [i, u, a and.9]
bik ‘be sold’ 10-0 hundredths of a second
bik:(a) ‘skin* 7*0 »»
'pif.a ‘body, physique’ 4-2 v tt
un ‘weave' 17*0 it tt

i/na: ‘cause to be woven' 8*0 n tt

bAg ‘run, flow' 12*0 11 tt
bAg:(9) Tierd' 10-0 ft it
'5Ago ‘place' 12-0 >t tt
'un:i ‘nineteen' 4-0 tt a
Jagia ‘personal name’ 6*0 tt tt
b9t:o ‘stone’ 6*0 tt *»
?. Examples of the length of other vowels.
bi: ‘seed’ 40*0 hundredths of a second.
'pitfttt ‘ground, pounded’ 12*0 tt tt
sa:r ‘essence' 39*5 tt tt
main ‘respect’ 38*3 TJ it

'sara. * whole ' 21-0 >> it

'kana ‘ one-eyed ' 22*2 ft ft

'kaula ‘ reed ' 11*5 tt 11

'Jainda ‘ knowing ' 31*0 1} . ii

'Janda ‘ going ' 15*0 >> 11

'una * deficient ' 22*0

* These results wero obtained .from,, measurement of u

large number of kyraographic tracings.
 175

bAsId ‘ physician ’ 36*0 hundredths of a second.

'bAeda ‘ promise * 22-5 >» ii

kAOIcl ‘ cowrie shell ’ 370 »> t

'cAoda ‘ fourteen 9 20-0 a tt

'mAedia ‘ flour * 12*0 it tt

'kAOdjla ‘ ornament of cowries * 11-5 tt

85 f. Long vowels should be distinguished from double

vowels which form separate syllables with a dimuniendo between,
e. (j. in (tcol) ‘wash thou \ and (Loo) ‘wash you’, the total length
of the vowels is nearly the same, but in the latter word [oo] form
two syllables while in the former [o] is a single syllable.

89 a. Sometimes when the word is initial, the initial conso¬

nant is somewhat lengthened, but this lengthening is not signi¬
ficant.

90 a. In long plosives and affricates, the effect of length is

produced by holding the stop longer than in short plosives. In
other long consonants the whole sound is held longer. Similar
is the case with double consonants but they receive an extra
impulse on their last part. In the group nasal+plosive, the length
of the whole is nearly the same when the group behaves as double
and when it behaves as long.
90 b. Examples of the length of long and double con¬
sonants:—
Jiddi /.‘discussing* dd=29 hundredths of a second
Jid:i adj. ‘ obstinate9 d: =21 „ „

bun'da ‘ weaving ' . u=9*l, n=18*3, d=4*5

bunda * ear-ornament * u=6*3, n=16*0, d=50

JaTnda ‘ knowing ’ a:=31, n=ll, d=8*5

Jandd ‘ g«h«g 1 a=15, n=16*5, d=5 0
 m
. 103 a. The following examples illustrate the d'fffirenee in
intonation caused by emphasis:-

—
— — — .— —

AS1 pin^a * calie a with emphasis on asI

■'1-1 . —^
•A

mun^a hun§ gea e with emphasis on munqa,

—
— — —

tero ki n*5 g 1 with emphasis on tera.

—
— —
-

tera n*5 ki £ ! with emphasis on dA5.

—
— — —

mun<la kit:he gea ? with emphasis on munqa.

— — — — —

thali ure kArl witli emphasis on thali.

Rhythm.

109. Whenever convenient, the stressed syllables in a

sentence are so arranged as to follow each other at approxi¬
mately equal intervals of time. If necessary and permissible by
grammar, this is effected by changing the order of words in the
sentence e.g. in tera ki n*5 g ?, tera nAo ki e ?
 TEXTS.
Page.
1. pArja de pcag. <The Fate of Subjects) __ 178
2. khu da CcAgpa. (Dispute about u Well) _ 180
3. peo put did galld. (Conversation between Father
and Son) _ ' _ _ _ 182
4. SArban pcAgat di katha. (Story of Sarbanf the
B hag at) — __ __ _ 184
5 gtdiap gidjd te bagcea:p di kAtha. (Story of Jackal
Jackaless and Wolf) _ _ _ 188
6. rapajie Uene an ka gita? (Will You Take Rupees
or Qital) _ _ _ _ 190
7. poistia da cAoidri. (The Headman of Lazy
Persons) _ _ _ _192
8. ji-SApea Jail. (The Ruby with a Burnt Heart) _ 196
9. madori bapiu. (A Juggler Father) _ 198
10. bamair rohi di kahanL (Story of a Sick Traveller) 200
11. Ccalie dArji di kahani. (Story of a Foolish Tailor) 202
12. ik sahukair te ode kcope. (^1 Merchant and his
Horses) _ _ _ _ 204
Vocabulary — — — — 215
 TEXTS.

1. pArja de pca:g ,

do p*ai se || dnd t6 | kuch kharabd ho gAi | e:s Ui |

sarka :r ne | ona nd | desankala deittai] pin^o | pAn che

ko ba:t gA£ se | ta sAnja pAe gAi|l sApak de kr.n^e ,

ik ruk:h de:x ke | on:a ne keha j uca1o | ede hetba

ra:t kAt:a Wall" PcUtJe ropa te | 6:na nd ni:d na cu !

ta gal:d kAran lAg:a pas|| bAj;e p<ai ne keha i “je mAg

raja homa | ta pArja nu bAj;a sukh d§a”|| chot:e ne

keha | “je mXe raja homa | ta bAj;a dukh dea”|l

hon rAb(:a; de kArne ki hoe | jis nag:ar de nej;e 6

bAetihe si 1 ot:he da raja mAr gea | te ode ula:d koi

nAl sill nAgar de lok:a ne | taI ke sld kit:i bAi *hat:hi

sega:r ke ehA<l:9 daJ:e | ji nd § Apni gArdan te

batha Uoe | ose nd ap:d raja bana laJ :e’ll JAd

hat:hi chac^ea | ta ond nag:ar da ta koi a:dm! | Apnl

gArdon te na bathaea | pat jAd 6 on:a peaJ:ako:l a§a 1

t5 one chot:e p«ai nd | gArdan te batha leall lok:a

nd CcAt: | ode gAlca ha:r pa dit:e | ar 6 nu Apnd raja

bana leal! hun 6 laga:a pArja nd dukh dem | pArja da

nxlf-fl ca dAm a geall so:c sox ke on:a ne keha—

 TRANSLATIONS.

1. The Fate of Subjects.

Two brothers wore[J By them | some mischief was done | for this

by Government j they j wore transported [[ From village | five, Bix

Ko* distance | they had gone f then evening feil|| On tho sido of the road |

seeing a tree J they Raid j “Come J under it let us pass the night”U

On stones on the ground | they did not get sleep |

so they began talking|| The elder brother said J “If I

woro king | then T shall give mnch comfort to the subjects”!} The younger

said j “ If I were king | then I shall give much trouble”!!

Now- as God would do it [ the town near which

they were sitting | the king thereof died | and he had no

offspring!! The people of the town | assembling resolved J “Adorning

an elephant, we should let him loose | whomsoever he takes

on his neck | we should make him our king”U When the

elephant was let loose | no person of the town | he took

on his neck J but when he came near the brothers J

the younger brother he | took onto his neck(! The people

at once | put garlands about his neck | and made him

their kingH Now he began to give trouble to the subjects | the subjects

were greatly harassed (lit. their breath came into the nose) (J After thinking
 180

bAi “gda bAfa p.aie | caIo 6 de ko:l cal:iJe | 9r 6 nu k&J:e |

pAi Snd sam^aoe | san:u dukh nd dAoe” |
lok:a de kAhe | bApa p*ai Apn§ chot:e pcai ko:l
aea | ar onu kAe:n lag:ea | pAi, “tet:6 pArja bApi dukhi e |
tu Aea :d dukh nd dSt#|| g sun ke | chot:e pcai ne jaoa:b
dit:a | pAi “dukh pAona ta | pArja de pca:g ce sa 1 mAe

tAen.u pAel:d i kAertta si | pAi je mA§ raja homd | ta pArja

nu bApa dukh dedl| je pArja ne sukh pAona hunda j
ta td bi ta ko:l e bAgttha si | hat:hi tA§n:u gArdan te
batba lAenda”lj

2. khd da CaAgpa

v
kise a:dmi n§ | Apni gAli: ca khu luaea|| sari gAli

nu paui poAran da sukh ho geail ku$cir mAgro J

khu Dale di Apne gamanc^i na:l lapai ho pA’IJ e:spar
6 ne gamancli nft | pan! p«Arn6 mAnd kAr dit:a | hun
gamancy nil [ bApi muskal ho gAi|| 6 de:xke | 6 ne khu
mul Ias lea | ar pAelre malak nd [ pani p,:Arn5 mAnd
kAT9tta||

hun pAel:a malak baki:l ko:l gea | ar puc:hea |

bAi “kim§ mA2n:u ta khu co pan! pcArna mile | ar
mere gamanqi nu nd mile”|| bakiil n§ keha | “§ td
asaingAl: g | daoa kAr de”|| adalat ca baki:l ne keha | bAi

“find khu bec:ea 6 | pani ni bee :ea | pani eda e”i| adalat
n§ ese t(a)rd phAE'sla kArattall hun phe:r pAel:e malak
 lai
they said | “There is his elder brother j come, let us go to him | aed

ask him 1 to advise him J not to give us so much trouble’^

At the people's request j the elder brother came near his younger

brother J and began to say to him | “The subjects ore much harassed at your

hands. E>o not give them scr much tronble"[[ Hearing this | the younger

brother J replied J “To get trouble indeed | was in the fate of the subjects |

I had told you even beforehand f that if I were king | I should

givo much trouble to the subjects[[ 1£ the subjects had to get comfort |

then you, also, were sitting nearby | the elephant would have taken

you on his neck.’’([

2. Dispute about a Well.

Some man [ had a well dug (lit. attatched) in his utreetJJ This afforded

facility of drawing water to the whole street[| After some time

a qnarrel arose botwoen the owner of the well and his naighbour[[ At this

he his neighbour | prevented from drawing waterjl Now

the neighbour | felt a great difficultyJj Seeing this | ho purchased

the well | and the previous owner | be prevented from

drawing water U

Now the first owner went to a pleader | and asked |

“How, indeed can I be allowed to draw water | and

my neighbonr be not allowed to do so?”U The pleader said | “This

forsooth is an easy affair | Bring a law-smt”H In court the pleader said—

“He has sold the well only \ and not the water | water belongs to him”[|

The court decided exactly in this way|| Now again the former owner J
 182

nh | Apne gamdncli nfi khu c6 panl pcAran t6 ro:k dat:a||

hun 6 gaman^i baki:l ko:l gea | ar kgha | bAi
“mA§ ta khu e:s Ui mul lea si | bAi §da malak bAn ke |
mAe a:p ta pan! p,Ara ar pAel:e malak nfi na pcAran dea||
mA§n:e rapAjia bi khArcea ar gAl:a bi nd bAnI,| mA§
cAona § j pAi kise t(a)ra adalat S phAesla kAre | bAi
mA§ bi pani pcArd | ar e bi psAre”|| baki:l bolrea |
“ac:ba, ed:a i ho jau | tfi daoa kArde”|| adalat ca bakiil
n§ keha | pAi “je khu de pAsl:e malak nfi | khfi e
bec:ea e | pan! nAi bec:ea | ta finfi hukam dit:a jaoe |
pAi khfi c5 Apnd panl kA^:a Uoe | nAhi ta khu da
nAma malak | dAs rap As ro:j hArja 1au”|| e sun ke
doha nfi soc:ea | bAi khu cfi sara panl kis tra mk:al
sAkda s|| akhi:r on:a nfi rajinama kAr lea | bAi “ap:a
dome pani pcAr lea kAriJe | adalat de phAs:sle ta | ese
tra hunde rAe:nge”||

3. peo put dla gel:a

peo—mnlea:!

put:—ha ji||

peo—ure a bib:a||
put:—aea ji | das:o ki kAenfi 5!

peo—tfi Aj:a pApn gea si?

put:—ji ha | par san:fi chut:i chet:i mil gAijJ

peo—ac:ha:! ki sabAb chet:i chu{:i mil gAi?
 183

prevented bis neighbour from drawing water from the well [|

Now the neighbour went to tho - pleader | and said j

“I indeed had bought the well | that becoming its owner |

I myself may draw water | and may not allow the former owner to do so||

Although 1 spent tho money | yet the thing did not turn out (i.e. I did not

8ucceed).|{ I want | that the court may decide somehow' J that

I also may draw water | and ho too may do bo[| The pleader said J

“All right, thus it will be | Bring a suib”d In court tho pleader

said | “If the former ownor of tho wrell | had sold

the well alone | and not tho wator | then he may be ordered

to remove his water from the well J othewise J the now owner

of the well | W'ill charge tan rupees a day as roof'd Hearing this [

they both thought | “How can the whole water bo removed

from tho wollF’jj At last they made uu agreement | “Let both

of us draw water | tho decisions of the court indeed J

will go on in this very way”|J

•« t

3. Conversation between Father and Son.

Father—Alula!

Sou—Yos sir||
; ‘ it.

Father—Come here dax*liug(|

Son—Just coming sir. Pleas* toll me | what you want to Bay||

Father—Did you go to school this morning ?

Son—Yes sir [ but we were given leave earlierd

Father—Is it ? I Why wore you given leave earlier V

 184

put:—ji sa^ia pdd:a kAlda si | pAi Apne ba:ccha de

put: jam :ea e||

peo—ha thi:k e | mAe bi akba:r ca pApea si||

ac:ha hon Id 6 dAs: | e pAi aj: tA§ kAm: ki kit:a||

put:—ji pAel:a ta mAe Apni kata:b de do bArke

A

pApe I phe:r pAnj saoa:! kat^e sAt: tap:e baba

phari:d de m& ja:nan:i cet:e kit:e | odu pic:he

sac^ie pad’.e ne SArbaa pcAgat di kAtha

sunai | phe:r san:d chut:i ho gAi||

peo—sArban di kAtha tAgn:u kAhi ka lag:i?

put:—ji bApi s6nl[|

peo—ac:ha pher mAgo:u bi sura[|

put:—ji h<5n la mA§ p«ul:a geall

peo— phe*.r mAe sunama?

put:—tusl suna deo td caqga i kAro, nAhi ta kAl

nd sao:u ma:r pAU||

peo—Iae phe*.r tceam na:l sun!)

4. SArban p^Agat di kAtha

raja jAsrat da nAo ta sunea i hdna g|| 6 ra:m

candar ji da peo sij| 6 ne Apni chot:i rani de kAhe
ra:mcander lAchman nd cAoda bArsa da bAnoba:s de:tta,
par a:p on:a de he.-rbe ca hiat geall mAran lag:e 6

ne keha, pAi “mA§n:fi rk: nkbi ne s(a)ra:p dit:a si||

6 de kArke mAenrd put:a de hAoke mArna pea|| gAl:
 185

Son—Sir oar teacher say* | tlmt a «Ou

has been born to our king[l

Father—Yes, you arn right | I also had read in a papoi([

Well, t<*ll me now | what work you did tu-daj, [|

Son—Sir, At first I | read two pages of my book |

then solved five sums || seven verses of Baba

F arid were learnt by heart j After that

our teacher | told us tho story of Sari >a u Bhagat |]

Then we were given leaveJJ

Father—How did voa find the story of Sarban V

Son—Sir very interesting (lit. beautiful) II

Father—Well then relate it to me also[|

Son—Sir now forsooth 1 have forgot!on ||

Father—Then may I relate itir

Son - If you relate it | you will do well indeed | for otherwise |

I shall get a beating to-morrow ||

Father—There now ! Listen with attention([

4. Story of Sarban, the Bhagat.

The name of King Jasrat (Dasaratha) | you must have heard [| He was

the fathnr of lt<tnv:hatulur\\ At the instance of his younger qm cq [

to Ramchamlar and Lachman [ an exile for fourteen years he gave j

but himself died of the anguish of separation from thom{[ When dying

be said J *‘A sage had cursed me |

on that account I J have had to die of separation from sonsj|

e:$ t(a)ra hoi!) pichli jam ca j mA£n:u sakair - khehan
da bApa sA5:k si|| jis bAn ca mAg | saka-.r khe.ida
hunda si | ot:he ik: rikhi rAgda si|| oar odi timi | ak:ba
to bn:e si|| on:d da ik: put: si | jida da5 sArban si||
sArban Apne md peo di | b^pi tAs:l kArda si|| hamesd
on:d nu bAsgi c baha: ke | moc^.-e cakd phirda si|j ik:
pheri 6n:a ne keha | “sArbana, sandi thbn^a pani pala:”|[
on:a nu ik: rukth de hetha batha: ke j SArban DAdi to
pani lAern cAlea gea||
Asdier mAe | ik: hiran de picihe J p«aj:ea janda si||
hiran n§ mAgniu Qa. na dit:i | chekiep meria
akiha to ol:e ho geall jAd SArban ne | pani pcAren lAi |
nAdi c Apna kcApa dpbiea \ ta mAen:u gApgAp di
auaij ai|| mAg sAmjea pAi hiran bol:ea ell c0At: 6d:ar
bain mareall fca:n sArban di- chat:i ce lsgiea | ar SArban
ne ku:k mari | “Iiae mAg idat gea”||e sun ke J znAe
cjArea | pAi mera ba:n td kise aidmi de lagieajj jAd mAe
pais gea | td dekhiea | pAi e td kise nkhi da put: ej|
mAe ode pAeid ca ja c)jg pea | ar 6 to Apni p0u]i bakhsai[|
pbeir mAenie odi chain co J bain kecp.eall td one keha j ‘ois
rukih de hethd | mere ©me md peo bAetlhe ©n|| mAe
onia 1a1 pani lAein aea sijj hun tfi | a pani da kcApa
Iae ja||. pAelia onia nu pani palai | pheir mera hall
das:!’ [| § kAen sair | SArban de pran nikial gAell

JAd SArban nu | pani Iaeid gAe deir ho gAi | ar mup

 187

The thing happened thuBjJ In the last birth \ I had a great fancy

for hunting}! In the forest where I | used to go hunting |

there lived a sage}} He and his wife | were blind

of eyes[( They had a sen [ whose name was Sarban([

To his parents Sarban } used to do a groat service}} Seating

them in the slings of a pole he always | carried them on shoulders!} Once

they said | ‘0 Sarban | give us cold water to drink’}} Seating them

under a tree | Sarban went to fetch water from a stream}}

On this side I } in punmit of a deer j wan running]}

The deer did not allow me to overtake it | and at. last

became out of my sight}} Whon Sarban (to fill it with water

immersed his pot into the stieara | I heard a sound of

gurgling}} I thought | the deer bad made it}} At once I discharged an arrow

in that direction}} The arrow struck into Sarban’s chest j and Sarban

gave out a cry j ‘Alas I am dead' ([ Hearing this j I was

frightened J that my arrow forsooth | had hit. a human being|] When I

went near | I saw J that it was indeed the son of a sage}} I

fell down upon his feet 1 and had my fault forgiven by him}}

Thereafter I from his chest J extracted the arrow}} Thereupon he said |

1 Under that tree | my blind parents are sitting|| I

had come to take water for them}} Now you | take this jar

of water|} First let them drink water [ and afterwards inform them of my

condition’}} Immediately on saying this | Sarban’s life was gone}}

When Sarban | to fetch water | had long been away and did not
 188
ke nd aea | td 6de ma peo kAe:n lag'.e | “ki sabAb? aj
SArbm nu de:r lag:i | suk:h hooe” | Aen:e ca I mere pAerd
da kkApka sunke | sAmje f pAi SArban a gea|| puc:han
lag:e | ‘sArbana aj: de:r kJu lag:i?’|| mA§ cup: rgha | ar
pani da katora ag:e kAratta[| 6 bolie jAd tdl tu
h ni dAsda | pAi Aj:a tAsn:u de:r kJu hoi | as! pani nA!
pincLII hda mAsoiu sara hail! dAsiand pea:|J 6 ta sunan sa:r J
lagla barlaip karan ar bol:e | pAi ‘san:n SArban kole Ias
ca1:*|| mAg ondnu | jitihe SArban pea si | Iae aea | phe:r
mAgo:u kAe:a lagie | pAi ‘ik: cita bena:,[| jAd mA§ cita
banai ta | 6 dome | sArban nu god:i ca lAeke | cita ca bAe
gAe | ar mAgnlu keha | pAi “cita nu Ag: la de,,|| mAe Ag:
la dit:i|| jAlde hoe | on:a nd mAeniu sraip dit:a [ Akhe |
‘he pap'.i | jis tra as! | put: de hAoke mAre a ese trd
tu bi put:d de hAoke mAre’ll so hun a ra’.mcandar Uchman
da bAnoba:s | mA§n:u ma:r ke cha^:u’,||

5. gid:ap, gidpi te bagcea:p di kAtha.

krse jag gal c | ik: quqgi khAd: si | te oda mu bApa

pcipo si|| 6de c ik gid:ap | te gidpl rAede sell ik: din

6n:d nu ti lag:i|| gidpi ne gid:ap nu keha | “caIo | nAdt te

pani pi:a cal:iJa,,|| gid:ap boiled, | “ot:he td bagcea:p

rAgda e|| 6 ta ap:a nu kha 1au,,|| gidpi bol:i | “tu phikar

na kAr | mAe ot:he Ahi ji gAl: banamagi | ji te ap:a

 189

come back | then his parents began to say J ‘What is rea<on ? to-day it

has taken Sarban long | may it be well with him’ [| In the meantime | hearing

the sonnd of my footsteps | they thought | that Sarban had come | and began

to ask | ‘Sarban ! | why did it take you so long to-day?’ | I kept silent | and

held out the cup of water before fAewJJ They said | ‘Until you

tell | why you took long to-day | we will not driuk

water^l Now the whole story I was obliged to tellH They forsooth immediately

on hearing it [ begen to make lamentations [ and Faid | ‘Take us to

Sarban’H I them | where Sarban had been lying | brougbt(l Then they

said to me | ‘Make a pyre’|[ When I had made the pyre J

they both } taking Sarban into t.aeir lap j sat on the

pyre | and 8aid to me | ‘Apply fire to the pyre’[[ I applied fire

to »<H When burning they | cursed mo | saying ‘0 wicked J

Just as we | have died through separation from our son | iu the

like manner may you alRo | die through separation from your sons’[J So now

this exile of Ramchnndir and Lachman | will end in my death”([

5.—Story of Jackal, Jackaless and Wolf.

In a certain jungle j there was a deep den | and its opening was

very narrow[| In it a jackal | and jackaless livedQ One day

they felt thirsty Q The jackaless said to the jackal | “Como let ns go

to the stream to drink water’’U The jackal said | ‘‘There, forsooth, lives

a wolf | be will indeod devour as”[| The jackaless said | “You need not

be afraid | there I shall invent such a story | that we may

 190

pcini bi pi UJie | ar beg«8a:p bi apa nu kuch nd kAhe”||

§ kAe ke | donio | pan! pi:n tur pAe[|

jAd 6 bagceaip de nepe pAode | td gidpi bol:i |

“gidiapa, mdmie nu rd:m rd:m kAr IabII” gidiap

kAen lagiea I mera td ti na:l SAijg(a) sukiea pea e |

boil ni hunda”|| gidpi ne keha | “pheir pan! kJu n!

pi lAeada”|| § sun c*Ati gidiap ng | taj: ke pau! pi lea j

ar gidpi nu keha | “td bi pan! pi lAe”IIjAd donio [ pan!

pi cuk:e | td gidpi bagceaip nu ktem lagii | “mdm:d |

suckle do bade an|| gidiap kAeda e | ‘dom§ mere an’ | mAs

kAgni a [ ‘dome mere an Ml tu CAlia ke | saqia phAsisla

kArde”ll bagceaip n§ sociea J bAi dnia nail ja ke | sarea

nu kha 1au|1 5 so:c ke | on:d de mAgar ho lea|| jAdo

6 tm:§ | gidiap di khAcj; te ae | td gidpi bolii | “Iae

mdm’.d | tu ure khAp | as! bacie Ue aJie”ll gidiap gidpi |

Apni khAcp.aca bAp gAg | bagceaip bahar khApa reha!|

k^Apiika mAgro gidpi ne khA^ia co mu bahar kAqia ke keha |

"manna | as! td Apna apie i rajindma kAr leaf! ik: bacia

mA£ 1a8 lea | ik gidiap ne|| hoa saniu tetio | phAeisla

karAOin di lolp n!’'j| e sun bagceaip sarminde ho ke j

Apne keAr mup aeail

6. rapaJie lAen§ an ka gita?

ik seith de | tin nAokiar si[| jAd daoali de dm |

 191

drink water | and yet the wolf may not do us any harm”||

Saying this | both | set off to drink water[[

When they reached near the wolf | the jackaless said |

“0 jackal | greet (lit »ay Ham Ham) the uncle”[| The jackal

replied | “My throat forsooth is dry with thirst |

I cannot speak”J| The jackalsss said j “Then why do’nt you drink

waterV”(| Hearing this | the jackal at once | drank water to his heart's con¬

tent and said to the jackaless | “You also may drink waterJJ” When both had

drunk water | the jackaless said to the wolf | “ Uncle, there are

two cnbs of ours[[ The jackal says ] ‘Both are mine’ | I

say ‘Both are inine’|J Coming there, you J make our decision’’U

The wolf thought | “Going with them ] I « shall devour

them all“|| Thus thinking | he walked along with them[[ When they

all three | came at the den of the jackal | the jackaless said | “Look

uncle | you stand here j we may fetch the cubs’'l| The jackal and jackaless

entered into their den | and the wolf remained standing outside[j

After some time | the jackaless | showing her face out of the den said {

“Uncle J we ourselvos forsooth have mado a reconciliation!! I have taken

one cub [ the jackal has taken the other[[ Now from yon we

do not want any dQcision”|[ Hearing this | and becoming ashamed J

the wolf came back to liiB abode ||

6.—Will you take Rupees or Uita\

A ceitain banker J had three servants U When on the day of Diwali |

 192

onia nu anaim dein lagiea | ta one pAj pAj rapaJia aia |

tin: t<eria la laJia | ar gable | ik potihi gita di t,Ar lAi||

pheir ik:(a) nAokiar nu bula ke keha [ pAi “tAe rapaiJe

Uene an | ka gita?a,|| 6 boliea | “ji, mA§ pA^a hoea

ta hAs nl | gita Iae ke ki kAruga? | tusi mAsniu

rapaJie de deo,,|| se:tb ue dnu rapaJie de:tte||

pheir dujle nAokiar nu sadlea | ar puclhea | bAi " tAe ki

lAeaa e | rapaJie ka gita?”|| 6 boiled | “ji mA§ pA^ea

hoea ta hAe | par mAenu kcAr de landed ca | gita pApn

da bell kitiheJI je tusi mA£n:u rapaJie dAmo | ta sad

kAm: Ao:nge,,j| 6 ne bi rapaJie le Iae | hun tijie

nAok:ar nu sAd:a ke pucihca | bAi “tASnfi ki lopida e?”[|

6 boliea | “ji meri bucjli ma | roij thAokar duare | gila

sunan jandi e|i p tusi mAemu gita de deo | ta mAe ma

nu | gita kc^re suna dea kArall o nu thAokar duare jain

di khecial na kAml pAu”|| e sun ke | selth ne

6 nu gita phapa: ditli f ar inAgrd pAnj rapaJie bi

delttell jAd o:a nAokiar ne | gita kholii | ta ode co | siune

di mohar (or moir) nik:ali|| e deix ke | dujie nAokiar

sarminde ho gAg||

7. poistia da cAoidri.

ik raje n§ dekihea | pAi “hoir ta sare lokia de |

Apne Apne cAoidri an | par poistia da koi cAoidri ni,,||

 193
he wanted ta give them cuilomarp present sj|Thoa of five rupees each lie

made three pile* | and in the centra J a copy of the Oita | ho placed^

Then oalling a servant he said | ‘ Will you take rupees

or He replied J “Sir, I forsooth am not titeiate |

what shall I do with the Oita ? | you may . ilcaeo

give mo rupees’’j| The banker gave him jupee»(l

Thou he oalled the socomt servant J and asked | ‘Whit do you

want to take j rupees or Gita’t [[ He replied | “Sir, iudooil I am

literate | but amid domestic affairs | I cannot fin 1 timo

to read Gita\\ If you give me rupees j they will s<-rve a

hundred purposes ” |[ He also took rupees[| Now calling the third

servant he asked J “What do you want ?” JJ

He said [ “Sir my old mother | daily to the temple | goes to hear the Gita

neU#l[[ If you givo me Gila [ then I to my mother {

shall read out the Gita even at home[[ Of going to the temple

she will not have to tako the trouble,f[| Hearing this | tho banki r

handed over the Gila to him aud lator gave him five rupees also|j

When that servant | opened the Gita | then from it J camo out a gold

mnhai (( Seeing this f the other servants were ashamed{{

7.—The Headman of Lazy Persons.

A kirg saw | that all other people | bad

their owd headman | but the lazy persons bad nonrjj

 194

6 ne hukam ditia | pAi "etlhd dma de ander sndar pcisiti

Apna cAoidri banal ke darbair1 ca hajer kAmM||
poistia r§ kAtlha kitia | sare kehan lagie | Akbe—
“Aje la Atih(a) din pae an | cAoidri baca Umage* |
hune ki kali e,,|| ese t(a)ra kArde kArde | At:h(a) din
biit gAell raje ne pbe:r liukam dit:a | pAi “je atiha drad ca
cAoidri n*bi banadge | td mAe sAbna nu kAe:d kAr 1au”||
e Atlh(a) dm bi f Aem§ i JAq gAE | poistia te cAoidri nd
bmeall hun raje ne sare poisti kAsid kAr Iae ar
keha I pAi “jfcpa sAb te bAota poisti hAU | ohi cAoidri
sAmjea jau”||

hun sare poisti Apne Apne hukie | te pcAqg ar docked de

pedlie | Iae ke | a gAE'l seal l da si mahinia | pcnJe phuis
bacha ke | lambe pAE rAhe | ar hukie pcAr ke pila lAgia pae||
hun ikia poisti nu jo ai Oqga,! oda hukia gir pea | te phuis
nu Agia lAg gAi|| hAoli hAoli phuis lagiea jAlanJj e deikh | hoir
la sare poisti | utlba ke lamle ho gAE | tinl poisti
bAEtihe rAbell dma co iki jAna bollea, | “caIo bAi | apid
bi cal:Oe | Agia td ne^e ne^e Aodi jandi e,,H dujia
kA§da | “koi ^Ar ni | Aje da:r e"|| tijia bollea | “oe | cupi bi
kAro | thuaoiu galid kArde | ailkas nl Aodl,,|| raje
n§ keha I bAi “5 sAb td bAota poisti Ef| aji(o) to e
poistia da cAoidri hoea.”

1. or dalbair.
2. or banailmage.
 195
He gave ordors | that ■within eight days j lazy persons |

electing their headman | should present him in the Court]]

Lazy persons had a meeting]] All began to say |

“There are still eight days | wo shall elect our headman ]

there is no hnrry now"]] Acting in this way | tho eight days

wore passod|[ The king again gave ordors | “If you do not elect your

headman within eight days ] I shall imprison you all ” ]]

Those eight days also | passed without result ] The lazy persons could not

elect their headman]] Now the king imprisoned all the Lazy persons |

and said | “Whosoever is the laziest of all \ will bo regarded

as headroau”]] * *

Now all lazy persons I their pipes j and caps of bhang

and poppyheads | taking | cainej] Of winter it was the month J Spreading

straw on the ground | they lay down | and filling their pipes began to smoke]]

Now that one of the lazy pnrsonB felt Bloepioeas J his pipe foil down ] and

caught fire]] The straw began to burn slowly]] Seeing this j all other

lazy persons | rising up got aside]] Throe lazy persons

*K • i • • i*i •
remained sitting]] One of them said | “Come friends ] we also

may go | Fire indeed nearer and nearer |.is approaching"]] The second

said—“There is no foar ] it is yet at a distance"]] The third said |

“Sirrah, be silent now | when talking, do you | not feel drowsiness ? (] The

king 9ai$ | “He is the laziest of all]] From tp»*day, , he

has been made the headman of lazy persons”]]

 196
«

8. ji-SApea

kise karaceair1 nil | ik: pheri la:l I&bieajl 6 n§ kAnc

do tukpa sAmja ka | Apne khotie de gAl l9tka:tta|| hun
kamceair nu | krte mit:i IaeIu dareoS pair jana pea|j
darea de kSoqe | bepi deux ke | on§ m(a)la nfi pucihea f
pAi “mAgnifi pair lagcai ki lA£ga”U m(a)la nfi khotie
de • gAl lAtkada lail sona lagieafi one keha | bAi
“dia2 teti61 pAesa Mila kuch nS lAendad tu mAgoiu
di kAnc da tukpa de de”|J kamceair khus ho geail
ceAi: lail kholl ka | m(a)la de hAtih phapaeall sg:® m(a)la
ne | lail ApnS bais nail bAnia lead

hun ik bapari aea|| 6ne dekihea pAi bars nail ta j

lail bbmea bcea Ugiada e|| je saclio lail hoea | ta pahj
saI: sad rapelie da hon& e|| b «o:c ke | m(a)la nu pucihea
pAi “bdl3 call b&nela hcga kAnc jeha 1 tA2 beciana e||
idA2 tt£niu §da mull | iki rapaJia danid §”|| m(a)la
ne keha | “aho ji”|| rapaJia Iae ke 1 lail bapari de
haoalle ki*ia||bapari nS ApcS sehar ja ke | lail di pArahk
karai | ta 6 sacii mucil lail nlkialeall bapari be kapupe
ca lapeit ke | eoiuikha caJ rAkihe cfceqiea||

hun ois rehar de raje nd | lail di lo:p pAi||

one t^qora pherea | pAi jide jide pa lail hoia|| 6 Iae ke
mere koil aoed sare jAori bAce [ Apn§ ApnS lail Iae ke |

1. or koameair, kcamceair. 2. or s&duix ca.

 197

8. The Ruby with a Burnt Heart.

A certain potter | once found a rubyl[ Thinking it to

bo a bit of crystal he J suspended it about bis donkey's neck[[ Now

once the potter j had to go across a river to fetch his clayjj

At the bank of tho rivor | seeing a boat | he asked tho boatman |

“What will you charge for taking me across” ?U The boatmah took a fimcy

for the ruby hanging by the donkey's neck[| He replied j

“From you I | shall not charge any money (lit. pice or half-pioe) | you

give me this piece of crystal”|J The potter was pleased J

and instantly taking off the ruby | handed it to the boatraan[[ No v the boat¬

man tied the ruby to hiB bambooQ

Now a merchant camelj He saw that with the bamboo indeed |

there seemed a ruby to have been tied|| If really it were a ruby j then it

must be worth soveral (lit. five, sevon) hnnlred rup>es{J Thinking this |

he asked tho boatman | “The crystal-like thing fastened In the bamboo j do

yon want to sell?[| I to you its price J a rupee shall give”|| The boatman said |

“ires 8ir”[| Taking the rupee | he handed ovor the ruby to the merchani[]

The merchant | going to his town J got the ruby eramined j Then it truly

turned out to bo a ruby(| Wrapping it in cloth | the merchant kept it in a

safe.

Now the king of that town | stood in nSfed of a i*uby|l He announced by

boat of dram j “Whoever ha* got rubies | should bring them to n»e”(j

All jewellers (lit. their Sons) | bringihg their rabies [ came to the king[j
 198

raje ko:l ae|| 6 bapari bi a^ajf raje n§ sAbde la:l dek:be |

par kise da la:l pasind na aea 1| pheir bapari nu keha |

bAi “tii bi Apna la:l dili'da’' || 6 bol:ea | “ji pAella

mulikAr 1ao|| je thuaqie pasind ail | Ias laJlo | nAi na sAi"||

raje ne pucihea | “ki mut e?,f || 6 bol’.ea | “ji pauj sao

rapaJ:e”|| raje ne keha, "ociha | je la.il hoea | td mAg

t as Din J pAnj sao rupAg de dedga” ||

hun jAd bapari ne kapiepa khollea | td ki deixda

e | pAi fide c(a) td | sua di cutki rAe gAi || 6 Iagiea

ro:n | Akhe <;hAg h&.g mere Jail nti ki hoea”?|| fi sun ke |

lail gusie nail boliea | Akhe “tti ronid e | mera td ji SAp

ke sud ho gea” || bapari nd pucihea [ “6 krkiard?”||

loll kAein lagiea | “pAella mXs kam^eair nu ldbiea | 6

nfi mAsniu khotie de gAl bAnia drtia j| pheir m(a)la

n§ lea | one bd:s nail bAa lea i| 6 te Ue rki rapAg nd

mul lea | ar hun a tu mere f sare i pAnj sad rapAg

mul maqgea || fi deixke j mera ji sApda ka rA§da”?||

9. madari bapiu.

kise hatmanle da | kufi munqa | madari da tamasia

dekihan gA£ || • koAr a ke | kupi bolli, | “bira | madari

ne td | bA£3 sdne tamasie kitiej kAde 6 kapiaj;e hethd |

seo kAclia danda si | kAde anairj kAde kus | te. kAde ku.s” |j
 199

That, merchant also came[| The king examined the rubies of all {

but did not approve any one’f[[ He • then said to the merohant |

'‘You also show me your ruby"[| He replied | “Sir first settle the

priced If you like it | you nifty purchaser it \ otherwise not”|| The

king said J “All right I if it were a ruby j to you I | shall pay five

hundred rupees'll

Now when the merchant unwrapped the cloth | what he saw

then was | that in it indeed l had been left a p'nch of ashes|| He

began to lament | saying “Alas ! what has become of my ruby ” ? \[

Hearing this | the ruby said angrily | ‘‘You are weeping | my heart

forsooth has bnrnt into asbes”H The merchant enquired | “How is

this *? ” |J The ruby said | “First I was found by the potter | he tied

me to the. neck of his donkeyl| Then the boatman took me | lie

fastened me to his bambooH From him you purchased me for a

rupee | and now for mo l you asked only five hundred rupees as pripe|J

Seeing this | tell vie whether my heart should have burnt or remained ? ,f IJ

9. A Juggler Father*
,%1 m ' *‘ *

Of a shopkeeper | the girl and boy | went to soe the

show | of a jugglerH Coming home | the girl said | “Brother j'the

•juggler J.'iorsootb j’ performed very wonderful tricks | SomeUmee

from j beneath the cloth | ho produced an apple | sometimes a

pomegranateH sometimes one. thing | and sometimes another*fl

 200

munc^Q boliea I “madari ne ki tamasie kAra§ g | j§£e

tamasie Apna bap:u|hatli te bABtlha kArda e?”||

kupi ne pucihea | “6 kAbe jae?,,|| munc|a boliea |

“Apni hatli ik pcaacta pea e [j je koi | do rupAE seir

da keeo mAijgada e | td bapiu 6de co | do rupAe seir

da kceo kAcJI® danda e || je koi | d,u:p rupAg seir da

meqge | td ose co | quip ruPAe se:r dci kceo kAcf.a danda e ||

peome koi keha i kceo maqge j bapiu sAb tara da kceo |

ose pcon^e cd | kActie danda e || hon td dAsi | bAe ka

nd bapiu da tamasia | znadari nald bi sona?’’||

10. bamair rahi di kahani.

kise thA5 | kalie makaiu ca | iki aidmi rAgda si ||

6 de koil | iki rabi aea || ope rahi nu pucihea | bAi

“td kitibe caliea €?” || rahi ng kgha | (imA§ qaikdar

koil jand b” || 6 ne rahi nd rotli pucihi | ar cair

rotiid ode agie rAkiha ditiia | alp kuch saluna lAen

cAlea gea || 6 de saluna leASdea leAoded | rdbi ne

care rotfa kha lAJia || 6 pheir hoir rotiid Ueia gea | td

onie circa | rahi ne sara saluna kha cha^ieall 6 bacara |

cair ratlld rAhk ke | pheir hoir saluna lAeln gea || jAdd

mof ke aea | td dekihea | pAi eis hAjrat n§ | e coir rotiid

muka lAJid || e:stra kArde kArde | 6 sold rotda kba gea

J. In Ludhi&nt the common word for story is kAtha.

 201
The boy replied | “What are the trickB performed by the juggler at

compared, to those that our father | does sitting at the shop Y" ||

The girl enquired | “Of what kir-d are they V" The boy said |

“At our shop | there is lying a vessel [[ If any one J asks for ghee

worth two rupees a seer | then father from it | takes, out ghee worth

two rupees a seer If any one J aBks for ghee worth one and a half

rupees a seer | then father even from that | takes out ghee worth one and a

half rupees a seor|| Whatever kind cf ghee one may ask | of all kinds

of ghee our father | from that very vessel j does take out [{ Now tell me ]

isn’t it that our father’s trick J is more wonderful than that of the juggler,'?JJ

10. Story of a Sick Traveller

In some place | in a lonely house | there lived a man |J

To him | came a travelled Ho askod the travelled “Where

are you going ?”[[ The traveller said | I am going to a

doctor”|| He then invited the traveller to dinnor | and placed

four loaves before him | and himself went oat to fetch some vegetable

(i.e. curry) U Before lie returned with vegetable l the traveller had

eaten up all the four loaves(| He then J returned to fetch morn loaves ( then

in the meantime | the traveller ate up the whole vegetable [f The poor

follow | placing the four loaves | again went out for more vegetable When

ho came back | he found J that the knave1 J even these four loaves

also | had made away with || Acting thus J he ate np sixteen loaves ||

1 (lit, holy person)

 202
chekiar kar oala n§ | khedpi chAcj: dit:al| phe:r

ode ko!5 pucihea | pAi “tti kc^i gal:e | hakr.m ko:l cal:ea

g?”|| 6n§ keha | “mA§ koi haljme di dAua | lAe:a cal:ea

g|| mA§n:fi pcuk:h bilkul nl lAg:adi”|| 6 bol:ea j “jAd td

raji hoke mup | e:s ra na &i!|”

11. ccal:e dATji di kohani

ik: pApa hoed dArji | kise pinqaca j kAm:

kAida hunda sit[ ik; din | ode ko:l | o:s pimp da mila |

ccag:a samAoin aea|| dArji n§ 6nfi huk:a pha^aea |

pAi do tin: sute la lAue|| phe:r keha | “nale huk:a pi |

te nale koi gAl: suna”|| 6 b )I:ea | <<#khaliFa ji | mA£

ik: bAp ajAelb gAi: | ik kata:b ca kAI: pAp si[J

dil:l(J)5 mAe katalb m§gai | te 6 de ca likhea hoea e | pAi

jida sit chota | te dap Iambi houe | 6 ceal:a ‘ hunda ■ g|j

khAbar ni e gAl: sac: e ka c*nth”|| dArji ne keha |

“na ji | e gAl: ta | koi ni na man:an lag:ea"|| khAe:r j

thop cir bAe ke J mDa Apne k-Ar tur gea|| hun d*rji

soc:a ca pAe gea[[ onfi Asal c | e:s gAl da bAota

phikar si | pAi odi dap Iambi si j te sir cot:a||

6 soc:an lag:ea | pAi "mA§ ki kAra?|| sir ta mera |

bAp nAi na bAnan lag'.eail ha [ iggAl (ik gAl) ho sAkdi

e | dap kAtar ke mAe jato nik:i kAr SAkda e|| ese

khead ca | kAgnci lob:an leg:eai| 6 kdre na l&b:i||

 203

At last the owner of the house | gavo up all thought of him|| Then

he enquired from him J “For what reaspu | are you going to the

physician'?” He replied | “Some medicine of digestion I j am • going

to get | for I do not have appetite at &ll[| He said | “Wheu you

come back after recovery | do not pass by this way”U

11. Story of • Foolish Tailor

A literate tailor j in some village | used to ,do

his businessU Oue day | to him | the hoadman of that village |

came to get his shirt sewn|| The tailor handed him the pipe |

so that he may have two or three puffs j and then said | “While you smoke

you may also tell me some story”|[ He replied | “0 worthy Khalifa | a

very strange thing I | road in a book yesterday [[

I had sent for the book from Delhi | and it is written therein | that

whosoever has a small head | and a long beard J is alicay* foolish U

I do not know whether it is true or not”[[ The tailor replied |

“No Sir | this thing iudeed [ uo oue is going to believe’*!! Well |

after sitting for a short liino | the headman went home[| Now the tailor

was absorbed in thoughts!! In reality he { was much

concerned at this | that his beard was long | but head was smallQ

He thought | “What should I do ? (| My head indeed j

cannot become bigger|[ Of coarse one thing is possible |

I can make my beard shorter by trimming it,r[| In this very thought |

» 1
he began to look for the scissors!! It could not bo found anywhere!)
r akhi:r Akke | lacari nail | ho:r ala:j soc:ea|| diua bail

' ke Apni dajd de nej;e leaad&H khab:e hAiih nail daju |

phAfi | or saj:e hAt:h divall oda mAtlab si | pAi

jAraika da^i chot:i ho jae|| Ag: lag:an sa:r | clieti

cheti hAttai pA5:c gAi|[ on§ Apna hAtta baca lea | ar

da^i chAciia dit:i|| sari dafi ;a! gAi[| find bAfi SAram ai |

or kheail kAran lag:ea[] pAi sac:i | muc:i jo kuch o:s

katalb ca likhea hoea si [ bilkul thi:k sill cde ca ki

Ccu:th e | mAg bA^a c*Al:apAna kit'.all

12. ik: sahukaic te 6 de k.ofe.

*amb9rsAr sAer c | ik: sahuka:r rAeda si|| 6 nu

khea:l pae gea | pAi “je mAg kcoj;a rak:ha 1 ta lo:k

meri bA^i ipot kAran geM|| o:s fchA5 sa:l de sail | ik:

peari mel:a Ug:ada e|| pAella ta | 6 me!:e c(a) ja ke |

(or meliejja ke) km:a cir de:xda reha | phe:r chekiof |

6 n5 | ik: sdni ar te:j kcofi mul lAi|| rAq bal:5 | 6 kali

sJa si | te calian nu | hAoa nal6 bi te:j|| dil ta dda

bifa khus sill Apne sare janud na:l odi gAl: kArda

si|‘pAi “caIio | meri k°ofi de:kh Iae | baaa soni sM||

ik: din j onu kite | ban<le jana pea|| sahi:s nfl

sAd:a ke | bA^i tagiid kit:i (pAi “edi caijgi tara rak:hi

kArill kise o:pre aidrni nfi na ne^e A5:n dAi"j|

sahi:s bolrea | “toba | ji]) majall e | mA§ ta thwac^e

 205

At last being tired | with helplessness | lie thought of another remedy[J

Lighting a lamp lie brought it close to bis beard([ He seized his beard with

the left hand | and the lamp with the right hand]] His object was ] that

the beard may become a little shorter]] As soon as the heard caught fire

(lit. fire began) | it reached quickly upto the hand|| He forsooth saved his

hand ] but let hold of the beard |l The whole of the beard was burnt Jj

He felt greatly ashamed and began to think | that really | what was

written in the book | was quite correot|| There is no

doubt in it that I have committed a great folly” H

A
. W* • .* J *

12. A Merchant and His Horses

In the city of Amritsar | there lived a merchant]] A thought

occurred to him | “If I koop a horse | people will

respect me very much”|| At that place j every year j a big

fair is held|| At first forsooth | going to the fair | he kept

looking for a long time | then finally he | purchased

a beautiful and fast mare|[ As to colour | she was dark black j

and as to pace | *hc wm fastor even than wind]] Ho was indeed pleased

at lioariy To all his friends | he talked of her {

thus “Come! and see my mare | she is very beautiful'' g

One day | perchance he | had to go on a journey]] Calling the

groom | he enjoined on him | “Guard her very carefully (|

Do not allow any stranger to come near herM|J The groom

replied | “Good gracious Sir|| Is it possible that one can harm her | I forsooth
 20t>

Ao:n tal | sa5:o bi nl l9g:ea”|| e gAl:a sun ke | 6

tesaa nu tjr gea | te tigat Iae ke | (Jdc^e ca bAE gea|f
03e ga^ii de nej;e | ik: oda Ja'.r kbAfasill sal:a:m

kArke | pucihan lag:ea | pAi “tu suk:h call | kit:he

cal:ea e,,|j 6 ine keha | “#gujrdoale jaaa e”J| 6

bolea | “mA§ td #bajirabad jdnd e|| caIo phe:r

kat:he bAEt:hie”|l 6 ne keha | “mAe ta ag:e bA?t:ha d”||
Akhe “c kichar di gAl: g | Aet:he a ka bAe ja”|| khAg.'r

kAe sun ke | 6 nu ose gac^ii ca batha lea||

ra ci gal:I lAg:a pAgjj 6ia do:«t ak:han lag tea—

pAi 4“toba, bAi I aj: kAl da bAfa'khatia SAnd e|| jcpa

gal:d han sunidia an | sad:e md pea de belre J kAdi

nAl si hundid”i| “keho jAJ:d gala? koi acArj gAl:

hoi g?,,|| 6 ne keha | “Iae bAi I mAe tAgn'.u

bilkul nAmi gAl: | sanAona g|| •balm co:r di gAl: ta

nA! nd sun! honi?|| 6 ta cori Ui | Aec^a mAsahuir ho

gea e | pAi ki das:d”||

sahukair n§ puclhea I “kistra di cori kArda

e',?|| 6 ne kdha | “chAcj:ada td kise tard di bi
nAhi | pAr bAota sA5:k | t*ag:e foo^e Iae ja:n da e,,||

e gAl: sun ke | sahuka:r da td tra niteal geail

puc:ban lag:ea | “kit:he rAsda e?M|l 6 bol:ea | “kcAr

ta 6 da *hArar e | par cori sehar ca bi bAo:t kArda e” |
sahuka:r bacare da rAijga pila ho geail kAen lag:ea||
“meri ik: klurio son! | nAra! kherid:i hoi s|j
 207 •

until yon rot am | shall not oven go to Hearing this thing | he

left for the station | and purohasing a ticket | got into an Inter-class

(lit. one and a half) compartment [[

Near that very carriage | there stood a friend of his [[ Greeting

him | he enquired—“God bless you (lit. with welfare) J where are you

going?”U He said | “I am going to Gujranwala’U He added |

“I forsooth am going to Wazirabad J come then let us

sit together’-!! He said | l*I indeed have taken a seat in a fronr carriage”|J

“What does this mean? | come and take a seat here” H In short

after some discussion \ ho made him to sit in that, very carriage |!

On the way they began talking [| His friend said |

“Good gracious, friend J the age of now-a-dttys is very bad JJ

The things that are heard now' | in the time of our parents |

never happened” U “What kind of things? Has anything strange

taken place?!! He replied | “Look friend | quite a new thing to

you I | am going to relate U I beh>oe you have not heard the story of

Ballu thief|| Have you? | For theft indeed he | has heroine so notorious |

that 1 don’t knoir what to say” U

The merchant asked | “ What kind of theft does he

commit ?” 1| He replied | “He does not omit any kind |

hut a great fancy ) he haB for stealing cattle and horses!)

Hearing this thing | the merchant was startled (lit. his startledness

went out)I! He further asked | “Where does he live?"!] He replied J “His

home indeed is at Harar \ but he often commits theft in the city itself’!)

The poor merchant’s complexion turned pale || He said |

tkThere is a very beautiful mare of mine | newly bought)!

 208 .
kidre oda ta tSain na kAre”|| ode doist n§ kgha |
pAi “kArda ta bAota eho i e|| Ae^ia sednd e | pAi
onu sarea de uthan bAet'bon da I pAta rAida e||
jAd kise ne banc^e jana hunda e | ta bi 6 pAta la landa
e|| phe:r peam§ din hone p^ame ralt | 6 u^iikda e
jAd to! .(jAttai) nAokiar na ba5 lAg:n|| pheir cup: capita
andar bApda 61 ar rasia kholl ke|| tcogie ja (Ja) kflo|;e
nu Ue janda e|| 6 de do tm satihi bi an | kise de
hAt:h | kise duir de pm^ to:r drada e | ar a:p bAetiha !
tamasia deixda e,,|l

sahuka:r bacara pea tApphe | pAr ki kAre? |

qa;g-gsc|:i b ca bAetiha si | te gaqii ne *lahAo:r ja ke
khArna si (khAjna si)|| khAe:r Aok:ha sukhala | bel:a
lAq gtall *l»hAo:r pA5:c ke | c0At: ut:ar gea|| do k„Ante
ucjilknd pea | phe:r # ambers at joinoali gecili mili[|
6 si lokal | pA5n§ tin kcAntea ca *ambarsAr
. pA5c:i|| tesan to jakia kit:a|| jakieoale nn keha |
pAi k^a dAb'.a ke nathall k,Ar pA5:c ke | kail
nail I dund pca^a data | te andar bApea|| bApdea sa:r |
tabelie bAl nAjar kit:i | dekihea pAi khaki e|| hun ta
khApan di bi satiea nd rAhi|| pucihded puchded
(pufidla) | maluim hoea | pAi ik: nAokiar rotli khain
gea si|| dajia bAetiha keox'i di rakihi kArda si||
odi jAra Ak:h lAg gAi|| bAs: jAd Agla nAokiar muf ke
a8a | ta kAen lagiea | “uth oe ba marea | k«opi kitihe ef”||
 209

God forbid lest he thinks of her” [1 His friend said |

“This is exactly what he often does || He is so wise | that

about the actions of all he | keeps himself well-informed [|

When one has to go on a journey | he gets the news even

then [| Then be it day or night | he waits

tin all servants are asleepH Then he silently

enters in | and unfastening the rope | takes away the cattle or horse||

He has two or three companions also | and through some

ono | sends it to a distant village | and himself remaining

behind | enjoys the fun” U

The poor merchant became very uneasy | but what could he do? [|

He was sitting in a mail train | which had to atop at Lahore \[

Well | somehow or other {lit. with difficulty or case) the time

passed || Reaching Lahore | he at once got down [[ Ho had to wait two

hours j then he caught a train going to Amritsar []

That was a local train | and reached Amritsar in two and three quarters

of Lours || He hired a yakka at the station | and asked the driver

to urge on the horses|| Reaching homo J with haste | be

paid double the fare | and went insido|| Immediately on entering |

he looked into the stable | and found that it was ompty|| Now

be had not left streugth enough to stand even|| On enquiring |

he learnt | that one of the servants had gone to take bis

meal | the other was • watching the mare|| He

fell asleep for a while H In short when the first servant came

back | be Baid | “Get up 0 senseless one | where is the mare? ||

 210
horr ki dasiana si?|| 6 da koi pAta nl lagieail
kin:a cir sahukair | puls kolo bi talais karAoda reha||
pulasoalSa ne kAi aidrnia nu phApea bi | pAr kise
kol6 cori da pAta na lagieail

keopi di cori da | sahukair ne Aecpa gAm kit:a |

pAi sarea nu jakiin ho gea | hun e n§ jJude ji | kAde
keopi nAi rakihni j ar sac:i muc:I 6 ne At:h dAs bAre
rakihi bi nAh!|| atlha dAsa bArea mAgro | phe:r odi
rakihan di sla hoi|| Asitki | one cit:a kcopa | *gujrati6
ravl leali 6 bi mapa nAi si|| 6 de c(a) phAgat Aenii
kAsar si I p b§gii te gijiea hoea nAf si|) ta bi on§ k6ba |
je do tin pkeri jopage | ta J.gijia jau[|

pd onu jop§a | ta eistra tore a | pAi jdni saii um

eho kAm: kArda reha e|| sahukair bi kAen lagiea | 6 ta
caqga mail theaeall ik: din 6 kise pinq | Apni sam:l
kol6 rapaJie lAe'.n gea II jandi pheri ta k0opa thiik gea
si | par ASde hoe I khAber ni | 6 nu ki ho gea | ik:o
pheri m&joir natihan t^Ae pea|| sahukair ne | sara
joir la ke J bagia khicild | par kcopa na monieali
akhiir | ra de k&ncie | b&gii ulta dit:i|| sahukair te
sahiis | sir p«air (Jig pAg|| pd onia nu surt ai | qigde
tAsde hAoli hAoli | koAr pA5ice|| tmi ethoare j menjea
te lambe pae rAhe|| 6 Tkcopa | kise pti koil |
belc ditiall

pheir bi rk: bari | on§ kcopa mul lea | lall

4
 211

W hat more could ho nay? || No trace of her was found | For a

long time the merchant j had a eoarch for her made by the police [[

The police even arrested several persons | but from none

any clue of the mare | was found||

Theft of the mare | the merchant grieved so ranoh |

that all became sure | that now during his life time | he will never

keep a mare j and truly indeed he did not koep for several

\lit. eight, ton) yearsH After some years | he again thought

of keeping one || This time | a white horBe J ho purchased

at Gujrat (J That too was not bad |[ In him there was only this defect j

that he had not been trained (lit. accustomed) to draw a tr&pj| Even then he

thought J “If twice or thrice we yoke him | he will get accustomed’^

When he was yoked | he went in such a way | as if his whole life |

he had been doing the same thing [[ The merchant also thought ] “This is

a very good investment” || One day to some village he J went to receive

money from a debtor of hisJlWhen going (i.e.on the way there)the horse went

quite right | but when returning | one does not know J what became to him J

all of a sudden he began to run headstrong || The merchant | with all

his strength | palled the reins | but the horse did not yield U

At last | at the side of the road | the hors* upset the trap|j The merchant

and the groom | fell down hoadlongUWhen they recovered consciousness |

stumbling and falling | slowly and gradually | they arrived home[|Three weeks

they remained confined (lit. lying) to beds U This horse | to a Jat |

was sold |l

Even once again | he * purchased a horse | of red

rAqdall pAelia t& 6 thi:k janda reha | mAgr6 ak:he
nAl si lAgidall onu ik: cabak saoa:r ko:l pej'.ea | te
rapAJ:e bi bApe klurc kit:e|| 6 de pic:h6
kuch thiik turda reha|| phe:r 6 nti rasAoli ho gAi|| ik: ra:t
fcopa kharais ca rgha'I Agle dm jAd sabeir sa:r |
sahi:s utlhea | ta ki delxda e pAi k-opa nurea pea e|]
t de pic:h5 | sahuka'.r ne koopa rakihan | di sa5 khad:i||
 213

colour || At first he used to go right | but later

he did not obey the orders || He sent him to a horse-trainer | and
spent a lot of money[[After this he (i. t. horBe)’ went right for
some time || Then a swelling appeard on him [| One night
the horse remained in a mill|| Next day early in the morning when |
the groom got up J he saw that the horse was deadU
After this | the merchant | took an oath never to keep a horse||
 VOCABULARY.
The alphabetical order of the phonetic symbols is: a, a, a, b, c,
x,
c, d, cl, e, 8, f, g, h, i, i, j, J, k, 1, m, n, ji, q, 0> p, r, s, t, e, t, u,
u, D, x. The signs [ r'], [c]. [a] and [:j do not affect the order.
acArj adj. surprising I Ak: v. i. be tired
ac:ha adj. m. well, inter j. all Ak:h s. f. eye, pi ak:hd
right, is it so ? Akhe conj. that, saying
adolat s. f. Court of justice. a5 v. II pi. are
ag:a 8. m. front, -e adv. in front Aok:hd adj. m. difficult
ajAg:b adj. strange AO:n inf. of a ‘come*
akba'.r s. m. newspaper AO:nge v. Fut. Ill pi they will
akhi:r adv. at last come
ala:j s. m. remedy Apn-a adj. m. own
•ambarsAr s. m. Amritsar. Asal s. m. reality
an v. Ill pi are Ast pron. (direct) wc
on:a adv. m. blind Ath adj. eight
ana:m s. m. gift, present, prize
a v. i. come
ana:r s. m. pomegranate
a aij. pron. this
andar prep., adv. in, inside
a:dmi s. m. man
ar conj. and
aea past tense from a ‘come*
asa:n adj. easy
aho inter j. yes
athb(D)ora s. m. week (lit. 8
akh v. t. tell
days).
a:kha s. m. saying, advice
aua:j s. f. sound, noise
aJ:e (from a) we may come,
Aed:ar adv. on this side.
a :lkas s. f. drowsiness
Aed/.a adj. m. so big, so large
a:p pron. self; ap:a we
AEme adv. thus, so, in vain
Aen:-a adj. m. so much. badtt: v. t. save
—ec adv. in the meantime. bac:a s. m. child
badara adj. m. poor, helpless
AEt:he adv. here
ba<$ha: v. t. spread
Ae:tki adv. this time
bagcea:r s. m. wolf
Ag: s. f. fire
b6g:i s. /. trap, coach
Agla adj. m. first
aj: adv. to-day;—kAl: adv. now¬ baha: v. t. cause to sit, seal.
adays •ba;iraba:d s. m. Wazlrabad
 216

bajo :g s. m. separation baba interj. welldone; adv. ex¬

bakh'sai v.t. cause to be forgiven tremely
bakirl .in. pleader baiccha s. m. king
bal:6 prep, from, with respect ba:g s. /. rein
to bahar a^v. outside
•bal:u >•. m. Ballu, (he thief ball r. t. light
bamair adj. sick bain s. m. arrow
ba'na: v. t. make bdncl-a s.m. stranger;(journey?)
baparim. merchant -e ja v. i. go abroad
bar'la:p s. m. lamentation bapiu s. m. father
ba'tho: v. t. cause to sit, seat bair s. m. day, time, turn ;-i s. f.
baca s. m child turn, time,
bAe v. i. sit bais s. in. bamboo
bAEgi s. f. a pole with slings at bait s. s. distance
both ends for carrying leads beic v. t. sell; becieai sold
baeith v. i. sit bell s. in. f. leisure
bAeim s. m. through, idea, fancy. ' bella s. rn. time
bAi co*j. = pAi ‘that*
• bepi s. f. boat •
interj. Friend! brother! bic(l) prep, in
bAl prep, towards
bilkul adv. at all, altogether
1. ban v. i. become bi adv. even; also, too
2. ban ?. m. forest
bibia s. m. darling, child
bAu:(a) v. i. bind bi:r s. m. brother
banfibdis s. m. exile, banishment bi:t v. i. pass; with ja id.
bAoit adj. adv. much; also bAota boil v.t. speak; s.m. word, speech
bAra s. m. year bticla adj. m. old, aged (f.-i)
barka s. m. leaf, page bu'lai v. t. to call, summon
baras s. m. year
c(a) prep, in, between
bap v. i. enter
ccagla s. m. shirt
bapa adj. adv. big, large; greatly
ccolia adj. m. foolish
bas(:) adv. In short; enough
caqga s. m. good, well
ba s. f. sense; — rnarea adj. m.
capitia adv. m. (word added to
senseless, cup:) silently.
baba s. m. saint c0agpa s. m. quarrel, dispute.
 2i?

cAk: v. t. lift. daj.'e v. I pi.1 we may give* see

caI: v. i. walk, go, start. de.
da'khal v. t. show,
c^:'(3)p^)Qna] *■”*• foolishness.
daliil $. f. argument,
CAOda adj. fourteen.
dania I sing, ‘giving* see de.
cAoidri s. m. headman.
dan da pres, pat t. (from de) giv¬
CAoha adj. (ob}. p\) all the four.
ing.
cAona I sing, ‘wishing* see ca.
derbarr s. m. court,
ccAt: adv. at once,
darea 5. m. river,
ca v. t. wish, desire,
cabak-saoair s. m. trainer of datia past part, (from de)
horses. given.
ca:r adj. four -e (dir. pi.) all daoali s. f. The Diwali festival.
four. dAb: v. t. press.
ce =(c+e) prep, in+even. dAi v. II Sing, ‘let thou give*.
cet:a s. m. memory dAm s. m. breath.
-e kAr v. t. commit to memory. dArji s. m. tailor.
chA(}: v. t. leave, dAS adj. ten -a Obi. pi.
ckatli s. f. chest, breast, dAs: v. t. tell.
che adj. six. dAoa s. f. medicine.
cliekiej; adv. at last, finally. da perp. of.
chet:i adv. soon, quickly, earlier, dapi s. f. beard.
chot'a adj. m. small; younger, daua s. m. suit, case.
cliutli s. f. leave, de v. t. give.
cir s. m. delay, time, de:kh v. t. see.
cita s. /. pyre. de.T s. /. delay.
desankala s. m. trasportation.
cit:a adj. m. white.
exile, banishment
c6 prey, from within, from
de:tta = de datia.
among.
dil s. m. heart.
coir s. m. thief; -i s. f. theft.
•diti 5. /. Delhi,
cuk: v. t. lift; finish.
dm s. m. day.
cup: adj. silent with capitla adv.
dmda pres. part, (from de)
m. silently,
giving.
cutki s. f. pinch.
ditia past. part, (from de)
ccu:th adj. adv. false; s. m. false¬
given.
hood.
dioa s. Tii. lamp, g v. II, /, si:ig. (from ho) ; artf
do adj. two; -ha obi. pi.; am.
-me [dir. pi.) both, also don'.o. gbb’.a s. m. centre.
do'.st .
5 ill- frieud. gsc^li s. f. carriage, train.
dukh s. m. trouble, inconvenience, gatS adv, in talk.
dukhi adj. distressed, troubled. gamanqi s. m. neighbour.
duj:a adj. m. second, gAl s. m. neck, throat.
duna adj m. double, gAl: 5. /. thing, matter, affair.
duir adj. distant; 5. m /. gAli 5. /. street.
distance. gam s. m. sorrow.
gArdan s, f. neck.
cjAe v. i. be engaged, begin
gApgAp s. m. f. gurgling noise.
<JAr s. in. fear; y. i. fear, be
geo past part. (from ja) gone.
afraid. gidiap s. m. jackal.
qa 8. m. f. overtaking, catching.
g;dpi 5. /. jackaless.
c(d de v. i. be overtaken, be gij: v. i. be accustomed.
caught. g,r v. i. fall.
qalk s. f. mail (train), •gita 8. /. The Bhagvad Gita.
cjalkdar s. m. doctor, pbysic:an. god:i s. f. lap.
tyg v. i. fall •gu/rait s. f. Gujrat.
c^olb v. t. immerse, dip. •gOjrauala s. m. Gujranwalu.
qpqia s. m. poppy-head. gus’.a s. m. anger,
.
(tuclla 5 m. (lit. l£ time) Inter¬ hakiim s. m. physician,
mediate compartment of a hamesd adv. always,
railway carriage, hatli s. f. shop,
clftqga adj. m. deep, hetzndnid s. m. shopkeeper,
ctd:? adj. one and a half. haual’.e adv. in care (of)
with kar v. 1. hand over.
e adv. even, only (used as
suffix). 1. hAE interj. alas!
§ prow. this. 2. hAE emphat. form of £ = is.
hAE emphat. of ae am.
ed:a ado. in this way.
hAjrat s. m. knave (lit. holy
eho pi on. this very, this same.
person).
e:s pron. obi. sing, of §.
hAoka s. m. deep sigh; bereave
e v. Ill sing. (from ho) is. ment.
 219

hAOli adv. slowly. jaua:b 5. m. answer, reply

hArap s. m. name of a village. jAd adv. when
hArja 5. m. compensation, jaI v.«. burn, be (burnt)
damage. jAm: v. i. be born
hAtlh s. m. hand; prep, through. jAna s. m. man, person
hAoa s. f. air, wind, jAari s. m. jeweller
ha adv. interj. yes. -bAca s. m. son of a jeweller
hajar adj. present, jAra adj. adv. little
hajma s. m. digestion. •jAsrat s. m. DaSaratba, father
ha:l s. m. matter, condition. of Rama
ha'.r s. m. wreath, garland, jAt: s. m. Jat, person of -Tat
hat’.hi s. m. elephant, tribe
he interparticle of address ja v. i. go ‘
o. janda pres. part, (from ju)
he’.rba 5. m. separation. going
he:th prep., adv. below, under, j&ni conj. as if
hetha prep, a Iv. below, under, jonh s. m. acquaintance, friend
hiran s. m. deer, je conj. if
ho v. i. become. jehd adj. m. like, similar
noea past part, of ho become, jepd pron. rel. {dir. sing.) who,
homa / sing. I may become. whoever
ho:r aij. more, other. jis pron. rel. {obi. sing.) whom
hukam s. m. order. jitlhe ado. rel. where
hjk’.a s. m. pipe, hubble-bubble 1. ji particle of respect sir;
hun adv. now; -e adv. just now respected
2. ji s. m. heart, mind •
ij'.at s. f. respect, honour 3. ji adj. /. from jea=jebeo
ik: adj. one; -o pheri adv. all of ji pron. rel {obi. sing.) whom
a sudden; -pheri adv. once jjfide ji adv. in life
i tmph. particle self, same, jo adv. wheD, tli&t
even joir s. m. strength, power
jo* v. t. yoke, harness . •
jak'.a s. m. two-wheeled convey¬
juin s. f. birth, life. - * *
ance
jaki’.n s. m. belief 3a conj. = fa or
3air s. m. friend
jaijg^al s. m. forest
 220

1. ka conj. or Mp3 s. f. 24 minutes

2. ka adv. about kasar s. f, defect
kahonl s. f. story, tale kAtar v. t. cut, trim
k&J:e (/ pi from kAe) we may kAtha s. /. story, tale
say kAt: v. t. cut
kal:a adj. adv. ?w. alone, lonely kAtlh s. m. meeting
kamcea:r s. m. potter kail s. f. haste, hurry
k&nqa s. m. edge, side, bank kala adj. m. black
kranta s. m. hour kali s. /. hurry
kapiapa s. m. cloth kaljd s. m. heart
ka'ra: v. t. cause to be done
ke sign of gerundial participle
kat&b s. /. book
1. keha adj. inter, m. of what
keV.ha adj. adv. m. together,
kind?
united
2. kgha past tense of kAe
katora $. m. metallic cup
kc.eo s. m. clarified butter, yhee
kAd adv. inter, when?
kepa pron. inter, (dir. sing.)
-e adv. indef. ever, at any time
who? which?
kAfl: v. t. turn out, take out,
khabia adj. m. left, not right
solve
*khalipha s. in. (lit. Caliph)
kAe v. t. tell, say
common title for a barber,
-sun ke after persuasion
tailor etc.
kAgld s. f. imprisonment
kharab'.i s. f. mischief, fault
kaenci s. t. pair of scissors
kharais s. m. flour-mill
kAhi (/. of kehu) how?, of what
khariid v. t. purchase
sort?
khAbar s. /. news
Ml: v. t. send
-ni no news: no one knows
kAll adv., s. f. yesterday; to¬
khA^I s. /. cavern
morrow
khAeir interj. well!
kAm: s. m. work
khAr(a)c v. t. spend
kAnc s. m. crystal, glass
khAtaadj. m. good, excellent
kar v. t. do
khAp v. i. stand
k,Ar s. m. house adv. at home
khApka s. m. noise
kAratta = kAr dat:a
kha v. t. cat
kArke prep, by reason of
khaki adj. empty
Mru m. pot, vessel
 221

kheall s. m. thought lacari s. f. helplessness

kheapa s. m. pursuit, thought l§g,.a: v. t. cause to pass or
khecisl 5. /. trouble cross
khell v. t. play •lahAOir s. m. Lahore
khic*. v. t. draw, pull laJle 1 pi. (from Us) we may
kholl v. t. open, unfasten take
khotla s. m. donkey lamba adj. m long
khotla adj. m. bad lapeit v. t. wrap, roll
khus adj. pleased la^ai s. f. quarrel
khu s. m. well Ub: v. t. find, search
kid:ar adv. inter. in what direc¬ "lAchman s. m. Lachman, Rama's
tion? whither? brother
kikisra adv. inter, how? lA8 v. t. take; interj. lo 1 look!
kiml adv. inter. how? —phe:r inter j. look! behold
km:a anv. how much? good deal lAg: v. i. attach, begin
kise prow, indef. {obi. sing.) lAi prep, for

some Umage I pi. fut. (from Iab)

k[bt(a/)ia adv. inter, how? we shall take
ttqg v. i. pass, go by
kite adv. indef. somewhere,
lAt(a)k v. i. hang
once
lADe III sing. (from Iae) he
kitihe adv. inter, where?
may take
ki pron. inter, what?
IqJ s. m ruby; adj. red
kitla past. part. (from kAr)
ld:m | adv. aside
done
Jamie/
kJu adv, inter, why?
lgAom infinitive from lea
koipron. indef. {dir.) any one,
lea: v. t. bring, fetch
some
likh v. t. write
ko:l prep, near
lo:k s. m. people
frofd s. m. horse
Iokal adj. local (train), slow
keopi s. f. mare
lo:p s. f. need
kuch, kufi pron. indef. anything
lofida pres. pass. part, {from
kufi s. /. girl . .
lo:?;) is needed
kus pron. indef. anything
ku:k s. f. cry—mar v. i. shriek, Iuq: v. t. cause to be applied,
cause to be dug (well etc.)
cry
 222
madari s. m. juggler mucll word used after sacll.
m5ga: v. t. send for mu'ka: v. t. finish,
mahiuia s. m. month mul: s. m. price,
majaii s. /. strength, power mun^a s. m. boy.
—8 is it possible! mup v. i. return,
makaln s. m. house muskal s. f. difficulty,
m(a)'ld: $. m. boatman md s. m. mouth, face.
maluim adj. known -jauQUii adv. by heart (lit. by
manja s. m. bedstead mouth and tongue).
ra£ pron. I -jo:r adv.{lit. hard-mouthed)
mAe pron. emph. I {used ' headstrong.
before bi "mulct s m. personal name.
mAgar prep, after.
nagier s. m. town,
mAgr6 adv. afterwards. na'tha: v. t. cause to run.
mxn: v. t. obey.
nAdi s. f. stream, river.
mAna adj. prohibited, prevented. nAgor s. m. town.
mAi]g v. 1. ask.
mar v. i. die. nAJ3 ) odv- not-
nusohu'.r adj. famous, notorious, DAjsr s. f. sight
matlab s. m. object, nAk: s. m. nose
mas. •. mother. nAma adj. m. new
— peo s. m. parents, nA5 s. m. name
malak s. m. owner, DADkiar s. m. servant
m&m'.d s. 7n. maternal uncle. nail prep, with; — e ado. also;
ma:r e. f. beating; v. t. beat, - 6 prep, than
kid, shoot • ■ ne postposition of the Agent
mafQ adj. m. bad.
case
mel:a s. m. fair, nepe adv. prep. near
mere pron. adj. m. ray, mine,
mjl v. i. meet, be allowed, ntolV- *'•«° ont
mitli s. f. earth. mk:a adj. m. small .
mUd s. m. headman; priest, n! adv. not
m&fl’.a s. m. shoulder, ntd s. f. sleep
mociie adv. on shoulders. nfi postposition of the Accusa¬
tive and Dative case
mb’*1 } s’ f' gol<^ co*n> mohar* ' o emphat. particle {added to
 223

other nn. and adjj.) even, bcArno ahl. of peAron from

indeed drawing (water)
6 pron. he, that pAp v. t. read
odrar adv. in that direction pata s. m. trace, clue; know¬
odu pic'.he adv. after that ledge
oe paiticle of aidies.-ing in¬ pa v. t. put
ferior Sirrah pa prep, with, near
olid s. m. screen, cover padia s. m. teacher
ol'.e adv. out of sight, hidden PoOncfa s. m. vessel
from pcalg s. m. fate
opra adj. m. strange, unknown pcai m. brother
o:s pron. (obi sing.) he, that p'dJa obi. pi. of pc<ii
ot:he adv. there p all s. f. search
p ami l conj. whether
pa'la: v. t. cause to drink
peumfi >
par unstressed form of par
paci s, m. water
pasmd adj. liked, approved papri s. m. sinner, wicked
pAe v. i. fall, lie down parr prep. adv. across
pAsc^a s. m. distance, journey Pcdir prep, on (m sirp'arr)
pAella adj. m. first, former pcapa s. m. hire, fare
pAel’.Q adv. at first pars prep. adv. near
paeir s. m. foot pea past part, (of pAe) fallen
paesa s. m. pice, farthing pealra s. m. cup
pAgat s. m. devotee, saint peo s. m. father
PcAi conj. that, so that plia'po: v. t. band over
pAj unstressed form of pAnj pharird s. m. name of a Muham-
prAj: v. i. run madan saint
pAnj adj. five phAsrsla •«. m. decision, division
pcAi)g s. f. an intoxicating drug phAgat adv. merely
Pa5:c v i. arrive phAp v. t. catch, arrest
1. pAond adj. m. three quarters pherr ada. again v. i. turn, re¬
2. pAODQ in/, of pa to get volve
par prep, upon; conj. but pheri s. f. a time, turn
p*Ar v. t. fill, draw (water). phikar s. m. sorrow
pArakh s.f. examination phir v, i. wander
pArja s. f. subjects phu'.s s. m. straw
piciha s. m. bind, back rakrhi s. f. protection
pic:ae adv. prep, behind, after •iaimcander s. m. Kama
pichla adj. in. Iasi raimrarm s. f. salutation, greet¬
piciho adv. afterwards ing
pmq, s. m. village rani s. f. queen
pi v. t. drink ralt 8. f. night
piltt adj. m. yellow, pale reha past tense (of iaei re¬
pci^a adj. tn. tight, narrow mained
po'.sti a. s. m, lazy (person) lit. nkhi s. m. sage, saint
one who is addicted to take ro v. i. weep, beA'ail
an infusion of poppy-heads, ro:j adv. daily
potlhi s. /. book ronid pres, tense. /, 11 ^i„g
pram 5. m. life am, art weeping
puc’.h v. t. ask, enquire ro:p s. in. pebble, stone
p»us:h s. f. hunger ro:ti s. f. loaf, bread, meal
Puj1: s. f. error, fault v. i. for¬ rukih s. m. tree
get rupAE s. m. pi. rupees, money
pjl(a)s s. /. police
sobAbf:) s. -uu reason, cause
—uala s. m. police officer
sabeir a-. /. m. morning
put: s. m. son
sac’.I adv. truly
pcuJe adv. on the ground
s9c’jo udv. truly
rapaJia s. m. rupee, money sadulkh s. m. box, safe
rasAoli s. /. swelling S9ga:r v. t. adorn
ros’.a s. m. rope sahlis s. m. groom
rah: s. m. God saijft adj. m. right (hand)
tae v. i. live,, remain B3ka:r s. f. hunting
raj: v.i. be satisfied s(3)'la: s. f. advice, mind
rAk:h v. t. keep sala:m s. m. salutation
taI v. t. mix, assemble S9luna s. m. vegetable, curry
rAijg s. m. colour sa'ma: v. t. cause to be sewn;
ra s. m. road s3mA5:n inf.
rohi s. m. traveller ssm'jca: v. t. make understand,
raja s. m. king advise
raji adj. well, cured sanASnd pres, tense 1, II sing.
—noma s. m. agreement am, art relating
 225

s(a)rd:p s. m. curse
seand adj. m. wise
sar'kd’.r s. f. government
seo s. m. apple
sarminda adj. m. ashamed
se:r s. m. seer
sailed s. f. strength
se:th s. m. merchant, banker
ssoail s. m. question, sum
sir s. m. head
sAb pron. adj. all;—na obi. pi.
—pcd:r adv. headstrong
sac: s. m. truth; adj. right, true si past tense (sing.) was
SAd: v. t. invite, call
siund s. m. gold
sAeir s. m. city, town
so:c s. f. anxiety: v.t. think
SAi particle of emph. indeed
sola adj. sixteen
SAk v. i. ba able, be possible
sona adj. m. beautiful
sAm(a)j v. t. understand
sud: s. f. ashes
SAma s. m. time, age
suk: v. i. dry
sAnj s. f. evening
sukh s. m. comfort
sAijg s. m. throat
suk:h s. f. welfare
sad adj. hundred
sukh aid adj. m. easy
s*5 v. i. sleep
sun v. t. hear, listen
sA5 s. f. oath
su'nc: v. t. relate, tell, recite
sAo’.k s. m. zeal, fancy
sunida pres. pass. part, (of
SAram s. f. shame
sun)' is being heard
•sArban s. m. Sarban, a devotee
surt s. f. sense, consciousness
SAp v. i. burn
sutd s. m. puff of smoking
SApak s. f. road
tabel'.a s. m. stable
SAt: adj. seven
tagi'.d s. f. emphasis
£ad,'.a prcn. adj. m. our
tamas:d s. m. show, fun
sahukdir s. m. merchant, banker
t«andd s. m. affair, business
Sdll s. m. year
?dm:I s. f. debtor t(a)ra s.f. way, manner
tA§ pron. (II obi. sing.) thou,
Jdind pron. I Acc. Bat. pi. us
thee
fair particle of emph. im¬
tcAr v. t. put
mediately
Sdrd adj. m, whole, all tApaph v. i. be uneasy

Sdtlhi s. m. companion td adv. then; even, indeed, for¬

se past tense (pi.) were sooth
Bed: adj. black = sJd toi prep, upto
te prep, upon; conj. and
sea:l s. m. winter
 226

tceain s. m. attention t,8£lora s. m. drum, proclama¬

te:j adj. fast tion
tcel:a s. m. half pice tc8g:d s. TTi. cattle
tet:6 pron. from thee tap'.a s. m. verse
thAS s. f. place tAg v. t.fall
the a: v. n. be found tAs:l tt. f. service
thepa adj. m. small, little teri s. f. heap
t head; a pron. adj. m. your tesen s. m station
thtdu'.u pron. 11 pi. Acc. Dal. then^a adj. m. cold
to you thAokerduara s. m temple
tin: adj. three thi’.k adj. right, correct
U 5. f. thirst tigst s. m. ticket
timi s. f. wife tukpas. 77i. bit, fragment
to prep, from, by
t/cfilk v. t. i. wait
toba s. /. repentance; inter
ulo:d s. f. offspring
God forbid
ul'ta: v. t. turn out
* to:r v. t. send, drive
umar s. f. age
tra s. /. startledness; with
ui)g s. f. sleepiness, drowsiness
mk:al v. i. get a start
ure adv. here
tur v. i. start, depart
utiar v. i. get down
tusl prow, 11 (dir pi.) you
itlh v. i. get up, rise
tQ pron. 11 sing, thou
tu emph. form of tfi used ua’d adj. m. used as a suffix
lefore bi possessing, owning
 CENTRAL ARCHAEOLOGICAL LIBRARY,
NEW DELHI

Catalogue No.

Author Banarsi Das.

j-t|e_ Phonology of Panjabi.

Borrower No. Date of Issue | Date of Return

‘*4 book that is shut is but a block”

* Sa?A Vi*/3

S^aEOLoG/q^

fir
& GOVT. OF INDIA <>.
<V Department of Archaeology
£ NEW DELHI.
Vs
Please help tzs to keep the book
clean and moving.
' ■ ' •*.V :* ’2-i> > , \ ■' t-:*•& {

? 44*. *». attHL